Patent Publication Number: US-2022212483-A1

Title: Printing apparatus

Description:
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS 
     This application claims priority to U.S. Application No. 63/133,685, filed Jan. 4, 2021, U.S. Application No. 63/145,865, filed Feb. 4, 2021, U.S. Application No. 63/201,659, filed May 7, 2021, and Indian Application No. 202111046460, filed Oct. 12, 2021, the contents of which are hereby incorporated herein in their entirety by reference. 
    
    
     TECHNICAL FIELD 
     Example embodiments of the present disclosure relate generally to a printing apparatus and, more particularly, to apparatuses, systems, and methods for printing utilizing laser print head and reactive media. 
     BACKGROUND 
     A typical printing apparatus may include a print head that may be configured to print content on print media. In some examples, the printing apparatus may be configured to print content using one or more known technologies such as laser printing, thermal printing, and/or the like. 
     BRIEF SUMMARY 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a method is provided. The method may comprise: actuating, by a processor, a first roller and a second roller to cause traversal of print media along a first direction, wherein the first roller is positioned upstream of the second roller along the first direction; causing, by the processor, the first roller to stop rotating at a first time instant; and causing, by the processor, the second roller to stop rotating at a second time instant, wherein the second time instant is chronologically later than the first time instant. 
     In some examples, the method may comprise causing a print head to print content on the print media in response to stopping the rotation of the second roller. 
     In some examples, the first roller is positioned upstream of the print head, and the second roller is positioned downstream of the print head. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises causing a traversal of the first roller and the second roller along a second direction, wherein the traversal of the first roller and the second roller along the second direction causes the first roller and the second roller to be spaced apart from the print media. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises determining a time period between the first time instant and the second time instant based on one or more print media characteristics, wherein the one or more print media characteristics comprises at least one of a type of the print media, or a thickness of the print media. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. The printing apparatus may comprise: a print head assembly comprising at least a bottom chassis portion configured to receive a print media, and a frame movably positioned above the bottom chassis portion along a vertical axis of the printing apparatus, wherein the frame is movable between a first position and a second position, wherein the frame, in the first position, is spaced apart from the bottom chassis portion and wherein the frame, in the second position, presses the print media against the bottom chassis portion. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the printing apparatus may comprise: a first roller; a second roller positioned downstream of the first roller along a first direction, wherein the first roller and the second roller facilitate traversal of print media in the first direction; a processor communicatively coupled to the first roller and the second roller; wherein the processor is configured to: actuate the first roller and the second roller to cause traversal of the print media in the first direction, cause the first roller to stop rotating at a first time instant; and cause the second roller to stop rotating at a second time instant, wherein the second time instant is chronologically later than the first time instant. 
     In some examples, each of the first roller and the second roller comprises a biasing member and a roller, wherein the biasing member is coupled to the roller, wherein the biasing member is configured to apply a biasing force on the roller, along a second direction, causing the roller to abut the print media. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may comprise: triggering an ultraviolet (UV) light emission from a UV light source onto a print media associated with a printing apparatus; detecting a reflected light from the print media; generating a light intensity indication based on the reflected light; and determining whether the print media is supported by the printing apparatus based on whether the light intensity indication satisfies a light intensity threshold. 
     In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: determining that the light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold; and in response to determining that the light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold, determining that the print media is supported by the printing apparatus. 
     In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises determining that the light intensity indication does not satisfy the light intensity threshold; and in response to determining that the light intensity indication does not satisfy the light intensity threshold, determining that the print media is not supported by the printing apparatus. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the printing apparatus may comprise: a laser print head; and at least a first laser source and a second laser source in electronic communication with the laser print head. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a print media is provided. In some examples, the print media may comprise: a laser markable coating defining a top layer of the print media; and a reflective layer defining an intermediary layer of the print media. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may comprise: receiving, by a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus, print data indicating at least a first power level; receiving, by the controller, a darkness setting input; adjusting, by the controller, the first power level to a second power level based at least in part on the darkness setting input; receiving, by the controller, a contrast setting input; adjusting, by the controller, the second power level to a third power level based at least in part on the contrast setting input; and providing, by the controller, the third power level to a laser power control system of the print head. 
     In some examples, the first power level is associated with a first dot to be printed by the print head on a print media. 
     In some examples, the laser power control system of the print head is configured to cause a laser subsystem of the print head to print the first dot at the third power level. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may comprise: determining, by a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus, print data; determining, by the controller and based at least in part on the print data, a target print speed; and determining, by the controller and based at least in part on the target print speed, a target media temperature. 
     In some examples, the target print speed is determined based at least in part on a lookup table. 
     In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to determining, by the controller, that a current media temperature is within a predetermined range of the target media temperature, providing, by the controller, a control indication to cause at least one laser of the printing apparatus to perform power compensation operations. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the printing apparatus may comprise: a laser print head; and at least a first laser source in electronic communication with the laser print head, wherein the laser print head is configured to generate at least one laser control signal in order to generate a pre-emphasis driving signal at the start of at least one print dot for a time period that is less than the overall dot time. 
     The foregoing illustrative summary, as well as other exemplary objectives and/or advantages of the disclosure, and the manner in which the same are accomplished, are further explained in the following detailed description and its accompanying drawings. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
       The description of the illustrative embodiments can be read in conjunction with the accompanying figures. It will be appreciated that for simplicity and clarity of illustration, elements illustrated in the figures have not necessarily been drawn to scale. For example, the dimensions of some of the elements are exaggerated relative to other elements. Embodiments incorporating teachings of the present disclosure are shown and described with respect to the figures presented herein, in which: 
         FIG. 1  illustrates a perspective view of a printing apparatus, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 2  illustrates perspective views of a portion of the printing apparatus depicting the print head engine, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 3A  illustrates an exploded view of the print head engine, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 3B  illustrates another exploded view of a portion of the printing apparatus, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 3C  illustrates an example view of a portion of the printing apparatus, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 4A  and  FIG. 4B  illustrate side views of the second roller, respectively, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 5  illustrates a sectional view of the second roller, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 6  illustrates another perspective view of the portion of the printing apparatus, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 7  illustrates a front right view of the portion of the printing apparatus, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 8  illustrates a perspective view of the third roller assembly, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 9A  and  FIG. 9B  illustrate a side view and a sectional view of the second roller, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 10A  and  FIG. 10B  are sectional views of the printing apparatus illustrating the traversal of the third roller assembly and the fourth roller assembly, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 11  illustrates a sectional view of the printing apparatus, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 12  illustrates an exploded view of the print head engine, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 13  illustrates a perspective view of the frame, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 14  illustrates a sectional view of the top chassis portion, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 15  illustrates a perspective view of another implementation of the frame, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 16  illustrates a bottom perspective view of the bottom chassis portion, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 17  illustrates another perspective view of a portion of the bottom chassis portion, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 18  illustrates a perspective view of the modular platform, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 19 a    and  FIG. 19 b    illustrate perspective views of the modular platform being slid on the bottom chassis portion, and the bottom chassis portion with the modular platform, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 20  illustrates a schematic of the print head, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 21  illustrates a schematic diagram of the laser subsystem, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 22  illustrates a schematic diagram of the SOL detector, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 23  illustrates a schematic of the laser power control system, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 24  illustrates a schematic diagram of the print head with the heat dissipation unit, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 25A  and  FIG. 25B  illustrate the composition of the print media, and chemical processes associated therewith, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 26  is a schematic diagram illustrating printing of the content on the print media, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 27  illustrates a block diagram of the control unit according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 28  illustrates a flowchart of a method for operating the printing apparatus, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 29  illustrates a functional block diagram of the portion of the printing apparatus, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 30  illustrates a flowchart of a method for operating the printing apparatus, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 31A  and  FIG. 31B  illustrate the positioning of the frame with respect to the print media, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 32  illustrates a flowchart of a method for printing content in the print media, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 33  illustrates another method for printing content on the print media, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 34  is a flowchart illustrating another method for printing content on the print media, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 35  illustrates a flowchart of a method for determining the measure of skew that may get introduced in the printed content, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 36 a   ,  FIG. 36 b   , and  FIG. 36 c    are schematic diagrams illustrating an example relationship between the count of writing laser beams and the measure of the skew, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 37  illustrates a flowchart of a method for modifying the content prior to printing, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 38 a    illustrates an image of the modified content to be printed using a single writing laser beam, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 38 b    illustrates an image of the modified content to be printed by multiple writing laser beams, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 39  illustrates a sectional view of the print head engine, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 40  illustrates an example flow chart according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 41  illustrates an example flow chart according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 42  illustrates an example flow chart according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 43  illustrates an example timing diagram according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 44  illustrates an example flow chart according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 45  illustrates an example schematic diagram according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 46  is an example timing diagram according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 47  illustrates an example flow chart according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 48  illustrates an example view of a portion of an example printing apparatus according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 49  illustrates an example block diagram illustrating some example components of an example printing apparatus according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 50  is an example flow diagram illustrating example methods associated with determining whether a print media is supported by a printing apparatus according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 51  illustrates an example chart showing example light intensity indications according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 52  is an example flow diagram illustrating example methods associated with determining whether a print media is supported by a printing apparatus according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 53  illustrates an example chart showing example light intensity indications according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 54  is an example flow diagram illustrating example methods associated with determining a print media signature according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 55  illustrates an example chart showing example light intensity indications according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 56  is an example flow diagram illustrating example methods associated with determining a print media signature according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 57  illustrates an example chart showing example light intensity indications according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 58  illustrates an example chart showing example light intensity indications according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 59A  illustrates an example top view of a portion of an example printing apparatus according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 59B  illustrates an example side view of a portion of an example printing apparatus according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 60  is an example flow diagram illustrating example methods according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 61A  illustrates an example perspective view of a portion of an example printing apparatus according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 61B  illustrates an example cross-sectional view of a portion of an example printing apparatus according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 61C  illustrates an example zoomed view of a portion of an example printing apparatus according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 62A  illustrates an example top view of a portion of an example bottom chassis portion according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 62B  illustrates an example perspective view of a portion of an example bottom chassis portion according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 63A  illustrates an example cross-sectional view of a portion of an example printing apparatus according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 63B  illustrates a zoomed view of a portion of an example printing apparatus according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 64  illustrates an example laser print head controller according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 65  illustrates an example schematic depicting laser beams generated by two laser sources according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 66  illustrates a flowchart diagram illustrating example operations according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 67  illustrates a flowchart diagram illustrating example operations according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 68  illustrates a flowchart diagram illustrating example operations according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 69  illustrates an example schematic diagram depicting an optical assembly according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 70  illustrates an example cross-sectional view of a collimating component according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 71  illustrates an example schematic diagram depicting a cross-sectional view of a collimating component according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 72  illustrates an example schematic diagram depicting a side view of at least a portion of a collimating component according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 73  illustrates an example schematic diagram depicting a side view of at least a portion of a collimating according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 74  illustrates an example schematic diagram depicting a top section view of an optical assembly according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 75  illustrates an example schematic diagram depicting a top section view of an optical assembly according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 76  illustrates an example schematic diagram depicting a top section view of an optical assembly according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 77  illustrates an example schematic diagram depicting a perspective view of a beam control component according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 78  illustrates an example schematic diagram depicting a perspective view of a beam control component according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 79  illustrates an example schematic diagram depicting a side section view of a printing media according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 80  illustrates an example schematic diagram depicting a side section view of a printing media according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 81  is an example flow diagram illustrating example methods in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 82  illustrates an example power level relationship diagram in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 83  illustrates an example power level relationship diagram in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 84  illustrates an example print media in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 85  illustrates an example print media in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 86  illustrates an example print media in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 87  illustrates an example power level relationship diagram in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 88  illustrate an example power level relationship diagram in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 89  illustrates an example power level relationship diagram in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 90  illustrates an example print media in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 91  illustrates an example print media in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 92  illustrates an example print media in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 93  is an example flow diagram illustrating example methods in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 94  is an example diagram illustrating an example duty cycle in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 95  is an example diagram illustrating an example duty cycle in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 96  is an example diagram illustrating an example duty cycle in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 97  is an example flow diagram illustrating example methods in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 98  is an example flow diagram illustrating example methods in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 99  is an example graph in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 100A  is an example graph in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 100B  is an example graph in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 100C  is an example graph in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 100D  is an example graph in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 101  illustrates example graphs in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 102  illustrates a functional block diagram of a portion of a printing apparatus, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 103  illustrates a functional block diagram of a portion of a printing apparatus, according to one or more embodiments described herein; 
         FIG. 104  illustrates an example graph in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 105  is an example flow diagram illustrating an example method in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 106  is a schematic diagram depicting an example portion of a printing apparatus in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 107  is a schematic diagram depicting an example portion of a printing apparatus in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 108  is a schematic diagram depicting an example portion of a printing apparatus in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 109  is a schematic diagram depicting an example portion of a printing apparatus in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 110  illustrates an example graph in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 111  is a schematic diagram depicting an example portion of a printing apparatus in accordance with examples of the present disclosure; and 
         FIG. 112  is an example flow diagram illustrating an example method in accordance with examples of the present disclosure. 
     
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION 
     Some embodiments of the present disclosure will now be described more fully hereinafter with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which some, but not all embodiments of the disclosure are shown. Indeed, these disclosures may be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as limited to the embodiments set forth herein; rather, these embodiments are provided so that this disclosure will satisfy applicable legal requirements. Like numbers refer to like elements throughout. 
     Unless the context requires otherwise, throughout the specification and claims which follow, the word “comprise” and variations thereof, such as, “comprises” and “comprising” are to be construed in an open sense, that is as “including, but not limited to.” 
     Reference throughout this specification to “one embodiment” or “an embodiment” means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment is included in at least one embodiment. Thus, the appearances of the phrases “in one embodiment” or “in an embodiment” in various places throughout this specification are not necessarily all referring to the same embodiment. Furthermore, one or more particular features, structures, or characteristics from one or more embodiments may be combined in any suitable manner in one or more other embodiments. 
     The word “example” or “exemplary” is used herein to mean “serving as an example, instance, or illustration.” Any implementation described herein as “exemplary” is not necessarily to be construed as preferred or advantageous over other implementations. 
     If the specification states a component or feature “may,” “can,” “could,” “should,” “would,” “preferably,” “possibly,” “typically,” “optionally,” “for example,” “often,” or “might” (or other such language) be included or have a characteristic, that a specific component or feature is not required to be included or to have the characteristic. Such component or feature may be optionally included in some embodiments, or it may be excluded. 
     The term “electronically coupled,” “electronically coupling,” “electronically couple,” “in communication with,” “in electronic communication with,” or “connected” in the present disclosure refers to two or more components being connected (directly or indirectly) through wired means (for example, but not limited to, system bus, wired Ethernet) and/or wireless means (for example, but not limited to, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, ZigBee), such that data and/or information may be transmitted to and/or received from these components. 
     The term “print media,” refers to tangible, substantially durable physical material onto which text, graphics, images and/or the like may be imprinted and persistently retained over time. For example, print media generally take the form of derivatives of one or more of wood pulp or polymers, and may include conventional office paper, clear or tinted acetate media, newsprint, envelopes, mailing labels, product labels, and other kinds of labels. Thicker materials, such as cardstock or cardboard may be included as well. In exemplary embodiments discussed herein, reference may be made specifically to “paper” or “labels”; however, the operations, system elements, and methods of such exemplary applications may be applicable to media other than or in addition to the specifically mentioned “paper” or “labels.” Physical print media may be used for personal communications, business communications, and/or the like to convey prose expression (including news, editorials, product data, academic writings, memos, and many other kinds of communications), data, advertising, fiction, entertainment content, and illustrations and pictures. 
     The terms “printer” and “printing apparatus” refer to a device that may imprint texts, images, shapes, symbols, graphics, and/or the like onto print media to create a persistent, human-viewable representation of the corresponding texts, images, shapes, symbols, graphics, and/or the like. Printers may include, for example, laser printers. 
     Further, the various embodiments disclosed herein is to describe a printing apparatus that capable of printing content using laser beams. More particularly, the disclosed embodiments disclose printing apparatus that is capable to utilize laser to directly write content on the print media. Further, such printing apparatus may be capable of printing more than 7000 labels in a day. Further, the printing apparatus disclosed herein is capable of printing content at multiple resolutions (varying from 200 dpi to 600 dpi) and at multiple speeds (6 IPS to 12 IPS). By removing the reliance on the thermal print ribbon and thermal print head, the overall running cost of the printing apparatus is reduced. 
     Further, the printing apparatus is capable of printing content, using one or more laser beams, on media have a predefined chemical compositions. In some examples, the printing apparatus may include a laser print head having one or more laser sources that are configured to facilitate direct printing, using one or more laser beams emanating from the one or more laser source, of content on print media. Further and in some examples, the print media may have a predefined chemical composition that, in an instance in which it is exposed or otherwise contacted with energy from one or more laser beams, facilitate the print media to change color. Direct printing content on the print media allows fast printing of the content in comparison to the conventional printers. 
     Exemplary Printer Apparatus Structure 
       FIG. 1  illustrates a perspective view of a printing apparatus  100 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. While not shown in  FIG. 1 , the printing apparatus  100  may comprise a power source. 
     The printing apparatus  100  may include a media supply roll  102 . The media supply roll  102  may comprise print media  104  that may be wound on the media supply spool  106 . In the example shown in  FIG. 1 , the printing apparatus  100  may comprise a media supply spindle  108 , and the media supply spool  106  that may be configured to be disposed on the media supply spindle  108 . In some examples, the media supply spindle  108  may comprise a media sensor (not shown) that may facilitate determining whether the media supply spool  106  is loaded on the media supply spindle  108 . Some examples of the media sensor may include, but are not limited to, encoder wheel, photo sensor, and/or the like. In some examples, the printing apparatus  100  may support print media  104  of different width and size. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus  100  may comprise a media guiding spindle  110 , which may be positioned to guide the print media  104  from the media supply roll  102  to travel in a print direction along a print path within the printing apparatus  100 . In some examples, the print path may correspond to a path between the media supply spindle  108  to an exit slit  112  along which the print media  104  travels. Further, in some examples, the print direction may correspond to a direction along which the print media  104  travels for the printing operation. For example, along the print direction, the print media  104  travels from the media supply spool  106  towards the exit slit  112 . Further, a direction opposite to the print direction (e.g., from exit slit  112  to the media supply spool  106 ) is referred to as a retract direction. In some examples, after texts, graphics, images, and/or the like (as applicable) are imprinted on the print media  104 , the print media  104  may exit from the printing apparatus  100  from the exit slit  112 . 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus  100  may comprise a first actuation unit  119  that may facilitate rotating the media supply spool  106  and the media guiding spindle  110  in an anti-clockwise rotational direction, causing the print media  104  to travel in the print direction along the print path. Additionally, or alternatively, the first actuation unit  119  may facilitate rotating of the media supply spool  106  and/or the media guiding spindle  110  in a clockwise rotational direction causing the print media  104  to travel in the retract direction. In an example embodiment, the first actuation unit  119  may include one or more of motors that may be, directly or indirectly, coupled to the media supply spool  106  and the media guiding spindle  110 . The one or more motors may facilitate rotating the media supply spool  106  and the media guiding spindle  110 . 
     In some examples, the media supply spindle  108  and/or the media guiding spindle  110  may be eliminated, and the print media  104  may be fed into the printing apparatus  100  through an opening slit (not shown), and may exit from the printing apparatus  100  through an exit slit  112 . 
     Additionally, or alternately, the printing apparatus  100  may comprise a back-spine section  114 . In some examples, the back-spine section  114  may be made of material having rigid characteristics, such as aluminum alloy, stainless steel, and/or the like. In some examples, the back-spine section  114  may comprise a first surface  115 . The first surface  115  may be in a perpendicular arrangement with a printer base  118 . 
     In some examples, the print head engine  122  may be coupled to the back-spine section  114  of the printing apparatus  100 . In an example embodiment, the print head engine includes a top chassis portion  126  and a bottom chassis portion. In some examples, the bottom chassis portion  128  may be fastened to the first surface  115  of the back-spine section  114 . In some examples, the bottom chassis portion  128  may be positioned under the top chassis portion  126  along the vertical axis  128  and may be configured to receive the print media  104  from the media supply roll  102 . 
     In some examples, the top chassis portion  126  includes print head that is configured to print content on the print media  104 . It may be required that print head is kept fixed in the printing apparatus  100 . To this end, in some scenarios, it may be required to load print media  104  in the printing apparatus  100  such that the print media  104  traverses between the top chassis portion  126  and the bottom chassis portion  128 . For smooth loading of the print media  104 , the bottom chassis portion  128  may be movable with respect to the top chassis portion  126 . For example, complete bottom chassis portion  128  is pivotally movable with respect to the top chassis portion  126 . Additionally, or alternatively, instead of the complete bottom chassis portion  128  being movable with respect to the top chassis portion  126 , a portion of the bottom chassis portion  128  may be movable with respect to the top chassis portion  126 . Additionally, or alternatively, a portion of the top chassis portion  126  may be movable with respect to the bottom chassis portion  128 . Such modular movement top chassis portion  126  and the bottom chassis portion  128  with respect to each other allows loading of the print media  104  in the printing apparatus. Further, such arrangement allows clearing of the media jam. In an alternate embodiment, the top chassis portion  126  may be movable with respect to the bottom chassis portion  128 . For example, the top chassis portion  126  may be pivotally coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128 . For example, a first end portion  146  (defined to be proximal to the media supply spool  106 ) of the top chassis portion  126  is pivotally coupled to a first end portion  148  (defined to be proximal to the media supply spool  106 ) of the bottom chassis portion  128 . To this end, the top chassis portion  126  may be configured to rotate about the first end portion  148  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . In some examples, the top chassis portion  126  may be biased to rotate in a clockwise direction about the first end portion  148  of the bottom chassis portion  128 , when no external force is applied on the top chassis portion  126 . To this end, the top chassis portion  126  may be in an open state when no external force is applied on the top chassis portion  126 . 
     In some examples, when an external force is applied to the top chassis portion  126 , the top chassis portion  126  may rotate in a counter-clockwise direction about the first end portion  148  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . In such an embodiment, the top chassis portion  126  may travel (i.e., by rotating in a counterclockwise direction about the first end portion  148  of the bottom chassis portion  128 ) towards the bottom chassis portion  128 . In some examples, the top chassis portion  126  may travel towards the bottom chassis portion  128  until the top chassis portion  126  is additionally coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128  through a latch  130 . 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the top chassis portion  126  pivotally coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128  at the first end portion  148  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . In an example embodiment, the top chassis portion  126  may be pivotally coupled to the second end portion  150  (defined to be distal from the media supply spool  106 ) of the coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128 . For example, the second end portion  152  of the top chassis portion  126  may be pivotally coupled to the second end portion  150  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . To this end, the top chassis portion  126  may be configured to rotate about the second end portion  150  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . In some examples, the top chassis portion  126  may be biased to rotate in a counterclockwise direction about the first end portion  148  of the bottom chassis portion  128 , when no external force is applied on the top chassis portion  126 . To this end, the top chassis portion  126  may be in an open state when no external force is applied on the top chassis portion  126 . 
     In some examples, when an external force is applied to the top chassis portion  126 , the top chassis portion  126  may rotate in a clockwise direction about the second end portion  150  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . In such an embodiment, the top chassis portion  126  may travel (i.e., by rotating in a clockwise direction about the second end portion  150  of the bottom chassis portion  128 ) towards the bottom chassis portion  128 . In some examples, the top chassis portion  126  may travel towards the bottom chassis portion  128  until the top chassis portion  126  is additionally coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128  through the latch  130 . 
     In some examples, the latch  130  may be pivotally coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128 . For example, the latch  130  may be coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128  through a biasing member (not shown). Some examples of the biasing member may include a spring, a cam, or other structure configured to exert a constant biasing force. 
     More particularly, the latch  130  may be coupled proximal to the second end portion  150  of the bottom chassis portion  128  and distal from the first end portion  148  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . The latch  130  may have a U-shape that may include the depression portion  166  and one or more raised portions  168   a  and  168   b . Further, the depression portion  166 , the raised portions  168   a  and  168   b  face towards the second end portion  150  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . The raised portion  168   a  is coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128 , while the raised portion  168   b  is positioned distal from the raised portion  168   a . In some examples, the depression portion  166  is positioned between the raised portion  168   a  and the raised portion  168   b.    
     To latch the top chassis portion  126  with the bottom chassis portion  128 , the top chassis portion  126  may define a protrusion  170  that is received within the depression portion  166  of the latch  130 . To decouple the top chassis portion  126  from the bottom chassis portion  128 , the latch  130  is rotated to cause the protrusion  170  to leave the depression portion  166 . Thereafter, the top chassis portion  126  may rotate in a clockwise direction to be in the open state. In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the latch  130  coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128 . In an example embodiment, the latch  130  may be coupled to the top chassis portion  126 . 
     Alternatively, or additionally, the top chassis portion  126  may be fixed to the back-spine section  114 , while the bottom chassis portion  128  may be pivotally coupled to the top chassis portion  126 . In such an embodiment, the bottom chassis portion  128  may be configured to rotate between the open state and the closed state. In the open state, the bottom chassis portion  128  may tilt in a downward direction (along the vertical axis  128 ) with respect to the top chassis portion  126 . In the closed state, the bottom chassis portion  128  may be configured to be coupled to the top chassis portion  126  through the latch  130 . Further, in such an embodiment, the latch  130  may be coupled to the top chassis portion  126 . In another embodiment, the latch may be coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128 , without departing from the scope of the disclosure. One such structure of the print head engine  122  is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 39 . 
       FIG. 39  illustrates a sectional view  3900  of the print head engine  122 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     As discussed, the print head engine  122  includes the top chassis portion  126  and the bottom chassis portion  128 . In an example embodiment, the top chassis portion  126  may include a first top chassis module  3902  and a second top chassis module  3904 . Similarly, the bottom chassis portion  128  may comprise a first bottom chassis module  3906  and a second bottom chassis module  3908 . 
     In an example embodiment, the first top chassis module  3902  may be configured to receive the print head  302 . Further, the first top chassis module  3902  may be fixedly coupled to the back-spine section  114  of the printing apparatus  100 . In an example embodiment, a shape of the first top chassis module  3902  may correspond to a polygon that having the one or more sides  308   a ,  308   b , and  308   d . As discussed, sides  308   b  and  308   d  are spaced apart from each other along the lateral axis  212 . The side  308   d  may be configured to receive another latch  3910 . Further, as discussed, the side  308   a  may be configured to receive the latch  130  (not shown in  FIG. 39 ). 
     In an example embodiment, the second top chassis module  3904  may be pivotally coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128  of the print head engine  122  so as to allow for media loading in some examples. More particularly, the second top chassis module  3904  may be pivotally coupled to the second bottom chassis module  3908 . In an example embodiment, the second top chassis module  3904  may have an outer surface  3912  that may define a first end portion  3914  and a second end portion  3916 . In an example embodiment, the second end portion  3916  may be spaced apart from the first end portion  3914  along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . Further, the second end portion  3916  of the second top chassis module  3904  may be pivotally coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128 . Additionally, or alternately, the outer surface  3912  may define a bottom end portion  3918  and a top end portion  3920 . In some examples, the bottom end portion  3918  of the second top chassis module  3904  may be configured to receive a roller assembly (further described later) and a media sensor  3922 . In some examples, the media sensor  3922  may be configured to detect a presence of the print media  104  between the top chassis portion  126  and the bottom chassis portion  128 . 
     In an example embodiment, the second top chassis module  3904  may be configured to traverse between a first position and a second position with respect to the bottom chassis portion  128  of the print head engine  122 . More particularly, the second top chassis module  3904  may be configured to pivotally traverse between the first position and the second position. In the first position, the first end portion  3914  of the second top chassis module  3904  may be positioned away from the bottom chassis portion  128 . In the second position, the first end portion  3914  of the second top chassis module  3904  may be coupled to the first top chassis module  3902  through the latch  3910 . In some examples, the second top chassis module  3904  may be biased to be in the second position. Therefore, when not external force is applied to the second top chassis module  3904  and the second top chassis module  3904  is not coupled to the latch  3910 , the second top chassis module  3904  may traverse to the second position. 
     In some examples, the second bottom chassis module  3908  may be fixedly coupled to the back-spine section  114  of the printing apparatus  100 . In some examples, second bottom chassis module  3908  may have an outer surface  3924  that may define a first end portion  3926  and a second end portion  3928 . The first end portion  3926  may be spaced apart from the second end portion  3928  along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . Additionally, the outer surface  3924  of the second bottom chassis module  3908  may define a top end portion  3930  and a bottom end portion  3932 . The top end portion  3930  may be spaced apart from the bottom end portion  3932  along the vertical axis  128 . The top end portion  3930  of the second bottom chassis module  3908  may define an edge with the second end portion  3928  of the second bottom chassis module  3908 . In some examples, the second top chassis module  3904  may be pivotally coupled with the edge between the second end portion  3928  and the second bottom chassis module  3908 . Further, the bottom end portion  3932  of the second bottom chassis module  3908  may define an edge with the first end portion  3926  of the second bottom chassis module  3908 . In some examples, the second top chassis module  3904  may be pivotally coupled with the edge between the first end portion  3926  of the first bottom chassis module  3906  and bottom end portion  3932  of the second bottom chassis module  3908 . 
     In an example embodiment, the first bottom chassis module  3906  may be pivotally coupled to the second bottom chassis module  3908 . In some examples, the first bottom chassis module  3906  may traverse between the first position and the second position. In the first position, the first bottom chassis module  3906  may positioned away from the top chassis portion  126 . In the second position, the first bottom chassis module  3906  may be coupled to the top chassis portion  126  through the latch  130 . In an example embodiment, the first bottom chassis module  3906  may be biased in the first position. For example, when no external force is applied on the first bottom chassis module  3906  and when the first bottom chassis module  3906  is decoupled from the top chassis portion  126 , the first bottom chassis module  3906  may traverse to the first position. 
     To load the print media  104 , the second top chassis module  3904  is traversed to the first position with respect to the bottom chassis portion  128 . Additionally, the first bottom chassis module  3906  is traversed to the first position. Once in the first position, the second top chassis module  3904  and the first bottom chassis module  3906  are positioned away from the bottom chassis portion  128  and the top chassis portion  126 , respectively thereby creating enough space in the print head engine  122  to allow an operator of the printing apparatus  100  to load print media  104  in the printing apparatus  100 . 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the top chassis portion  126  being pivotally coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128 . In alternative or additional embodiments, the top chassis portion  126  may, in some embodiments, completely decouple from the bottom chassis portion  128 . For example, the top chassis portion  126  may be configured to travel along a vertical axis  128  with respect to the bottom chassis portion  128 . In such an embodiment, in some examples, at least one linear guide may be disposed on a surface of an example back-spine section of an example printer body. In some examples, each of at least one linear guide may comprise a corresponding linear rail and a corresponding linear block. In some examples, the corresponding linear rail may be fastened to the first surface of the back-spine section through, for example, bolts, screws, and/or the like. In some examples, the corresponding linear block may be coupled to the corresponding linear rail through, for example, ball bearings, rollers, and/or the like, such that the corresponding linear block may move and/or slide along the corresponding linear rail. Example linear guides may include, but are not limited to, rolling element linear motion bearing guides, sliding contact linear motion bearing guides, and/or the like. 
     For example, in  FIG. 1 , a first linear guide  120 A and a second linear guide  120 B may be disposed on the first surface  115 . The first linear guide  120 A may, for example, comprise a linear rail fastened to the first surface  115  of the back-spine section  114 , as well as a corresponding linear block (not shown) that is coupled to the linear rail and movable along the linear rail. Additionally, or alternatively, the second linear guide  120 B may comprise a linear rail disposed on the first surface  115  of the back-spine section  114 , and a corresponding linear block. In an example embodiment, the first linear guide  120 A and the second linear guide  120 B are positioned parallel to each other and may be positioned along a vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100 . 
     In some examples, a print head engine  122  of the printing apparatus  100  may be coupled to the first linear guide  120 A and the second linear guide  120 B through the corresponding linear block of the first linear guide  120 A and second linear guide  120 B, respectively. In an example embodiment, the print head engine  122  comprises a top chassis portion  126  and a bottom chassis portion  128 . In some examples, the top chassis portion  126  of the print head engine  122  may be coupled to the first linear guide  120 A and the second linear guide  120 B, respectively. Further, in some examples, as the top chassis portion  126  may move along the linear rail(s) of first linear guide  120 A and/or the second linear guide  120 B along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100 . 
     In some examples, the bottom chassis portion  128  may be fastened to the first surface  115  of the back-spine section  114 . In some examples, the bottom chassis portion  128  may be positioned under the top chassis portion  126  along the vertical axis  128  and may be configured to receive the print media  104  from the media supply roll  102 . 
     In some examples, as the top chassis portion  126  may move along the vertical axis  128  along its corresponding travel path, the top chassis portion  126  may reach and/or be positioned at a bottom point of the travel path in the vertical axis  128 . When the top chassis portion  126  is positioned at the bottom point, the top chassis portion  126  may be removably coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128  through the latch  130 . 
     Additionally, or alternatively, the printing apparatus  100  includes a first roller  132  and a second roller  134 . In an example embodiment, the first roller  132  may be positioned upstream of the print head engine  122  (along the print direction) and the second roller  134  may be positioned downstream of the print head engine  122  (along the print direction). The first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may facilitate the traversal of the print media  104  along the print path. Some examples of the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may include, but are not limited to, a platen roller, a pinch roller, an idle roller, and/or the like. As depicted in  FIG. 1 , the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may correspond to a single roller that may be rotatably coupled to the back-spine section  114  of the printing apparatus  100 . However, in some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  being single rollers coupled to the back-spine section  114  of the printing apparatus  100 . In an example embodiment, the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may be part of a roller assembly, as is further described in  FIGS. 2A-2B  through  FIGS. 10A-10B . 
     In an example embodiment, the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may be communicatively coupled to the first actuation unit  119 . The first actuation unit  119  may cause the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  to rotate either in a clockwise direction or in an anti-clockwise direction to facilitate print media traversal in the print direction or in the retract direction, respectively. Since the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  are coupled to the first actuation unit  119  and the first actuation unit  119  is coupled to the media supply spool  106 , in some examples, the media supply spool  106 , the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may operate synchronously. In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the media supply spool  106 , the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  to operate synchronously. In an example embodiment, the media supply spool  106 , the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may operate asynchronously. To this end, the first actuation unit  119  may cause the media supply spool  106 , the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  to start rotating and/or the stop rotating at different time instants. In such an example, the media supply spool  106 , the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may be coupled to the first actuation unit  119  through different gear assemblies (not shown) which may enable the asynchronous operation of the media supply spool  106 , the first roller  132  and the second roller  134 . Alternatively or additionally, the printing apparatus  100  may include separate actuation units for each of the media supply spool  106 , the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  to achieve the asynchronous operation amongst the media supply spool  106 , the first roller  132  and the second roller  134 . For example, the first roller  132  and media supply spool  106  may be coupled to the first actuation unit  119 , while the second roller  134  may be coupled to a second actuation unit  136 . In an example embodiment, the second actuation unit  136  may be similar to the first actuation unit  119 . All the embodiments and/alternative applicable of the first actuation unit  119  also apply to the second actuation unit  136 . 
     For the purpose of ongoing description, the media supply spool  106 , the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  are considered to operate asynchronously. 
     In an example embodiment, the printing apparatus  100  may further include a control unit  138  that may be communicatively coupled to the first actuation unit  119  and the second actuation unit  136 . In some examples, the control unit  138  may be configured to control the operation of the printing apparatus  100  to cause the printing apparatus  100  to print content on the print media  104 . In another example, the control unit  138  may be configured to cause the print media traversal along the print direction. The structure and the operation of the control unit  138  is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 12 . 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus  100  may include a user interface (UI)  140  for enabling communications between a user and the printing apparatus  100 . The UI  140  may be communicatively coupled to other components of the printing apparatus  100  for displaying visual and/or auditory information and/or for receiving information from the user (e.g., typed, touched, spoken, etc.). 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 1 , the printing apparatus  100  may include the UI  140  with, for example, a display  142  and a keypad  144 . The display  142  may be configured to display various information associated with the printing apparatus  100 . The keypad  144  may comprise function buttons that may be configured to perform various typical printing functions (e.g., cancel print job, advance print media, and the like) or be programmable for the execution of macros containing preset printing parameters for a particular type of print media. In some examples, the UI  140  may be electronically coupled to a controller (such as a control unit  138 ) for controlling operations of the printing apparatus  100 , in addition to other functions. The UI  140  may be supplemented or replaced by other forms of data entry or printer control, such as a separate data entry and control module linked wirelessly or by a data cable operationally coupled to a computer, a router, or the like. 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the UI  140  including the display  142  and the keypad  144 . In an example embodiment, the UI  140  may include a touch screen which may enable the operator of the printing apparatus to input commands and/or to check notifications/alerts generated by the printing apparatus  100 . 
     While  FIG. 1  illustrates an example UI  140 , it is noted that the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the example UI  140  as shown in  FIG. 1 . In some embodiments, the user interface may be different from the one depicted in  FIG. 1 . In some embodiments, there may not be a user interface. 
     In some examples, the various components of the printing apparatus  100  described in conjunction with  FIG. 1  are encompassed within a housing  154 . For example, the media supply spindle  108 , the print head engine, and/or the like are encompassed and positioned within the housing  154 . In an example embodiment, the housing  154  may comprise a fixed portion  156  and a cover portion  158  that may be movably coupled fixed portion  156  through one or more hinges (not shown). In some examples, the one or more hinges allow the cover portion  158  to rotate about the one or more hinges. Accordingly, the cover portion  158  may rotate with respect to the fixed portion  156 . To this end, in some examples, the cover portion  158  may be configured to be in a closed state and an open state. In the closed state, the cover portion  158  in conjunction with the fixed portion  156  may encompass the one or more components (as described in  FIG. 1 ) of the printing apparatus  100 . In the open state, the cover portion  158  may expose the one or more components (as described in  FIG. 1 ) of the printing apparatus  100 , thereby allowing an operator of the printing apparatus  100  to access the one or more components of the printing apparatus  100 . 
     In some examples, the cover portion  158  may have an inner surface  160  that may be configured to receive a magnetic sensitive element  162 . In an example embodiment, the magnetic sensitive element  162 , such as a Hall-effect sensor, may be configured to facilitate detection of whether the cover portion  158  of the housing  154  is in a closed state or in an open state. In some examples, when the cover portion  158  of the housing  154  is in a closed state, the magnetic sensitive element  162  may be aligned with a first sensor  164  positioned on the one or more components of the printing apparatus  100 . For example, the first sensor  164  may be positioned on the bottom chassis portion  128  of the print head engine  122 . When the magnetic sensitive element  162  aligns with the first sensor  164 , the first sensor  164  may generate a first signal, which may be indicative of the cover portion  158  being in the closed state. 
     In an example embodiment, the printing apparatus  100  may include more than one first sensor  164  that may be positioned at one or more positions in the printing apparatus  100 . For instance, the first sensor  164  may be positioned at the back-spine section  114  of the printing apparatus  100 . Correspondingly, the cover portion  158  may receive the magnetic sensitive element  162  at a position where the magnetic sensitive element  162  may align with the first sensor  164  (positioned on the back-spine section  114 ) when the cover portion  158  is in the closed state. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus  100  may further include one or more components such as a verifier, a peeler, a re-winder, a cutter, or any other component. In an example embodiment, the verifier may correspond to an image capturing device that may be configured to capture an image of the printed content. Thereafter, the verifier may be configured to validate the printed content based on the captured image. In some examples, the verifier may be positioned as an integral component to the printing apparatus  100 . In another example, the verifier may be positioned external to the printing apparatus  100 . In an example embodiment, the verifier may include an imaging module that is communicatively coupled to the printer and may be disposed in the verifier. The verifier may be attached to the printing apparatus  100  or may be a standalone device to where the user brings the printed indicia for verification. In either case, the verifier is communicatively coupled to the printer. 
     In an example embodiment, the imaging module in the verifier may be configured to capture an image of the printed content. The image of the printed content is compared with one or more known quality standards. Thereafter, based on the comparison, the verifier may be configured to determine the print quality. If the print quality is less than a predetermined quality threshold, the verifier may instruct the printing apparatus to reprint the content. In another embodiment, the verifier may instruct the printing apparatus to print “void” or “cancel” on the printed content. 
     Structure of Print Head Engine—Vector Mode 
       FIG. 2  illustrates a perspective view of a portion of the printing apparatus  100  depicting the print head engine  122 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     Referring to  FIG. 2 , the print head engine  122 , is depicted according to one or more embodiments described herein. In an example embodiment, the print head engine  122  includes the top chassis portion  126 , the bottom chassis portion  128 , and a top chassis cap  201 . 
     In an example embodiment, the top chassis portion  126  has an outer surface  204  that may define a top end portion  206  and a bottom end portion  208 , which does not include the top chassis cap  201 . The top end portion  206  and the bottom end portion  208 , of the top chassis portion  126 , are spaced apart from each other along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100 . Further, in some examples, the bottom end portion  208  may be defined to be proximal to the bottom chassis portion  128 , while the top end portion  206  may be defined to be distal from the bottom chassis portion  128 , when the top chassis portion  126  is coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128 . 
     In some examples, the top chassis portion  126  may have a polygon shape, such as a rectangular shape with one or more sides  210   a ,  210   b ,  210   c , and  210   d . The side  210   a  and the side  210   c  may be defined to be opposite to each other along a longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . Similarly, the side  210   b  and the side  210   d  may be defined to be opposite to each other along a lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the top chassis portion  126  having a rectangular shape. In an example embodiment, the shape of the top chassis portion  126  may correspond to other polygons, without departing from the scope of the disclosure. 
     In an example embodiment, the outer surface  204  of the top chassis portion  126  defines a first wing portion  216  that protrudes out from the side  210   b  of the top chassis portion  126  along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . Additionally, the first wing portion  216  extends from the side  210   a  to the side  210   c  along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . In some examples, a length of the first wing portion  216  (along the longitudinal axis  210 ) may be the same as a length of the top chassis portion  126  (along the longitudinal axis  210 ). Further, a height of the first wing portion  216  is less than a height of the top chassis portion  126 . Accordingly, along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100 , the first wing portion  216  may define a step  218  with the side  210   b.    
     In an example embodiment, similar to the first wing portion  216 , the outer surface  204  of the top chassis portion  126  defines a second wing portion  220  that protrudes out from the side  210   d  of the top chassis portion  126  along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . Additionally, the second wing portion  220  extends from the side  210   a  to the side  210   c  along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . In some examples, a length of the second wing portion  220  (along the longitudinal axis  210 ) may be the same as the length of the top chassis portion  126  (along the longitudinal axis  210 ). Further, a height of the second wing portion  220  is less than the height of the top chassis portion  126 . Accordingly, along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100 , the second wing portion  220  may define a step  222  with the side  210   d.    
     In an example embodiment, the side  210   a  is further configured to receive the latch  130  that facilitates removable coupling of the top chassis portion  126  with the bottom chassis portion  128 . 
     In an example embodiment, the bottom chassis portion  128  has an outer surface  224 . In some examples, the outer surface  224  of the bottom chassis portion  128  defines a top end portion  226  of the bottom chassis portion  128 , and a bottom end portion  228  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . The bottom end portion  228  of the bottom chassis portion  128  is spaced apart from the top end portion  226  of the bottom chassis portion  128  along the vertical axis  128  of the print head engine  122 . Further, the top end portion  226  of the bottom chassis portion  128  is proximal to the bottom end portion  208  of the top chassis portion  126 , while the bottom end portion  228  of the bottom chassis portion  128  is distal from the bottom end portion  208  of the top chassis portion  126 . 
     In an example embodiment, the outer surface  224  of the bottom chassis portion  128  defines at least two sides  230   a  and  230   b  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . In an example embodiment, the side  230   a  may be spaced apart from the side  230   b  along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . In an example embodiment, the sides  230   a  has a first edge  232  and a second edge  234 . In some examples, the first edge  232  is spaced apart from the second edge  234  along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . Similar to the side  230   a , the side  230   b  has a third edge  252  and a fourth edge  254  (Refer  FIG. 3A ). In some examples, the third edge  252  is spaced apart from the fourth edge  254  (refer  FIG. 3A ) along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . 
     In an example embodiment, the outer surface  224  of the bottom chassis portion  128  may define a first circular notch  236  and a second circular notch  238  on the side  230   a . Further, the first circular notch  236  and the second circular notch  238  are defined (by the outer surface  224  of the bottom chassis portion  128 ) at the top end portion  226  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . Furthermore, the outer surface  224  of the bottom chassis portion  128  defines the first circular notch  236  proximal to the first edge  232  of the side  230   a , and the second circular notch  238  proximal to the second edge  234  of the side  230   a . Similarly, the outer surface  224  of the bottom chassis portion  128  may define a third circular notch  240  (refer to  FIG. 3A ) and a fourth circular notch  242  (refer  FIG. 3A ) on the side  230   b  at the top end portion  226  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . Further, the outer surface  224  defines the third circular notch  240  proximal to the third edge  252  of the side  230   b , and the fourth circular notch  242  proximal to the fourth edge  254  of the side  230   b . In some examples, the first circular notch  236  and the third circular notch  240  may have a coinciding central axis  244  (refer to  FIG. 3A ) extending along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . Similarly, the second circular notch  238  and the fourth circular notch  242  may have a coinciding central axis  246  (refer to  FIG. 3A ) extending along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . The third circular notch  240 , the fourth circular notch  242 , the coinciding central axis  244 , and the coinciding central axis  246  are further illustrated with respect to  FIG. 3A . 
     In an example embodiment, the first circular notch  236  and the third circular notch  240  are configured to receive a first shaft  248  such that the first shaft  248  is rotatable in the first circular notch  236  and the third circular notch  240 . Additionally, the third circular notch  240  and the fourth circular notch  242  are configured to receive a second shaft  250  such that the second shaft  250  is rotatable in the second circular notch  238  and the fourth circular notch  242 . In some examples, the first shaft  248  and the second shaft  250  may correspond to rollers that may assist the travel of the print media  104  along the print path. 
       FIG. 3A  illustrates an exploded view  300 A of the print head engine  122 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     In an example embodiment, the top chassis portion  126  may be configured to receive a print head, such as the print head shown in  FIG. 3B . In an example embodiment, the top chassis portion  126  may be configured to couple with the bottom chassis portion  128  through the latch  130 . 
     In an example embodiment, the bottom chassis portion  128  has the outer surface  204 , a top surface  319 , and a bottom surface  321 . In some examples, the outer surface  224  and the top surface  319  define the top end portion  226  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . Further, in some examples, the outer surface  224  and the bottom surface  321  define the bottom end portion  228  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . In some examples, the top surface  319  of the bottom chassis portion  128  defines a platform  322  that may correspond to a region on which the print media  104  is received for printing operation. Further, the platform  322  extends along the length (defined along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 ) and the breadth (defined along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 ) of the bottom chassis portion  128 . 
     In some examples, the platform  322  extends between the central axis  244  and the central axis  246 . As discussed, the central axis  244  pass through the first circular notch  236  and the third circular notch  240 . The first shaft  248  is rotatably coupled to the first circular notch  236  and the third circular notch  240 . Similarly, as discussed, the central axis  246  pass through the second circular notch  238  and the third circular notch  240 . The second shaft  250  is rotatably coupled to the first circular notch  236  and the third circular notch  240 . 
     Media Path within the Print Head Engine 
     In some examples, various prerequisites such as, but not limited to, an orientation of the print media with respect to a print head, a focal point of the laser light source with respect to the location of the print media, and/or the like, may be required or otherwise determined prior to or during printing content on print media. For example, in an instance in which the orientation of the print media is skewed or otherwise out of alignment during the printing operation, printed content may be blurry, out of focus, or may have scaling issues. Therefore, in some examples, it may be of paramount importance to orient the print media with respect to the print head prior to the printing operation. Alternatively, or additionally, it may be advantageous to flatten the print media prior to the printing operation. 
     Apparatuses, systems, and methods described herein disclose a printing apparatus that is capable of flattening the print media prior to a printing operation. In an example embodiment, the printing operation may correspond to an operation of printing content on the print media. The printing apparatus includes a print head engine that may be positioned downstream of a media supply spool. The media supply spool may be configured to supply the print media to the print head engine. A direction of the print media traversal from the media supply spool to the print head engine is referred to as a print direction. 
     In an example embodiment, the printing apparatus may include a first roller and a second roller. The first roller may be positioned upstream of the print head engine, along the print direction of the print media traversal, while the second roller is positioned downstream of the print head, along the print direction of the print media traversal. 
     To initiate the print media traversal along the print direction, the first roller and the second roller are actuated, causing the first roller and the second roller to rotate. Rotation of the first roller and the second roller facilitates the print media traversal along the print direction. To halt the print media traversal, the first roller is stopped at a first time instant, while the second roller is stopped at a second time instant. In some examples, the second time instant is chronologically later than the first time instant. Accordingly, the second roller may continue to rotate after the first roller has stopped rotating. In such an implementation, the second roller continues to pull the print media, which leads to stretching and flattening of the print media. After the second rollers stops rotating, the print head engine may print content on the print media. 
       FIG. 3B  illustrates another exploded view  300 B of a portion of the printing apparatus  100 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. The exploded view  300 B illustrates the print head engine  122  with the top chassis portion  126  of the print head engine  122  removed. Accordingly, the exploded view  300 B illustrates the print head  302 , a first roller assembly  314  and a second roller assembly  316 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     In some examples, the print head  302  may have one or more sides  308   a ,  308   b ,  308   c , and  308   d . The side  308   a  and the side  308   c  may be defined to be opposite to each other along a longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . Similarly, the side  308   b  and the side  308   d  may be defined to be opposite to each other along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . 
     In an example embodiment, the side  308   b  and the side  308   d  may be configured to receive the second roller assembly  316  and the first roller assembly  314 , respectively. In an example embodiment, the structure of the second roller assembly  316  and the structure of the second roller assembly  316  are same. For purpose of brevity, the structure of the second roller assembly  316  is described herein. In an example embodiment, the first roller assembly  314  and the second roller assembly  316  are configured to be received within the top chassis portion  126 , when the top chassis portion  126  is received on top of the print head  302 , the first roller assembly  314  and the second roller assembly  316 . More particularly, the first roller assembly  314  and the second roller assembly  316  may be received within the first wing portion  216  and the second wing portion  220 . 
     In an example embodiment, the second roller assembly  316  may include a frame  318  that may extend along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . In some examples, the frame  318  may extend between the side  308   a  to side  308   c  along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122  along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . In an example embodiment, the frame  318  may have the cuboidal shape that has a top end portion  320 , a bottom end portion  323 , one or more sides  324   a ,  324   b ,  324   c , and  324   d . In an example embodiment, the top end portion  320  of the frame  318  is positioned to be proximal to the top end portion  206  of the top chassis portion  126 . Further, the bottom end portion  323  of the frame  318  is positioned to be proximal to the bottom end portion  208  of the top chassis portion  126 . Accordingly, the top end portion  320  of the frame  318  is spaced apart from the bottom end portion  323  of the frame  318  along the vertical axis  128  of the print head engine  122 . 
     In some examples, the side  324   a  of the frame  318  and the side  324   c  of the frame  318  may be spaced apart from each other along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . Further, the side  324   b  and the side  324   d  may be spaced apart from each other along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . In an example embodiment, the side  324   d  may be coupled to the side  308   b  of the print head engine  122 . In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the side  324   d  coupled to the side  308   b  of the top chassis portion  126 . In an example embodiment, the frame  318  may not be coupled to the print head engine  122 . In such an embodiment, the frame  318  may be coupled to the back-spine section  114  of the printing apparatus  100 . 
     In an example embodiment, a surface  326  of the side  324   d  of the frame  318  may define one or more grooves  328   a ,  328   b , and  328   c . In some examples, each of the one or more grooves  328   a ,  328   b , and  328   c , may extend inwardly from the surface  326  of the side  324   d  towards the side  324   b  along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . Additionally, or alternatively, each of the one or more grooves  328   a ,  328   b , and  328   c  may extend between the top end portion  320  of the frame  318  and the bottom end portion  323  of the frame  318 . Further, each of the one or more grooves  328   a ,  328   b , and  328   c  may be spaced apart from each other along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . In some examples, each of the one or more grooves  328   a ,  328   b , and  328   c  may be configured to receive the second roller  134 . The structure of rollers, and specifically the second roller  134 , is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 4A ,  FIG. 4B , and  FIG. 5 . 
       FIG. 4A  and  FIG. 4B  illustrate side views  400 A and  400 B of the second roller  134 , respectively, according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     The second roller  134  includes a housing  402 , a telescopic arm  404 , and a first wheel  406 . The housing  402  may have a first end  408  and a second end  410 . The first end  408  of the housing is spaced apart from the second end  410  of the housing  402 , along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100 , when the second roller  134  is received within a groove (e.g., the groove  328   a ) of the one or more grooves  328   a ,  328   b , and  328   c . The second end  410  of the housing  402  is configured to movably receive the telescopic arm  404  such that a portion  412  of the telescopic arm  404 , in one embodiment, may extend out from the second end  410  of the housing  402  (hereinafter referred to as extended state). In another embodiment, the portion  412  of the telescopic arm  404  may retract within the housing  402  (hereinafter referred to as retracted state). 
     In an example embodiment, the telescopic arm  404  may include an end portion  414  that may be positioned external to the housing  402  irrespective of a configuration state (e.g., extended state or the retracted state) of the telescopic arm  404 . The end portion  414  of the telescopic arm  404  may be configured to receive the first wheel  406 . The further description of the second roller  134  is described in conjunction with  FIG. 5 . 
       FIG. 5  illustrates a sectional view  500  of the second roller  134 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. The sectional view  500  depicts that the second roller  134  includes a first biasing member  502  and a third actuation unit  504 . 
     In an example embodiment, the housing  402  may be configured to receive the third actuation unit  504  that is communicatively coupled to the telescopic arm  404 . In an example embodiment, the third actuation unit  504  may apply external force on the telescopic arm  404  causing the telescopic arm  404  to be in the extended state and/or in the retracted state. Some examples of the third actuation unit  504  may include, but are not limited to, an electromagnet, a stepper motor, and/or the like. For the purpose of ongoing description, the third actuation unit  504  is considered to be an electromagnet. To this end, the external force applied by the third actuation unit  504  may correspond to an attractive force and/or a repulsive force. 
     Additionally, the housing  402  is configured to receive the first biasing member  502 . In some examples, the first biasing member  502  may be coupled to the telescopic arm  404  and to an inner surface  506  of the housing  402  at the first end  408  of the housing  402 . The first biasing member  502  may apply a biasing force on the telescopic arm  404  to cause the telescopic arm  404  to be in the extended state when the third actuation unit  504  is not activated. In such an embodiment, when the third actuation unit  504  is activated, the third actuation unit  504  may apply the external force on the telescopic arm  404  causing the portion  412  of the telescopic arm  404  to retract within the housing  402  (i.e., the telescopic arm  404  is in retracted state). 
     In some examples, the first biasing member  502  may apply the biasing force on the telescopic arm  404  to cause the telescopic arm  404  to be in the retracted state when the third actuation unit  504  is deactivated. In such an embodiment, when the third actuation unit  504  is activated, the third actuation unit  504  may apply the external force on the telescopic arm  404  causing the portion  412  of the telescopic arm  404  to extend out from the housing  402  (i.e., the telescopic arm  404  is in extended state). 
     Additionally, or alternatively, the third actuation unit  504  may be communicatively coupled to the first wheel  406  that may cause the first wheel  406  to rotate. In another example embodiment, the first wheel  406  may be an idle roller. In such an embodiment, the third actuation unit  504  may not cause the first wheel  406  to rotate. The first wheel  406  may rotate based on interaction with another component of the printing apparatus  100 . For example, the first wheel  406  may rotate based on the interaction with the print media  104  during the print media traversal. 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the third actuation unit  504  actuating the first wheel  406  (causing the first wheel  406  to rotate). The first wheel  406  may be coupled to the second actuation unit  136 , where the second actuation unit  136  may cause the first wheel  406  to rotate. In yet another embodiment, the first wheel  406  may be coupled to the first actuation unit  119 , where the second actuation unit  136  may cause the first wheel  406  to rotate. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 4A  and  FIG. 4B , since the first wheel  406  is coupled to the telescopic arm  404  and since the third actuation unit  504  may cause the telescopic arm  404  to be in a particular configuration state, such as in the retracted state or in the extended state, the third actuation unit  504  may cause the first wheel  406  to traverse between a first position and a second position based on the configuration state of the telescopic arm  404 . For example, the first wheel  406  is in the first position when the telescopic arm is in the retracted state. Further, in the first position, the first wheel  406  is positioned to be proximal to the second end  410  of the housing  402  in comparison to a scenario when the first wheel  406  is positioned in the second position. Further, the first wheel  406  is in the second position when the telescopic arm  404  is in the extended state. Additionally, in the second position, the first wheel  406  is positioned to be distal from the second end  410  of the housing  402  in comparison to a scenario when the first wheel  406  is positioned in the first position.  FIG. 4A  depicts the first wheel  406  in the first position and  FIG. 4B  depicts the first wheel  406  in the second position. 
     In operation and as is shown with respect to  FIG. 5 , when the third actuation unit  504  is activated (e.g., the electromagnet is activated) the third actuation unit  504  may generate an attractive force, which pulls the telescopic arm  404  causing the telescopic arm  404  to be in the retracted state. Accordingly, the first wheel  406  is in the first position. When the third actuation unit  504  is deactivated, the biasing force from the first biasing member  502  acts on the telescopic arm  404 , which causes the portion of telescopic arm  404  to extend out from the housing  402 . Accordingly, the first wheel  406  is in the second position. 
     In alternate embodiment, when the third actuation unit  504  is activated (e.g., the electromagnet is activated) the third actuation unit  504  may generate a repulsive force, which causes the telescopic arm  404  to be in the extended state. Accordingly, the first wheel  406  is in the second position. When the third actuation unit  504  is deactivated, the biasing force from the first biasing member  502  acts on the telescopic arm  404 , which causes the portion of telescopic arm  404  to retract. Accordingly, the first wheel  406  is in the first position. 
     In some examples, the second roller  134  may devoid of the first biasing member  502 . In such an embodiment, the third actuation unit  504  may cause the first wheel  406  to traverse between the first position and the second position. For example, the third actuation unit  504  may generate the repulsive force to cause the first wheel  406  to traverse to the second position. Further, the third actuation unit  504  may generate the attractive force to cause the first wheel  406  to traverse to the first position. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 3B , the structure of the first roller assembly  314  is similar to the structure of the second roller assembly  316 . For example, similar to the second roller assembly  316 , the first roller assembly  314  includes the frame  318  that may define the one or more grooves  328   d ,  328   e , and  328   f  Each of the one or more grooves  328   d ,  328   e , and  328   f  (defined in the first roller assembly  314 ) are configured to receive the first roller  132 . In some examples, the structure of the first roller  132  is similar to the structure of the second roller  134 . 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the first roller assembly  314  and the second roller assembly  316  including the three first rollers  132  and three second rollers  134 . In an example embodiment, the count of the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may be varied based on one or more implementations of the printing apparatus  100 . For example, in printing apparatus  100  that supports print media having narrower width in comparison to the print media  104 , the count of the first rollers  132  and the second rollers  134  may be reduced. Similarly, in printing apparatus  100  that supports print media having broader width in comparison to the print media  104 , the count of the first rollers  132  and the second rollers  134  may be increased. 
     In an example embodiment, in the second position, the first roller  132  (in the first roller assembly  314 ) and the second roller  134  (in the second roller assembly  316 ) may about the platform  322 . Accordingly, when the platform  322  receives the print media  104 , the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may abut the print media  104 . On the other hand, in the first position, the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may be positioned apart from the print media  104 . 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  abutting the platform  322 . Referring to  FIG. 3C , as discussed above, the bottom chassis portion  128  includes the first shaft  248  and the second shaft  250 . In some examples, the first shaft  248  and the second shaft  250  may correspond to idle rollers. The first shaft  248  may be positioned upstream of the print head engine  122 , along the print direction, and the second shaft  250  may be positioned downstream of the print head engine  122 , along the print direction. Further, in such an embodiment, the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may abut the first shaft  248  and the second shaft  250 , respectively (when the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  are in the second position). 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the first wheel  406  in the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  to traverse between the first position and the second position. In an example embodiment, the operator of the printing apparatus  100  may manually facilitate the traversal of the complete first roller  132  and the second roller  134  between a third position and a fourth position. The structure of such roller assemblies that may facilitate the traversal of the complete first roller  132  and the second roller  134  is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 6 . 
       FIG. 6  illustrates another perspective view  600  of a portion of the printing apparatus  100 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. Referring to the perspective view  600 , the printing apparatus  100  includes a print head engine  122 , a third roller assembly  602 , a fourth roller assembly  604 , and a front plate  606 . 
     In an example embodiment, the front plate  606  may be positioned proximal to the side  308   a  of the top chassis portion  126  such that the front plate  606  completely covers the print head engine  122  when the print head engine  122  is being view along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . The front plate  606  has an outer surface  608  and an inner surface  610 . In some examples, the inner surface  610  of the front plate  606  faces the side  308   a  of the top chassis portion  126  of the print head engine  122 . 
     In an example embodiment, the inner surface  610  of the front plate  606  may define a first through hole (not shown) and a second through hole (not shown) that may extend from the inner surface  610  of the front plate  606  to the outer surface  608  of the front plate  606 . In an example embodiment, the first through hole (not shown) may be defined downstream of the print head engine  122 , along the print direction, and the second through hole (not shown) may be defined upstream of the print head engine  122 , along the print direction. In an example embodiment, the first through hole (not shown) and the second through hole (not shown) may facilitate coupling of the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604  the front plate  606 , respectively. and the back-spine section  114 . Additionally, the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604  may be movably coupled with the back-spine section  114 , as is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 8 . Further, the structure of the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604  is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 9 ,  FIG. 10A , and  FIG. 10B . 
     Referring back to the front plate  606 , additionally or alternatively, the front plate  606  may be configured to receive a first cam roller  612  and a second cam roller  614  at the outer surface  608  of the front plate  606 . The first cam roller  612  may be coupled with the third roller assembly  602  and the second cam roller  614  may be coupled with the fourth roller assembly  604 , respectively. In some examples, the first cam roller  612  and the second cam roller  614  may be configured to allow the operator of the printing apparatus  100  to cause traversal of the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604 , respectively, as is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 10A  and  FIG. 10B . 
       FIG. 7  illustrates an opposing view  700  to the view of  FIG. 1 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. The opposing view  700  of the printing apparatus  100  depicts the back-spine section  114  of the printing apparatus  100 . The back-spine section  114  of the printing apparatus  100  has the first surface  115  and a second surface  702 . The second surface  702  of the back-spine section  114  may define a third through hole (not shown) and a fourth through hole (not shown) that extends from the second surface  702  of the back-spine section  114  to the first surface  115  of the back-spine section  114 . The third through hole (not shown) is defined to be downstream of the print head engine  122 , along the print direction, while the fourth through hole (not shown) is defined to be upstream of the print head engine  122 , along the print direction. In an example embodiment, the third through hole (not shown) and the fourth through hole (not shown) may facilitate coupling of the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604 , respectively, with the back-spine section  114 . Additionally, the printing apparatus  100  includes a first pulley  706  and a second pulley  708  that are coupled with the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604 , respectively. In an example embodiment, the first pulley  706  and the second pulley  708  may be received on the second surface  702  of the back-spine section  114 . 
     In some examples, each of the first pulley  706  and the second pulley  708  are coupled to the first actuation unit  119 . For example, the first pulley  706  and the second pulley  708  are coupled to the first actuation unit  119  through a belt  710 . In some examples, the first actuation unit  119  may facilitate automatic traversal of the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604 . In some examples, the operator of the printing apparatus  100  to manually cause the traversal of the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604 , as is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 10A  and  FIG. 10B . 
       FIG. 8  illustrates a perspective view  800  of the third roller assembly  602 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. In some examples, the third roller assembly  602  includes a first shaft  802  and at least one second roller  134 . 
     In an example embodiment, the first shaft  802  may correspond to a rod that may extend along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 , when the third roller assembly  602  is movably coupled to the front plate  606  and the back-spine section  114 . More particularly, the first shaft  802  may include a first end  803  and a second end  805  that are configured to be coupled to the front plate  606  and the back-spine section  114 , respectively. The first shaft  802  may have a U-shaped cross section. However, in some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the first shaft  802  having the U-shaped cross section. In an embodiment, the shaft may have a circular cross-section. In another embodiment, the first shaft  802  may have a rectangular cross-section. In yet another embodiment, the first shaft  802  may have a cross section of any other geometrical shape without departing from the scope of the disclosure. In an example embodiment, the first shaft  802  may be configured to be fixedly coupled to at least one second roller  134  such that the at least one second roller  134  may extend from the first shaft  802  along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100  (when the first roller assembly  314  is coupled to the front plate  606  and the back-spine section  114 ). For example, the first shaft  802  is configured to receive three second rollers  134 . To this end, the three second rollers  134  are spaced apart from each other along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122  by a predetermined distance. In some examples, a spacer member  804  may facilitate maintaining the predetermined distance amongst the three second rollers  134 . The structure of the second roller  134  is further described in conjunction with  FIGS. 10A and 10B . In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to having three second rollers  134  in the third roller assembly  602 . The third roller assembly  602  may have any number of second rollers  134 , without departing from the scope of the disclosure. For example, the number of the second rollers  134  in the third roller assembly  602  may vary based on the width of the print media  104  installed in the printing apparatus  100 . 
     In an example embodiment, the first shaft  802  facilitates rotation of the at least one second roller  134  about the first shaft  802 . For example, the first shaft  802  may enable the rotation of the at least one second roller  134 , about the first shaft  802 , between the third position and the fourth position. The rotation of the at least one second roller  134  between the third position and the fourth position is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 10A  and  FIG. 10B . 
       FIG. 9A  and  FIG. 9B  illustrate a side view  900 A and a sectional view  900 B of the second roller  134 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     The second roller  134  may include a housing  902 , a second shaft  904 , and a second wheel  906 . In an example embodiment, housing  902  may have an outer surface  908  that may define a first end portion  910  and a second end portion  912 . The first end portion  910  of the housing  902  may be spaced apart from the second end portion  912  of the housing  902  along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100 . In an example embodiment, the housing  902  may have an elliptical shape. However, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the housing  902  having the elliptical shape. In an example embodiment, the housing  902  may have any other geometrical shape without departing from the scope of the disclosure. For example, the housing  902  may have a cuboidal shape. In some examples, the housing  902  may have one or more sides  903   a ,  903   b ,  903   c , and  903   d . The side  903   a  may be spaced apart from the side  903   c  along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . Further, the side  903   a  may be parallel to the side  903   c . Similarly, the side  903   b  may be spaced apart from the side  903   d  along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . Further, the side  903   b  may be parallel to the side  903   d.    
     In an example embodiment, the outer surface  908  of the housing  902  may define a first shaft through hole  914  that may extend from the side  903   a  to the side  903   c . In some examples, the outer surface  908  may define the first shaft through hole  914  proximal to the first end portion  910  of the housing  902 , and distal from the second end portion  912  of the housing  902 . Further, the first shaft through hole  914  may be configured to receive the first shaft  802 . Additionally or alternatively, the outer surface  908  of the housing  902  may be configured to define a second shaft through hole  916  that may extend from the side  903   a  to the side  903   c . Additionally or alternatively, the outer surface  908  may define the second shaft through hole  916  in such a manner that the second shaft through hole  916  may extend along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100 . The second shaft through hole  916  may be configured to receive the second shaft  904 . Since the second shaft through hole  916  extends along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100 , the second shaft  904  may be movable within the second shaft through hole  916 , along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100 . Additionally, or alternatively, the second shaft  904  may be rotatable within the second shaft through hole  916 . 
     In an example embodiment, the housing  902  of the second roller  134  is further configured to receive the second wheel  906  at the second end portion  912 . More particularly, referring to  FIG. 9B , the second shaft  904  is configured to receive the second wheel  906  such that the second wheel  906  is rotatable about the second shaft  904 . Since the second shaft  904  is movable along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100  (within the second shaft through hole  916 ), the second wheel  906  is also movable along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100 . Therefore, the second wheel  906  is both rotatable about the second shaft  904  and is traversable along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100  within the second shaft through hole  916 . In an example embodiment, the second shaft  904  is additionally coupled to a holder  918 . In an example embodiment, the holder  918  comprises a first end  920  and a second end  922 . The first end  920  of the holder  918  is spaced apart from the second end  922  of the holder along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100 . In an example embodiment, the first end  920  of the holder  918  abuts the second shaft  904 . 
     In an example embodiment, at the second end  922 , the holder  918  defines a protrusion  924  that may extend out from the second end  922  of the holder  918  along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100 . The protrusion  924  may be configured to receive a second biasing member  926  such as a spring and/or a leaf spring. The second biasing member  926  may additionally be coupled to the first shaft  802 , when the first shaft  802  is received within the first shaft through hole  914 . In an example embodiment, the second biasing member  926  may be configured to apply the biasing force on the holder  918  along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100 . More particularly, the biasing force may push the holder  918  towards the second end portion  912  of the housing  902 , which causes the second shaft  904  to move towards the second end portion  912  of the housing  902 . Accordingly, the movement of the second shaft  904  towards the second end portion  912  of the housing  902  causes a portion of the second wheel  906  to extend out from the second end portion  912  of the housing  902 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 6 , the structure of the fourth roller assembly  604  may be similar to the structure of the third roller assembly  602 . For example, the third roller assembly  602  may include the first shaft  802  that may receive the at least one first roller  132 . In an example embodiment, the structure of the at least one first roller  132  is similar to the structure of the second roller  134 . 
       FIG. 10A  and  FIG. 10B  are sectional views  1000 A and  1000 B of the printing apparatus  100  illustrating the traversal of the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     As depicted in the sectional view  1000 A, the first roller  132  and the one or more second rollers  134  abut the platform  322  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . In an example embodiment, a position of the first roller  132  and the second roller  134 , where the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  abut the platform  322 , is referred to as the third position. In an example embodiment, since the second biasing member  926  may apply the biasing force on the second wheel  906 , accordingly, the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may tightly abut the platform  322 . To this end, when the platform  322  receives the print media  104 , the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may abut the print media  104 . In some examples, in the third position, the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may facilitate flattening of the print media  104  of the first portion of the print media  104  (positioned between the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604 ). Since the print head engine  122  is positioned between the third roller assembly  602  (comprising the at least one second roller  134 ) and the fourth roller assembly  604  (comprising the at least one first rollers  132 ), the first portion of the print media  104  positioned within the print head engine  122  is flat. More particularly, the first portion of the print media  104  on the platform  322  is flat. 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  abutting the platform  322 . In an example embodiment, as discussed in  FIG. 3A , the breadth of the platform  322  may be the same as the breadth of the top chassis portion  126 . In such an embodiment, the platform  322  may not extend beyond the periphery of the top chassis portion  126 . To this end, the printing apparatus  100  may include the first shaft  248  and the second shaft  250 . The first shaft  248  may be positioned upstream of the print head engine  122 , along the print direction, and the second shaft  250  may be positioned downstream of the print head engine  122 , along the print direction. Further, in such an embodiment, the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may abut the first shaft  248  and the second shaft  250 , respectively (when the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  are in the third position). 
     In an example embodiment, as discussed in  FIG. 7 ,  FIG. 8 ,  FIGS. 9A and 9B , the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  are rotatable about the first shaft  802 . Referring to  FIG. 10B , the operator of the printing apparatus  100  may rotate the first cam roller  612  and the second cam roller  614  to cause rotation of the first shaft  802  that in turn causes the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  to rotate. Such rotation causes the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  to traverse to the fourth position. In some examples, in the fourth position, the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may point towards the top end portion  206  of the top chassis portion  126  (of the print head engine  122 ). Accordingly, in the fourth position, the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  are spaced apart from the print media  104  (depicted by  1002 ). Such orientation of the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  allows the operator to adjust the print media  104  with respect to the print head engine  122 . For example, the print media  104  may be adjusted to clear out a jam condition. In an example embodiment, the jam condition may correspond to a condition in which the print media  104  is unable to traverse in the print direction or in the retract direction due to some obstruction in the print path. 
     In some examples, the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604  may be coupled to the print head engine  122  through coupling shafts  1004 . For example, the print head engine  122  may be coupled to the first roller  132  and the second roller  134 . Accordingly, when the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  are rotated (when operator of the printing apparatus  100  rotates the first cam roller  612  and the second cam roller  614 ), the coupling shafts  1004  may cause the top chassis portion  126  of the print head engine  122  may traverse on the first linear guide  120 A and the second linear guide  120 B. For example, when the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  are rotated, about the first shaft  802 , to the fourth position, the top chassis portion  126  may traverse to a fifth position. In an example embodiment, in the fifth position, the top chassis portion  126  is spaced apart from the bottom chassis portion  128  thereby creating a space  1006  between the top chassis portion  126  and the bottom chassis portion  128 . In some examples, when the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  are rotated, about the first shaft  802 , to the third position, the top chassis portion  126  may traverse to a sixth position. In an example embodiment, in the sixth position, the top chassis portion  126  may removably couple with the bottom chassis portion  128 . 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to manually rotating the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  by rotating the first cam roller  612  and the second cam roller  614 . In an example embodiment, the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may be rotated based on the actuation of the first actuation unit  119 . As discussed in  FIG. 7 , the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604  are coupled to the first actuation unit  119  through the belt  710 . Therefore, the first actuation unit  119  may cause the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604  to rotate. 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  being part of the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604 . In an example embodiment, the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may separate from the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604 . In such an embodiment, the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  may be coupled to the back-spine section  114  of the printing apparatus  100 , as is illustrated in  FIG. 1 . Additionally, the printing apparatus  100  may include the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604 , as is described above in  FIG. 6 . To this end, the third roller assembly  602  and the fourth roller assembly  604  may include a fifth roller and a sixth roller, respectively. The structure of the fifth roller and the sixth roller may be similar to the second roller  134 , as is described in  FIG. 7 ,  FIG. 8  and  FIG. 9A  and  FIG. 9B . 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to using roller assemblies to flatten the print media  104 . In an example embodiment, the printing apparatus  100  may include one or more media guide assembly that may be configured to flatten the print media  104 , as is further illustrated in  FIG. 11 . 
       FIG. 11  illustrates a sectional view  1100  of the printing apparatus  100 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. The printing apparatus  100  includes a media guide assembly  1102  positioned upstream of the print head engine  122 . Further, the printing apparatus  100  includes the second roller assembly  316  positioned downstream of the print head engine  122 . In an example embodiment, the media guide assembly  1102  further includes an arm section  1104  and a groove section  1106 . 
     In an example embodiment, the arm section  1104  is fixedly coupled to back-spine section  114  of the printing apparatus  100 . Further, the arm section  1104  extends along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . Further, the arm section  1104  has a first end  1107  and a second end  1108 . The first end  1107  of the arm section  1104  is defined to be proximal to the print head engine  122  and the second end  1108  is defined to be distal from the print head engine  122 . Additionally, the arm section  1104  includes a top surface  1110  and a bottom surface  1112 . The top surface  1110  is defined to be distal from the bottom chassis portion  128  of the print head engine  122 , while the bottom surface  1112  is defined to be proximal to the bottom chassis portion  128 . 
     In an example embodiment, the bottom surface  1112  is configured to define the groove section  1106  such that the groove section  1106  protrudes out from the bottom surface  1112  towards the bottom chassis portion  128  of the print head engine  122 . In some examples, a distance between the bottom chassis portion  128  and the groove section  1106  is in a range of 0.4 mm to 0.6 mm. Further, when the print media  104  is received on the bottom chassis portion  128 , the print media  104  is pressed by the groove section  1106  and the second roller assembly  316 . To this end, the print media  104  is flattened between the second roller assembly  316  and the media guide assembly  1102 . 
     In some examples, the groove section  1106  may include a ramp section  1114  and a valley section  1116 . The ramp section  1114  may face the second end  1108  of the arm section  1104  and may have a predetermined slope. Further, the valley section  1116  may face the first end  1107  of the arm section  1104 . In some examples, the slope of the ramp section  1114  may facilitate smooth traversal of the print media  104  along the print path. Accordingly, the ramp section  1114  may reduce the media jam possibility. In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to groove section  1106  having the aforementioned shape. In an example embodiment, the groove section  1106  may have any other shape without departing from the scope of the disclosure. 
     In some examples, a distance between the groove section  1106  and the bottom chassis portion  128  may be adjustable. In such an embodiment, the groove section  1106  may be coupled to the arm section  1104  through a coupling means such as a screw. An operator of the printing apparatus  100  may rotate the screw clockwise and/or counterclockwise to adjust a distance between the groove section  1106  and the bottom chassis portion  128 . In such an embodiment, the distance between the groove section  1106  and the bottom chassis portion  128  may be adjusted from 0.4 mm to 0.6 mm, dependent on media thickness and flatness requirement, 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to a particular coupling means or screw. In an example embodiment, the coupling means may further include pen-click type mechanism. In such an embodiment, the operator of the printing apparatus  100  may adjust a distance between the groove section  1106  and the bottom chassis portion  128  by pressing a plunger coupled to the groove section  1106 . 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to having one media guide assembly  1102  in the printing apparatus  100  to flatten the print media  104 . In an example embodiment, the printing apparatus  100  may include another media guide assembly positioned downstream of the print head engine  122 . Further, in such an embodiment, the printing apparatus  100  may be devoid of the second roller assembly  316 . 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the printing apparatus  100  include the media guide assembly  1102 . In an example embodiment, the top chassis portion  126  of the print head engine  122  may define the groove section  1106  in the top chassis portion  126  of the print head engine  122 . More particularly, the print head engine  122  may define the groove section at a bottom surface of the top chassis portion  126  (which is proximal to the bottom chassis portion  128  of the print head engine  122 ). 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the print head engine  122  including the first roller  132  and the one or more second rollers  134 . Additionally, or alternatively, the printing apparatus  100  may include a frame to flatten the print media  104 , as is described in conjunction with  FIGS. 12-19 . 
     Example apparatuses, systems, and methods described herein include a printing apparatus that is capable of flattening or substantially flattening print media prior to the printing operation. In some examples and in embodiments configured to flatten print media, the printing apparatus includes a platform that is capable of receiving the print media for printing operation. In some example, the printing apparatus may include a vacuum generating unit that is configured to generate a negative pressure on the platform so as to cause the print media stick to or otherwise be detachably attached to the platform. In some examples, the edges of the print media may curl during the application of the negative pressure on the platform. To de-curl the edges of the print media, the printing apparatus further includes a frame that may be configured to press upon the edges of the print media. To this end, the combination of the vacuum generating unit and the frame facilitates, in some examples, flattening of the print media. 
       FIG. 12  illustrates an exploded view of the print head engine  122 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     In an example embodiment, the top chassis portion  126  may be configured to receive a print head (not shown). In some examples, the top chassis portion  126  may define one or more features such as a cavity (not shown), base plate (not shown) one or more first biasing members (not shown), and/or the like that allow the top chassis portion  126  to receive the print head. Additionally, or alternatively, the bottom end portion  208  of the top chassis portion  126  may be configured receive a frame  1216 . For example, the frame  1216  may be coupled to the bottom end portion  208  of the top chassis portion  126 , as is further described in  FIG. 14 . In an alternate embodiment, the frame  1216  may be movably positioned proximal to the bottom end portion  208  of the top chassis portion  126 . The structure of the frame  1216  is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 13  and  FIG. 15 . 
     In an example embodiment, the top chassis portion  126  may be configured to couple with the bottom chassis portion  128  through the latch  130 . When the top chassis portion  126  couple with the bottom chassis portion  128 , the frame  1216  may get movably positioned between the top chassis portion  126  and bottom chassis portion  128 . For example, the frame  1216  may traverse between a first position and a second position within a space between the bottom end portion  208  of the top chassis portion  126  and the top end portion  226  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . 
     In an example embodiment, the bottom chassis portion  128  has the outer surface  224 , a top surface  1218 , and a bottom surface  1220 . In some examples, the outer surface  224  and the top surface  1218  define the top end portion  226  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . Further, in some examples, the outer surface  224  and the bottom surface  1220  define the bottom end portion  228  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . In some examples, the top surface  1218  of the bottom chassis portion  128  defines a platform  1222  that may correspond to a region on which the print media  104  is received for printing operation. Further, the platform  1222  extends along the length (defined along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 ) and the breadth (defined along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 ) of the bottom chassis portion  128 . 
     In an example embodiment, the top surface  1218  of the bottom chassis portion  128  further divides the platform  1222  into a printing region  1224  and a periphery region  1226 . Dimensions of the printing region  1224  may be defined to be proportional to a maximum size of the print media  104  supported by the printing apparatus  100 . In an example embodiment, the periphery region  1226  may be defined to be proximal to the first circular notch  236 , the second circular notch  238 , the third circular notch  240 , and a fourth circular notch  242 . In some examples, the periphery region  1226  surrounds the printing region  1224 . 
     In an example embodiment, the top surface  1218  of the bottom chassis portion  128  defines a plurality of orifices  1228   a ,  1228   b , . . . ,  1228   n  that extends from the top surface  1218  of the bottom chassis portion  128  to the bottom surface  1220  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . At the bottom surface  1220 , the bottom chassis portion  128  is configured to receive a vacuum generating unit, as is further illustrated in  FIG. 16 . 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the platform  1222  to be fixedly defined by the top surface  1218  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . In some examples, the platform  1222  may be a modular component that may be removably coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128 , without departing from the scope of the disclosure. The structure of the bottom chassis portion  128  that allows coupling with the modular platform is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 17 . The structure of an example modular platform is described in conjunction with  FIG. 18 . 
       FIG. 13  illustrates a perspective view of the frame  1216 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. The frame  1216  includes a media flattening portion  1302 , and first supporting members  1304   a ,  1304   b ,  1304   c , and  1304   d.    
     In an example embodiment, the media flattening portion  1302  may have a rectangular shape that may have one or more sides  1308   a ,  1308   b ,  1308   c , and  1308   d . The side  1308   a  may be spaced apart from the side  1308   c  along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . Further, the side  1308   a  may be parallel to the side  1308   c . Similarly, the side  1308   b  may be spaced apart from the side  1308   d  along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . Further, the side  1308   b  may be parallel to the side  1308   d . Additionally, the media flattening portion  1302  may have a top surface  1328  and a bottom surface  1330 . In an example embodiment, the top surface  1328  of the media flattening portion  1302  may define a top end portion  1324  of the media flattening portion  1302 . Further, the bottom surface  1330  of the media flattening portion  1302  may define a bottom end portion  1326  of the media flattening portion  1302 . 
     In some examples, the bottom surface  1330  of the media flattening portion  1302  may define a void  1310  that extends from the bottom surface  1330  of the media flattening portion  1302  to the top surface  1328 . In an example embodiment, a shape of the void  1310  is defined by an inner edge  1312  of the media flattening portion  1302 . In some examples, the void  1310  may have the rectangular shape. In such a scenario, the shape the media flattening portion  1302  may correspond to a concentric rectangle. Further, to this end, one or more dimensions of the media flattening portion  1302  may include an outer length (depicted by  1314 ), an outer breadth (depicted by  1316 ), an inner length (depicted by  1318 ), and an inner breadth (depicted by  1320 ). In some examples, the outer length (depicted by  1314 ) and the inner length (depicted by  1318 ) of the media flattening portion  1302  is defined along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . Further, in some examples, the outer breadth (depicted by  1316 ) and the inner breadth (depicted by  1320 ) of the media flattening portion  1302  is defined along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . 
     In some examples, the media flattening portion  1302  may be configured to be coupled to the first supporting members  1304   a ,  1304   b ,  1304   c , and  1304   d . In an example embodiment, the media flattening portion  1302  is configured to be movably coupled to the top chassis portion  126  through the first supporting members  1304   a ,  1304   b ,  1304   c , and  1304   d . In some examples, the dimensions of the inner length (depicted by  1318 ) of the media flattening portion  1302  and the inner breadth (depicted by  1320 ) may be equivalent to the dimensions of the print head. To this end, when the frame  1216  is received at the bottom end portion  208  of the top chassis portion  126 , the print head is visible through the void  1310 . The coupling of the frame  1216  with the top chassis portion  126  is further described in  FIG. 14 . 
       FIG. 14  illustrates a sectional view of the top chassis portion  126 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. As illustrated in  FIG. 14 , the bottom end portion  208  defines a first channel  1420 , a second channel  1422 , a third channel (not shown) and a fourth channel (not shown) that extends from the bottom end portion  208  of the top chassis portion  126  towards the top end portion  206  of the top chassis portion  126 . The first channel  1420 , and the second channel  1422  may be configured to receive at least one biasing member  1402 . Similarly, though not illustrated in  FIG. 14 , the third channel and the fourth channel may also receive the biasing member  1402 . Additionally, as illustrated, each of the first channel  1420  and the second channel  1422  may be configured to receive the first supporting members  1304   a  and  1304   b , respectively. Similarly, (though not illustrated in  FIG. 14 ), the third channel and the fourth channel may receive the first supporting members  1304   c , and  1304   d , respectively. 
     In some examples, the plurality of first supporting members  1304   a ,  1304   b ,  1304   c , and  1304   d  may couple to the at least one biasing member  1402  in each of the each of the first channel  1420 , the second channel  1422 , the third channel, and the fourth channel, respectively. For example, a first end  1406  the first supporting member  1304   a  is coupled to the at least one biasing member  1402 . In an example embodiment, the at least one biasing member  1402  exerts a biasing force (depicted by  1410 ) on each of the plurality of first supporting members  1304   a ,  1304   b ,  1304   c , and  1304   d  to pull the first end  1406  of each of the plurality of first supporting members  1304   a ,  1304   b ,  1304   c , and  1304   d  towards the top end portion  206  of the top chassis portion  126 , when no external force is applied on the plurality of first supporting members  1304   a ,  1304   b ,  1304   c , and  1304   d . In an alternate embodiment, the at least one biasing member  1402  exerts a biasing force (depicted by  1410 ) on each of the plurality of first supporting members  1304   a ,  1304   b ,  1304   c , and  1304   d  to push the first end  1406  of the plurality of first supporting members  1304   a ,  1304   b ,  1304   c , and  1304   d  towards the bottom chassis portion  128 , when no external force is applied on the plurality of first supporting members  1304   a ,  1304   b ,  1304   c , and  1304   d.    
     As discussed above, the biasing member  1402  applies the biasing force (depicted by  1410 ) on the first supporting members  1304   a ,  1304   b ,  1304   c , and  1304   d . Accordingly, the biasing force (depicted by  1410 ) is applied on the media flattening portion  1302  causing the media flattening portion  1302  to travel towards the bottom end portion  208  of the top chassis portion  126 . In some examples, to cause the media flattening portion  1302  to traverse to a position proximal to the bottom chassis portion  128 , the external force may be applied to the frame  1216 . In some examples, a fifth actuation unit  1412  may be configured to apply the external force to the frame  1216 . Some examples of the fifth actuation unit  1412  may include a hydraulic system. In such an embodiment, the biasing force on the frame  1216  may be applied through hydraulic system. To this end, each of the first channel  1420 , the second channel  1422 , the third channel, and the fourth channel, may be devoid of the at least one biasing member  1402 . Further, each of the first channel  1420 , the second channel  1422 , the third channel, and the fourth channel may be fluidly coupled to a hydraulic pump  1414 . In some examples, the hydraulic pump  1414  may be configured to pump fluid in/out from each of the first channel  1420 , the second channel  1422 , the third channel, and the fourth channel (through one or more conduits such as conduit  1416  and conduit  1418 ) to apply the external force on the frame  1216 . For example, when the fluid is pumped into each of the first channel  1420 , the second channel  1422 , the third channel, and the fourth channel, the fluid may exert the external force on the frame  1216 . In another example, when the fluid is pumped out from each of the first channel  1420 , the second channel  1422 , the third channel, and the fourth channel, a negative pressure (generated due to pumping out the fluid) exerts the biasing force (depicted by  1410 ) on the frame  1216 . Further, in such an embodiment, the first supporting members  1304   a ,  1304   b ,  1304   c , and  1304   d  may not be coupled to the biasing member  1402  in the first channel  1420 , the second channel  1422 , the third channel, and the fourth channel. To this end, the first supporting members  1304   a ,  1304   b ,  1304   c , and  1304   d  may be directly received within the first channel  1420 , the second channel  1422 , the third channel, and the fourth channel, respectively. 
     In yet another embodiment, the fifth actuation unit  1412  may correspond to an electromagnet that may be installed in the bottom chassis portion  128 , as is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 16 . In such an implementation, activation of the electromagnet may lead to generation of magnetic field, which may apply magnetic force on the frame  1216 . The magnetic force applied on the frame  1216  may correspond to the external force, which may cause the traversal of the frame  1216 . 
       FIG. 15  illustrates a perspective view  1500  of another implementation of the frame  1216 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     In an example embodiment, the frame  1216  includes a media flattening portion  1502 , a second supporting member portion  1504 , and a linear block  1506 . In some examples, the media flattening portion  1502  may have a structure similar to the media flattening portion  1302 . For example, a shape of the media flattening portion  1502  may correspond to a concentric rectangle. Further, the media flattening portion  1502  comprises one or more sides  1508   a ,  1508   b ,  1508   c , and  1508   d . The side  1508   a  may be spaced apart from the side  1508   c  along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . Further, the side  1508   a  may be parallel to the side  1508   c . Similarly, the side  1508   b  may be spaced apart from the side  1508   d  along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . Further, the side  1508   b  may be parallel to the side  1508   d.    
     In an example embodiment, the media flattening portion  1502  is coupled to the linear block  1506  through the second supporting member portion  1504 . In some examples, the side  1508   c  of the media flattening portion  1502  is coupled to the linear block  1506  through the second supporting member portion  1504 . In some examples, the second supporting member portion  1504  may correspond to a support member that is capable of bearing the weight of the media flattening portion  1502 . 
     In an example embodiment, the linear block  1506  is further movably coupled to the first linear guide  120 A and the second linear guide  120 B. Further, a length of the second supporting member portion  1504  is such that when the linear block  1506  is movably coupled to the first linear guide  120 A and the second linear guide  120 B, the void  1510  of the media flattening portion  1502  is positioned below the print head along the vertical axis  128  (mounted in the top chassis portion  126 ). More particularly, the print head is visible through the void  1510 . For example, in scenario where the print head corresponds to a laser pint head, the void  1510  may allow the laser light from the print head to pass through. 
     Further, the linear block  1506  may be coupled to an actuation unit (e.g., a hydraulic pump, electromagnet, and rails as is shown in  FIGS. 14-16 ), which may facilitate the traversal of the frame  1216 . For example, the one or more motors of the printing apparatus  100  may be coupled to the linear block  1506 . The actuation of the one or more motors may cause the traversal of the frame  1216 . 
       FIG. 16  illustrates a bottom perspective view  1600  of the bottom chassis portion  128 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     As discussed in  FIG. 12  and in some examples, at the bottom surface  1220 , the bottom chassis portion  128  is configured to receive a vacuum generating unit. For example, at the bottom surface  1220 , the bottom chassis portion  128  is configured to receive a vacuum generating unit  1602 . In an example embodiment, the vacuum generating unit  1602  may be configured to generate a negative pressure at the top surface  1218  of the bottom chassis portion  128  through the plurality of orifices  1228   a ,  1228   b , . . . ,  1228   n . In some examples, the negative pressure causes the print media  104  (received on the platform  1222 ) to stick to the platform  1222 . Accordingly, the print media  104  may lay flat on the platform  1222 , when the vacuum generating unit  1602  is activated. Some examples of the vacuum generating unit  1602  may include a fan, or a vacuum pump. 
     In some examples, the bottom surface  1220  of the bottom chassis portion  128  may be further configured to receive the fifth actuation unit  1412 . For example, bottom surface  1220  of the bottom chassis portion  128  may be configured to receive the electromagnet  1604 . 
       FIG. 17  illustrates another perspective view of a portion of the bottom chassis portion  128 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     In an example embodiment, the top surface  1218  of the bottom chassis portion  128  defines a depression  1702  at the top end portion  226  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . Further, the depression  1702  extends along the length (defined along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 ) and the breadth (defined along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 ) of the bottom chassis portion  128 . In some examples, defining the depression  1702  leads to formation of a platform receiving surface  1704 . The platform receiving surface  1704  may have a rectangular shape that is surrounded by wall surfaces  1706   a ,  1706   b , and  1706   c  on the three sides. In some examples, by the wall surfaces  1706   a ,  1706   b , and  1706   c  may extend from the platform receiving surface  1704  to the top end portion  226  of the bottom chassis portion  128  along the vertical axis  128  of the print head engine  122 . In an example embodiment, the wall surfaces  1706   a  and  1706   c  may extend along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122  and may be parallel to each other. Further, the wall surface  1706   b  may extend along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122  and may be defined to be proximal to the back-spine section  114  of the printing apparatus  100 . In an example embodiment, the platform receiving surface  1704  may not be surrounded by a wall surface on the fourth side to define an opening  1708 . In some examples, the opening  1708  may allow the receipt of the modular component  1716  such as the modular platform (further described in  FIG. 18 ). 
     In an example embodiment, each of the wall surfaces  1706   a ,  1706   b , and  1706   c  may define a protruding groove  1710  proximal to the top end portion  226 . The protruding groove  1710  may extend along a length of each wall surface  1706   a ,  1706   b , and  1706   c . For example, the protruding groove  1710 , defined on the wall surfaces  1706   a  and  1706   c , may extend along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . Further, the protruding groove  1710 , defined on the wall surface  1706   b  may extend along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . In some examples, a region  1712 , on each wall surface  1706   a  and  1706   c , between the respective protruding groove  1710  and the platform receiving surface  1704  may define a path to slidingly receive the modular component  1716  such as the modular platform (described in conjunction with  FIG. 18 ). Additionally, or alternately, the region  1712  and the protruding groove  1710 , defined on wall surface  1706   b , may lock the modular platform and accordingly, may thwart motion of the modular platform. For example, the region  1712  and the protruding groove  1710 , defined on wall surface  1706   b , may thwart the motion of the modular component along the vertical axis  128  of the printing apparatus  100 . 
     In an example embodiment, a gasket layer  1718  may be disposed on the region  1712  on each wall surface  1706   a ,  1706   b , and  1706   c . In some examples, the gasket layer  1718  may prevent air from passing through an interface between the modular component  1716  (that may be received on the platform receiving surface  1704 ) and the region  1712 . 
     In an example embodiment, the bottom surface  1220  of the bottom chassis portion  128  defines a cavity  1714  that extends from the bottom surface  1220  of the bottom chassis portion  128  to the platform receiving surface  1704 . In a scenario, where the modular component  1716  is received on the platform receiving surface  1704 , the modular component  1716  such that the modular component  1716  covers the cavity  1714  from the top end portion  226  of the bottom chassis portion  128 . As discussed above, the vacuum generating unit  1602  is received at the bottom end portion  228  of the bottom chassis portion  128  to generate the negative pressure through the cavity  1714 . 
       FIG. 18  illustrates a perspective view of the modular platform  1800 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     The modular platform  1800  has an outer surface  1802  that may define a top end portion  1804  and a bottom end portion  1806  of the modular platform  1800 . In some examples, the top end portion  1804  of the modular platform  1800  may be configured to be positioned proximal to the top end portion  226  of the bottom chassis portion  128  when the modular platform  1800  is received on the platform receiving surface  1704  (defined on the bottom chassis portion  128 ). Further, the bottom end portion  1806  of the modular platform  1800  may face the cavity  1714 , when the modular platform  1800  is received on the platform receiving surface  1704 . In some examples, a width of the modular platform  1800  (along the vertical axis  128  of the print head engine  122 ) may be equivalent to the width of the region  1712  (defined between the respective protruding groove  1710  and the platform receiving surface  1704 ). 
     In an example embodiment, the outer surface  1802  may define a plurality of orifices  1808   a ,  1808   b , . . .  1808   n  that may extend from the bottom end portion  1806  of the modular platform  1800  to the top end portion  1804  of the modular platform  1800 . In an example embodiment, the plurality of orifices  1808   a ,  1808   b , . . .  1808   n , may be arranged as a (N*M) matrix, where N corresponds to a count of rows of the plurality of orifices  1808   a ,  1808   b , . . .  1808   n , and where the M corresponds to a count of columns in the plurality of orifices  1808   a ,  1808   b , . . .  1808   n . In an example embodiment, the rows of the plurality of orifices are defined to extend along the lateral axis  212  of the print head engine  122 . Further, the column of the plurality of orifices are defined to extend along the longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . 
     In an example embodiment, the count of rows of the plurality of orifices  1808   a ,  1808   b , . . .  1808   n  may be proportional to a width of the print media  104  being used in the printing apparatus  100 . For example, a count of rows of the plurality of orifices  1808   a ,  1808   b , . . .  1808   n  may vary based on a width of the print media  104 . In the example, another modular platform with less count of rows of the plurality of orifices  1808   a ,  1808   b , . . .  1808   n  may be installed on the bottom chassis portion  128  to create better suction on a print media that has a less width. To this end, the modular platform  1800  may be removed by sliding the modular platform  1800  out of the bottom chassis portion  128 . Further, the other modular platform (that supports the other print media) is slid into the bottom chassis portion  128 . 
       FIG. 19 a    and  FIG. 19 b    illustrate perspective views of the modular platform  1800  being slid on the bottom chassis portion  128 , and the bottom chassis portion  128  with the modular platform  1800 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     Referring to  FIG. 19 a   , the modular platform  1800  is received on the platform receiving surface  1704  by sliding the modular platform  1800  from the opening  1708  between the groove  1710  and the platform receiving surface  1704 . Referring to  FIG. 19B , the modular platform  1800  positioned at the top end portion  226  of on the bottom chassis portion  128 . 
     In some examples, the aforementioned structure of the print head engine  122  is utilizable for vector mode printing. However, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the print head engine  122  having the aforementioned structure. In an example embodiment, the print head engine  122  may have a structure that may facilitate the printing apparatus  100  to print in raster mode. Such structure of the print head engine  122  is described herein. 
     Print Head Structure—Raster Mode 
     In some examples, to facilitate the printing apparatus  100  to print content using laser beam, the print head may include a laser subsystem. The laser subsystem may further include tone or more laser sources and optical assemblies. The one or more laser sources may be configured to generate one or more laser beams that are directed through the optical assemblies so as to focus energy on the print media for printing content. 
       FIG. 20  illustrates a schematic of the print head  302 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. The print head  302  includes a laser subsystem  2002 , a start of line (SOL) detector  2004 , a laser power control system  2006 , a controller  2008 , a memory device  2010 , an Input/Output (I/O) interface unit  2012 , a laser subsystem control unit  2014 , and a synchronization unit  2016 . 
     The controller  2008  may be embodied as means including one or more microcontrollers with accompanying digital signal controller(s), one or more controller(s) without an accompanying digital signal controller, one or more controllers, one or more multi-core controllers, one or more controllers, processing circuitry, one or more computers, various other processing elements including integrated circuits such as, for example, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) or field programmable gate array (FPGA), or some combination thereof. Accordingly, although illustrated in  FIG. 20  as a single controller, in an embodiment, the controller  2008  may include a plurality of controllers and signal processing modules. The plurality of controllers may be embodied on a single electronic device or may be distributed across a plurality of electronic devices collectively configured to function as the circuitry of the print head  302 . The plurality of controllers may be in operative communication with each other and may be collectively configured to perform one or more functionalities of the circuitry of the print head  302 , as described herein. In an example embodiment, the controller  2008  may be configured to execute instructions stored in the memory device  2010  or otherwise accessible to the controller  2008 . These instructions, when executed by the controller  2008 , may cause the circuitry of the printing apparatus  100  to perform one or more of the functionalities as described herein. 
     Whether configured by hardware, firmware/software methods, or by a combination thereof, the controller  2008  may include an entity capable of performing operations according to embodiments of the present disclosure while configured accordingly. Thus, for example, when the controller  2008  is embodied as an ASIC, FPGA or the like, the controller  2008  may include specifically configured hardware for conducting one or more operations described herein. Alternatively, as another example, when the controller  2008  is embodied as an executor of instructions, such as may be stored in the memory device  2704 , the instructions may specifically configure the controller  2008  to perform one or more algorithms and operations described herein. 
     Thus, the controller  2008  used herein may refer to a programmable microcontroller, microcomputer or multiple controller chip or chips that can be configured by software instructions (applications) to perform a variety of functions, including the functions of the various embodiments described above. In some devices, multiple controllers may be provided dedicated to wireless communication functions and one controller dedicated to running other applications. Software applications may be stored in the internal memory before they are accessed and loaded into the controllers. The controllers may include internal memory sufficient to store the application software instructions. In many devices, the internal memory may be a volatile or nonvolatile memory, such as flash memory, or a mixture of both. The memory can also be located internal to another computing resource (e.g., enabling computer readable instructions to be downloaded over the Internet or another wired or wireless connection). 
     The memory device  2010  may include suitable logic, circuitry, and/or interfaces that are adapted to store a set of instructions that is executable by the controller  2008  to perform predetermined operations. Some of the commonly known memory implementations include, but are not limited to, a hard disk, random access memory, cache memory, read only memory (ROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM) &amp; electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), flash memory, magnetic cassettes, magnetic tape, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, a compact disc read only memory (CD-ROM), digital versatile disc read only memory (DVD-ROM), an optical disc, circuitry configured to store information, or some combination thereof. In an example embodiment, the memory device  2010  may be integrated with the controller  2008  on a single chip, without departing from the scope of the disclosure. 
     In some examples, the memory device  2010  may include a buffer space and one or more configuration registers. In an example embodiment, the buffer space may be configured to store the data that is to be printed on the print media  104 . In some examples, the one or more configuration registers are configured to hold configuration values. The configuration values in the one or more configuration registers are deterministic of one or more configurations and one or more statuses of the print head  302 . Following table illustrates example if the one or more configuration tables: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 1 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 One or more configuration registers 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 S.No 
                 Configuration table 
               
               
                   
               
               
                  1 
                 Print head control register 
               
               
                  2 
                 Print head DPI register 
               
               
                  3 
                 Image width register 
               
               
                  4 
                 Image length register 
               
               
                  5 
                 Print speed register 
               
               
                  7 
                 Print darkness and contrast register 
               
               
                  8 
                 Mirror overrun register 
               
               
                  9 
                 Print head status register 
               
               
                 10 
                 Print head self-check status register 
               
               
                 11 
                 Laser beam location register 
               
               
                 12 
                 Upper odometer register 
               
               
                 13 
                 Lower odometer register 
               
               
                 14 
                 Print head error register 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The one or more configuration registers are further described in conjunction with  FIG. 40 . 
     The I/O device interface unit  2012  may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may be configured to communicate with the one or more components of the printing apparatus  100 , in accordance with one or more device communication protocols such as, without limitation, I2C communication protocol, Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) communication protocol, Serial communication protocol, Control Area Network (CAN) communication protocol, and 1-Wire® communication protocol. Some examples of the I/O device interface unit  2012  may include, but are not limited to, a Data Acquisition (DAQ) card, an electrical drives driver circuit, and/or the like. 
     In an example embodiment, the I/O device interface unit  2012  includes a print head interface. In some examples, the print head interface facilitates coupling between the print head  302  and the control unit  138  of the printing apparatus. In an example embodiment, the print head interface allows communication of the one or more signals between the print head  302  and the control unit  138  of the printing apparatus  100 . In an example embodiment, the one or more signals may facilitate synchronization between the print head  302  and the control unit  138 , as is described in  FIGS. 41-47 . Additionally, or alternatively, the print head interface may include one or more electrical connectors through which the one or more signals are shared amongst the print head  302  and the control unit  138 . The following table illustrates the pinout of the print head interface: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 2 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Pin out of the print head interface 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Pin 
                 SIGNAL 
               
               
                   
               
               
                  1 
                 MOTOR_EN 
               
               
                  2 
                 GND 
               
               
                  3 
                 DATA_1 
               
               
                  4 
                 DATA_9 
               
               
                  5 
                 DATA_2 
               
               
                  6 
                 DATA_10 
               
               
                  7 
                 GND 
               
               
                  8 
                 DATA_3 
               
               
                  9 
                 DATA_11 
               
               
                 10 
                 DATA_4 
               
               
                 11 
                 DATA_12 
               
               
                 12 
                 GND 
               
               
                 13 
                 DATA_5 
               
               
                 14 
                 DATA_13 
               
               
                 15 
                 DATA_6 
               
               
                 16 
                 DATA_14 
               
               
                 17 
                 GND 
               
               
                 18 
                 DATA__7 
               
               
                 19 
                 DATA_15 
               
               
                 20 
                 DATA_8 
               
               
                 21 
                 DATA_16 
               
               
                 22 
                 GND 
               
               
                 23 
                 CLOCK 
               
               
                 24 
                 GND 
               
               
                 25 
                 LSYNC 
               
               
                 26 
                 FSYNC 
               
               
                 27 
                 LASER_EN 
               
               
                 28 
                 RDY2PRINT 
               
               
                 29 
                 LASER_PRINT 
               
               
                 30 
                 LASER_POS 
               
               
                 31 
                 LPH_RDY_N 
               
               
                 32 
                 RST_N 
               
               
                 33 
                 GND 
               
               
                 34 
                 SPI_CLK 
               
               
                 35 
                 GND 
               
               
                 36 
                 SPI_MOSI 
               
               
                 37 
                 SPI_MISO 
               
               
                 38 
                 SPI_CS 
               
               
                 39 
                 INT 
               
               
                 40 
                 GND 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The purpose of the one or more signals and the other pinouts in the print head interface is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 41-47 . In an example embodiment, the laser subsystem  2002  may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may enable the print head  302  to direct the laser onto the print media  104  positioned on the platform  322 . The laser subsystem  2002  may include one or more optical assemblies and the laser sources that may operate in conjunction to facilitate directing of the laser onto the print media  104 . The structure and the operation of the laser subsystem  2002  is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 21 . 
     Laser Optics 
       FIG. 21  illustrates a schematic diagram of the laser subsystem  2002 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. The laser subsystem  2002  includes one or more laser sources  2102  and an optical assembly  2104 . 
     In an example embodiment, the one or more laser sources include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may enable the one or more laser sources  2102  to generate one or more laser beams. In some examples, the one or more laser sources  2102  may be capable of generating the one or more laser beams of different wavelengths. For example, the one or more laser sources may be capable of generating the one or more laser beams that have a wavelength in a range of 600 nm to 800 nm. Some examples of the one or more laser sources may include, but are not limited to, gas laser source, chemical laser source, excimer laser source, solid state laser source, fiber laser source, photonic crystal laser source, semiconductor based laser source, dye laser source, free electron laser source, and/or the like. In some examples, the one or more laser sources  2102  may be configured to product a writing laser beam and a preheating laser beam. The writing laser beam has a wavelength of 600 nm. the preheating laser beam has a wavelength of 800 nm. 
     The optical assembly  2104  is positioned with respect to the one or more laser sources and are configured to direct the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam onto the print media  104 . In an example embodiment, the optical assembly  2104  includes polygon mirror  2106  that may be coupled to a fourth actuation unit  2108 . The fourth actuation unit  2108  may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may facilitate rotation of the polygon mirror  2106  at a predetermined speed. In an example embodiment, the polygon mirror  2106  may have one or more reflective surfaces  2110 , where a count of the one or more reflective surfaces  2110  is dependent on a shape of the polygon mirror that defines the one or more reflective surfaces  2110 . For example, if the shape of the polygon mirror corresponds to an octagon, the count of the one or more reflective surfaces  2110  is eight. The polygon mirror  2106  is so positioned with respect to the one or more laser sources  2102  such that the polygon mirror  2106  reflect the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam in along a predetermined direction. More particularly, the one or more reflective surfaces  2110  may reflect the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam in the predetermined direction based on an angle of incidence between the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam and a reflective surface of the one or more reflective surfaces  2110 . In an example embodiment, when the polygon mirror  2106  is rotated, the angle of incidence between the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam and a reflective surface  2110  may vary due to which the direction in which the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam are reflected varies. To this end, the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam may sweep along a longitudinal axis  210  of the print head engine  122 . 
     The optical assembly  2104  further includes a plurality of lenses  2112  through which the reflected beam passes. In an example embodiment, the plurality of lenses may be configured to respectively converge the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam. The optical assembly  2104  further includes one or more folding mirrors  2114   a ,  2114   b ,  2114   c , and  2114   d  that are positioned downstream of the plurality of lenses  2112 . In some examples, the plurality of folding mirrors  2114   a ,  2114   b ,  2114   c , and  2114   d  may be configured to modify a direction of the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam. More particularly, the one or more folding mirrors  2114   a ,  2114   b ,  2114   c , and  2114   d  may direct the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam on the print media  104  positioned on the platform  322  on the bottom chassis portion  128 . 
     Since the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam sweep due to rotation of the polygon mirror  2106 , the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam may sweep across a width of the print media  104 . When the laser impinges on the print media  104 , a color of the print media gets modified. The modification of the color of the print media  104  corresponds to the printed content. The print media  104  that changes color upon impingement of the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam, is described later in conjunction with  FIG. 25A . 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the one or more laser sources  2102  generating the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam, where the writing laser beam is configured to write content on the print media  104  and the preheating laser beam is configured to pre-heat the print media  104 . In an example embodiment, the one or more laser sources  2102  may be configured to generate more than one writing laser beams. For example, the one or more laser sources  2102  may be configured to generate three writing laser beams such that the three writing laser beams are configured to write content on the print media  104 . To this end, the three writing laser beams are configured to be directed onto the print media  104  through the optical assembly  2104 . To this end, the three writing laser beams may be directed onto the print media  104  to be adjacent to each other along the print path. In some examples, the first three laser beams may be configured to concurrently print three adjacent lines of the print media  104 . In such an embodiment, the first three laser beams may be configured to print different data. In some examples, a set of the three writing laser beams may be disabled during the printing operation. In yet another example, the three writing laser beams may be configured to print the same data. In an example embodiment, the three writing laser beams may be configured per one or more configuration settings of the printing apparatus  100 . In some examples, the one or more configuration settings may include, but are not limited to, a resolution at which the content is to be printed, a speed of the print media  104  traversal along the print path, and/or the like. 
     SOL Detector 
     In some examples, the print head  302  may be calibrated prior to or during the process of printing content. In some examples, calibration may be activated to determine a location of one or more optics, such as a polygon mirror, at any given time instantly. In some examples, calibration of the optics provide an indication of where content is to be printed, such as via a start of line (SOL) detector. The SOL detector may correspond to a photo-detector that receives a reflected laser beam from each face of the polygon mirror  2102  as the polygon mirror  2102  rotates or it may take the form of another detection mechanism, such as a light sensor, heat sensor, or the like that is configured to detect reflections from one or more optics. Such a detector, in some examples, allows for the detection of a speed of the optics as well as one or more characteristics of the optics, such as the face of the polygon mirror on which the one or more laser sources are directing the laser beam. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 20 , the SOL detector  2004  may include suitable logic and circuitry that may facilitate the printing apparatus  100  to determine a current position of the polygon mirror  2106 . Determining the current position allows the printing apparatus  100  to calibrate the polygon mirror  2106 . For example, calibration allows the printing apparatus  100  to adjust the start of line (SOL) from where the content is to be printed on the print media  104  by positioning the polygon mirror  2106 . The structure of the SOL detector  2004  is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 22 . 
       FIG. 22  illustrates a schematic diagram of the SOL detector  2004 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. The SOL detector  2004  includes a second laser source  2202  and a photo detector  2204 . 
     In an example embodiment, the second laser source  2202  may similar to one or more laser sources structurally and functionally. In some examples, the second laser source  2202  may be positioned with respect to the polygon mirror  2106  such that the calibration laser beam generated by the second laser source  2202  gets reflected from the one or more reflective surfaces  2110  of the polygon mirror  2106 . 
     In an example embodiment, the photo detector  2204  may corresponds to a sensor that may be configured to receive a laser beam reflected from the polygon mirror  2106 . For example, the photo detector  2204  may be configured to receive the reflected calibration laser beam. Accordingly, the photo detector  2204  generates a SOL signal that may indicate the position of the polygon mirror  2106 . In an example embodiment, the printing apparatus  100  may determine the position of the polygon mirror  2106  based on the SOL signal. The position of the polygon mirror  2106  may facilitate the determination of the SOL. 
     Laser Power Control System 
     In some examples, the print head may include a control system. In some examples, the control system is configured to control various functionality of the print head to include the laser sources and optics enclosed therein. For example, the control system may be configured to control the speed of the polygon mirror in order to achieve printing resolutions and various printing speeds. Further, the control system may be configured to control the power level of the laser sources during operation. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 20 , the laser power control system  2006  may include suitable logic circuitry that may enable the printing apparatus  100  to control the power of the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam. For example, the laser power control system  2006  is configured to control the power of the one or more laser sources based on mode of operation of the printing apparatus  100 . In some examples, the mode of the operation of the printing apparatus  100  may be at least deterministic of resolution at which the content is to be printed on the print media  104 . Some examples of the resolution may include, but are not limited to 200 DPI, 400 DPI, and 600 DPI. The structure of the laser power control system  2006  is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 23 . 
       FIG. 23  illustrates a schematic of the laser power control system  2006 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. The laser power control system  2006  includes one or more photo detectors assemblies  2302 . The plurality of the photo detectors assemblies  2302  may include photo detectors  2304  and optical assemblies  2306 . 
     In an example embodiment, the optical assembly  2306  is configured to receive a portion of the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam through the optical assembly  2104 . In an example embodiment, the optical assemblies  2306  may be configured to collimate the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam. Thereafter, the optical assemblies  2306  may be configured to direct the portion of the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam onto the one or more photo detectors  2304 . In an example embodiment, the one or more photo detectors  2304  may be configured to generate a third signal that may be indicative of the power of the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam. The third signal may be transmitted to the control system of the printing apparatus  100 . In an example embodiment, the control system of the printing apparatus  100  may be configured to determine a current power of the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam based on the third signal. Thereafter, the control system may be configured to compare the current power of the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam with the required power of the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam. Thereafter, based on the comparison, the control system may be configured to modify the power of the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam. 
     Referring to  FIG. 20 , the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may enable the print head  302  to control an operation of the laser subsystem  2002 . For example, the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may be configured to control a rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106 , as is further described in  FIG. 47 . In another example, the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may be configured to control the power of the one or more laser sources, as is described above in  FIG. 23 . In such an embodiment, the functionality of the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may include the laser power control system  2006 . In some examples, the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may be implemented as Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) or Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA). The synchronization unit  2016  may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may enable the print head  302  to receive the one or more signals from the control unit  138 . For example, the synchronization unit  2016  may be configured to receive a clock signal from the control unit  138 . Based on the one or more signals, the synchronization unit  2016  may be configured to instruct the laser subsystem control unit  2014  to control the operation of the print head  302 , as is described in  FIGS. 41-47 . In some examples, the synchronization unit  2016  may be implemented as Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) or Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA). 
     Preheating Media 
     In some examples, to conserve power and/or provide efficient printing of the content, the print media  104  may be preheated. In an example embodiment, the one or more laser sources may be directed towards the print media  104  to preheat the print media. In other embodiments, the heat of the print head itself may be used to preheat the media such as by bringing the media in proximity to the print head or a heat dissipation unit attached to or in communication with the print head. In yet other examples, other internal systems such as a fan proximate the controller or other internal components may be used to preheat the print media. To this end and as a function of preheating, content may be printed on the print media  104  using a low power writing laser beam as compared to a higher power writing laser beam that may be used in response to non-preheated media. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 20 , in operation, the print head  302  may direct the preheating laser beam onto the print media  104 , which causes the print media  104  to heat up. Thereafter, the print head  302  may direct the writing laser beam onto the print media  104  to print content on the print media  104 . The structure of the print media  104  is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 25A . 
     Thermal Management 
     In some examples, the usage of laser may cause the print head  302  to heat up. Accordingly, in some examples, the print head  302  may include a heat dissipation unit, which is further described in  FIG. 24 .  FIG. 24  illustrates a schematic diagram of the print head  302  with the heat dissipation unit  2402 . The heat dissipation unit  2402  may be coupled to the top surface  2408  of the top chassis portion  126  of the print head  302 . In some examples, the heat dissipation unit  2402  may include a radiator section  2404  and a fan section  2406 . The radiator section  2404  may be coupled to the top surface and the fan section  2406  may be coupled to the radiator. When the heat dissipation unit  2402  is actuated, the heat dissipation unit  2402  may be configured to transfer heat from the print head  302  to the ambient around the print head  302 . In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the heat dissipation unit  2402  includes a fan section  2406 . In an example embodiment, the heat dissipation unit  2402  may be liquid cooled unit. In such an embodiment, the heat dissipation unit  2402  may include a pump (not shown) and a tank which is configured to store a fluid. The pump may be configured to pump liquid through the print head  302  and through the radiator, where the radiator may be configured to dissipate heat from the liquid to the ambient of the print head  302 . 
     Print Media 
     In some examples and in order to facilitate printing content on the print media  104  upon exposure of the writing laser beam, the print media  104  may be composed of chemical composition that is configured to react to one or more wavelengths produced by one or more lasers beams emanated from the one or more laser sources. In some examples, and in an instance, in which the writing laser beam is directed on the print media  104 , the exposure of the media to the writing laser beam causes a chemical reaction on the print media that facilitates a color change. Further, the print media  104  may have a protective layer which allows the printing apparatus  100  to authenticate the print media  104  prior to printing content on the print media  104 . 
     In some examples, when the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam impinge on the print media  104 , a color of the print media  104  may change. The changed color corresponds to the printed content. In some examples, the composition of the print media  104  may enable such color change (upon impinging the of the writing laser beam and the preheating laser beam on the print media  104 ). The composition of the print media  104  is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 25A . 
       FIG. 25A  illustrates the composition of the print media  104 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. In an example embodiment, the print media  104  includes a substrate  2502 , a reactive layer  2504 , and a protective layer  2506 . In an example embodiment, the substrate  2502  may correspond to a paper layer on which the content is printed. The term “substrate” refers to a fibrous web that may be formed, created, produced, etc., from a mixture, etc., comprising paper fibers, internal paper sizing agents, etc., plus any other optional papermaking additives such as, for example, fillers, wet-strength agents, optical brightening agents (or fluorescent whitening agent), etc. The substrate may be in the form of a continuous roll, a discrete sheet, etc. In some examples, the ink or other content writing materials may be disposed on the substrate  2502  to print content on the substrate  2502 . 
     In some examples, the reactive layer  2504  may be disposed on the substrate  2502 . In some examples, the reactive layer  2504  may have a chemical composition that allows the reactive layer  2504  to change color when the reactive layer  2504  is exposed to the writing laser beam of a first predetermined wavelength. For example, the reactive layer  2504  may change color when the reactive layer  2504  is exposed to the writing laser beam having the predetermined wavelength of 500 nm. In an example embodiment, the changed color corresponds to the printed content. In some examples, the chemical composition of the reactive layer  2504  may be selected from a group consisting of leucodyes, diacetylenes, and ammonium octamolybdate. However, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the reactive layer  2504  having the aforementioned chemical composition. In an example embodiment, the reactive layer  2504  may have other chemical compositions that may enable the reactive layer  2504  to change color upon exposure to a writing laser beam of the first predetermined wavelength. 
     In some examples, the protective layer  2506  may be disposed on the reactive layer  2504 . In some examples, the protective layer  2506  may correspond to a photochromic layer that may be opaque to the writing laser beam having the first predetermined wavelength. Further, the protective layer  2506  may allow the writing laser beam having first predetermined wavelength to pass through while the protective layer  2506  is exposed to a preheating laser beam of a second predetermined wavelength. Exposure of the protective layer  2506  to the preheating laser beam of the second predetermined wavelength, causes the protective layer  2506  to undergo a photochromic process. Such a photochromatic process causes the protective layer to allow the writing laser beam of the first predetermined wavelength to pass through. To this end, the reactive layer  2504  gets exposed to the writing laser beam, thereby, causing the reactive layer  2504  to change color. In some examples, the second predetermined wavelength may vary in a range between 200 nm to 400 nm. 
     In some examples, the protective layer  2506  may be opaque to the writing laser beam having a first predetermined wavelength when the protective layer  2506  is not exposed to the preheating laser beam of the second predetermined wavelength. In some examples, the protective layer  2506  may undergo a reverse photochromatic process, when the protective layer  2506  is not exposed to the preheating laser beam of the second predetermined wavelength. For example, the protective layer  2506  may undergo a reverse photochromatic process in response to the protective layer  2506  not being exposed to the preheating laser beam of the second predetermined wavelength. Such process causes the protective layer  2506  to block the writing laser beam having the first predetermined wavelength. In some examples, no additional exposure of the protective layer  2506  is required to cause the protective layer  2506  to undergo reverse photochromatic process. 
     Some examples of the protective layer  2506  may have a chemical composition that may be selected from a group consisting of enaminoketone with Li+ in acetonitrile, biphotochromic molecule composed of two fast negative photochromic phenoxyl-imidazolyl radical. For the purpose of ongoing description, the protective layer  2506  is considered to be composed of two fast negative photochromic phenoxyl-imidazolyl radicals. The following chemical equation illustrates the example photochromatic process (when the protective layer  2506  is exposed to the preheating laser beam) and the example reverse photochromatic process (when the protective layer  2506  is not exposed to the preheating laser beam): 
     Referring now to  FIG. 25B , an equation  2500  (i.e., Equation 1) depicting chemical processes according to one or more embodiments described herein is provided. As illustrated in  FIG. 25B , the binaphthyl-bridged phenoxyl-imidazolyl radical complex (BN-PIC) shows reverse photochromism in which the most thermally-stable colored form (C) photochemically isomerizes to the metastable colorless form (CL) via short-lived biradical species upon irradiation using the preheating laser beam. The CL form shows a rapid thermal back reaction to the initial C form when preheating laser beam exposure is removed. 
     Additionally, or alternately, as depicted in  FIG. 25A , the protective layer  2506  may include an Ultraviolet (UV) dye. The UV dye may be configured to validate authenticity of the print media  104 . For example, when the print media is illuminated with the UV radiation, the light may get reflected from the print media  104  surface. The reflected light may be detected by a photo detector that may generate a fifth signal. Based on the fifth signal, the print media  104  may be authenticated. 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the print media  104  having three layers. In some examples, the print media  104  may include a binder layer. The binder layer may correspond to an adhesive layer that may be configured to bind the substrate  2502  with the reactive layer  2504  and the protective layer  2506 . 
     The process of printing content on the print media  104  is further illustrated in  FIG. 26 .  FIG. 26  is a schematic diagram  2600  illustrating printing of the content on the print media  104 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     The schematic diagram  2600  illustrates the print media  104  that may traverse along the print path (depicted by  2602 ). The schematic diagram  2600  further illustrates one or more laser sources  2102 . The laser source  2102   a  is configured to generate the writing laser beam (depicted by  2604 ), while the laser source  2102   b  is configured to generate the preheating laser beam ( 2606 ). In some examples, the preheating laser beam  2606  is configured to illuminate a portion of the print media  104  (as is depicted by  2608 ). Illumination of the portion of the print media  104  causes the protective layer  2506  (within the portion  2608  of the print media  104 ) to undergo photochromatic process, thereby allowing the writing laser beam  2604  of the first predetermined wavelength to pass through. Accordingly, when the writing laser beam (depicted by  2604 ) of the first predetermined wavelength is directed onto the print media  104 , the writing laser beam (depicted by  2604 ) passes through the protective layer  2506  onto the reactive layer  2504 . The writing laser beam (depicted by  2604 ) causes the reactive layer  2504  to change color. As the print media  104  traverses along the print path (depicted by  2604 ), the portion of the print media  104  (depicted by  2608 ) moves along the print path (depicted by  2602 ). Accordingly, the portion of the print media  104  (depicted by  2608 ) gets unexposed from the preheating laser beam  2606 . This causes the protective layer  2506  to undergo reverse photochromatic process. Thus, the protective layer  2506  blocks the writing laser beam  2604 . 
     Printer System 
       FIG. 27  illustrates a block diagram of the control unit  138 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. In an example embodiment, the control unit  138  includes a processor  2702 , a memory device  2704 , and an Input/Output (I/O) device interface unit  2706 , a media characteristic determination unit  2710 , a media flattening unit  2712 , a media speed determination unit  2714 , a printing operation control unit  2716 , an image processing unit  2718 , a clock signal generation unit  2720 , a print head synchronization unit  2722 , and a data synchronization unit  2724 . 
     The processor  2702  may be embodied as means including one or more microprocessors with accompanying digital signal processor(s), one or more processor(s) without an accompanying digital signal processor, one or more coprocessors, one or more multi-core processors, one or more controllers, processing circuitry, one or more computers, various other processing elements including integrated circuits such as, for example, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) or field programmable gate array (FPGA), or some combination thereof. Accordingly, although illustrated in  FIG. 27  as a single processor, in an embodiment, the processor  2702  may include a plurality of processors and signal processing modules. The plurality of processors may be embodied on a single electronic device or may be distributed across a plurality of electronic devices collectively configured to function as the circuitry of the printing apparatus  100 . The plurality of processors may be in operative communication with each other and may be collectively configured to perform one or more functionalities of the circuitry of the printing apparatus  100 , as described herein. In an example embodiment, the processor  2702  may be configured to execute instructions stored in the memory device  2704  or otherwise accessible to the processor  2702 . These instructions, when executed by the processor  2702 , may cause the circuitry of the printing apparatus  100  to perform one or more of the functionalities as described herein. 
     Whether configured by hardware, firmware/software methods, or by a combination thereof, the processor  2702  may include an entity capable of performing operations according to embodiments of the present disclosure while configured accordingly. Thus, for example, when the processor  2702  is embodied as an ASIC, FPGA or the like, the processor  2702  may include specifically configured hardware for conducting one or more operations described herein. Alternatively, as another example, when the processor  2702  is embodied as an executor of instructions, such as may be stored in the memory device  2704 , the instructions may specifically configure the processor  2702  to perform one or more algorithms and operations described herein. 
     Thus, the processor  2702  used herein may refer to a programmable microprocessor, microcomputer or multiple processor chip or chips that can be configured by software instructions (applications) to perform a variety of functions, including the functions of the various embodiments described above. In some devices, multiple processors may be provided dedicated to wireless communication functions and one processor dedicated to running other applications. Software applications may be stored in the internal memory before they are accessed and loaded into the processors. The processors may include internal memory sufficient to store the application software instructions. In many devices, the internal memory may be a volatile or nonvolatile memory, such as flash memory, or a mixture of both. The memory can also be located internal to another computing resource (e.g., enabling computer readable instructions to be downloaded over the Internet or another wired or wireless connection). 
     The memory device  2704  may include suitable logic, circuitry, and/or interfaces that are adapted to store a set of instructions that is executable by the processor  2702  to perform predetermined operations. Some of the commonly known memory implementations include, but are not limited to, a hard disk, random access memory, cache memory, read only memory (ROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM) &amp; electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), flash memory, magnetic cassettes, magnetic tape, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, a compact disc read only memory (CD-ROM), digital versatile disc read only memory (DVD-ROM), an optical disc, circuitry configured to store information, or some combination thereof. In an example embodiment, the memory device  2704  may be integrated with the processor  2702  on a single chip, without departing from the scope of the disclosure. 
     The I/O device interface unit  2706  may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may be configured to communicate with the one or more components of the printing apparatus  100 , in accordance with one or more device communication protocols such as, without limitation, I2C communication protocol, Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) communication protocol, Serial communication protocol, Control Area Network (CAN) communication protocol, and 1-Wire® communication protocol. In an example embodiment, the I/O device interface unit  2706  may communicate with the first actuation unit  119 , the second actuation unit  136 , and the third actuation unit  504 . Some examples of the I/O device interface unit  2706  may include, but are not limited to, a Data Acquisition (DAQ) card, an electrical drives driver circuit, and/or the like. 
     The media characteristic determination unit  2710  may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may be configured to determine one or more print media characteristics. In some examples, the one or more print media characteristics may include, but are not limited to, a thickness of the print media  104 , a type of the print media  104  (e.g., a continuous media, gap media, black mark media, and/or the like), and/or the like. In an example embodiment, the media characteristic determination unit  2710  may receive an input from the operator of the printing apparatus  100  pertaining to a print media name, such as is further described with respect to  FIG. 28 . Based on the print media name, the media characteristic determination unit  2710  may determine the one or more one or more print media characteristics, as is further described in  FIG. 28 . In some examples, the media characteristic determination unit  2710  may directly receive the one or more print media characteristics from the operator of the printing apparatus  100 , as the input. The media characteristic determination unit  2710  may be implemented using Field Programmable Gate Array and/or Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), and/or the like. 
     The media flattening unit  2712  may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may be configured to determine a time period to stop/deactivate the first actuation unit  119 , as is further described in  FIG. 28 . The media flattening unit  2712  may be implemented using Field Programmable Gate Array and/or Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), and/or the like. 
     The media speed determination unit  2714  may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may be configured to determine media traversal speed of the print media  104 . In an example embodiment, the media speed determination unit  2714  may be configured to receive another input from the operator of the printing apparatus  100  pertaining to the speed at which the printing apparatus  100  is to be operated. Based on the speed at which the printing apparatus  100  is to be operated, the media speed determination unit  2714  may determine the media traversal speed. Additionally, or alternatively, the media speed determination unit  2714  may receive the input from the operator of the printing apparatus  100  pertaining to a measure of an expected print quality. Based on the measure of the expected print quality, the media speed determination unit  2714  may determine the media traversal speed, as is further described in  FIG. 28 . The media speed determination unit  2714  may be implemented using Field Programmable Gate Array and/or Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), and/or the like. 
     The printing operation control unit  2716  may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may enable the printing operation control unit  2716  to determine one or more print head parameters associated with the print head  302  to print content on the print media  104 . In an example embodiment, the one or more print head parameters associated with the print head  302  may include, but are not limited to, a location of the polygon mirror  2106 , a speed of the polygon mirror  2106 , a duty cycle of the writing laser beams, and/or the like. For example, the printing operation control unit  2716  may be configured to access or otherwise receive the one or more configuration settings of the printing apparatus  100 . In some examples, the configuration settings may take the form of registers (e.g., Print head control register, Print head DPI register, Image width register, Image length register, Print speed register, Print darkness and contrast register, Mirror overrun register, Print head status register, Print head self-check status register, Laser beam location register, Upper odometer register, Lower odometer register, Print head error register, etc.). Thereafter, the printing operation control unit  2716  may determine a rotational speed of the polygon mirror  2106  based on the one or more configuration settings, as is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 32 . In some examples, the printing operation control unit  2716  may be configured to determine a measure of skew that may get introduced in the printed content during printing of the content on the print media  104 , as is further described in  FIG. 34 . The printing operation control unit  2716  may be implemented using Field Programmable Gate Array and/or Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), and/or the like. 
     The image processing unit  2718  may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may enable the image processing unit  2718  to modify content (received for printing on the print media  104 ), as is further described in  FIG. 34 . For example, in some examples, the image processing unit  2718  may be configured to modify a skew of the content prior to printing the content on the print media  104 , as is further described in  FIG. 34 . In some examples, the image processing unit  2718  may utilize one or more known image processing techniques to modify the content. The image processing unit  2718  may be implemented using Field Programmable Gate Array and/or Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), and/or the like. 
     The clock signal generation unit  2720  may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may enable the clock signal generation unit  2720  to generate a clock signal. Further, the clock signal generation unit  2720  may be configured to transmit the clock signal to the print head  302 . In an example embodiment, the clock signal generation unit  2720  may utilize known methodologies such as, but not limited to, a Phase locked loop (PLL), a quartz, and/or the like to generate the clock signal. In some examples, the clock signal may have a predetermined frequency. In some examples, the clock signals may facilitate synchronization between the control unit  138  and the print head  308 . The clock signal generation unit  2720  may be implemented using Field Programmable Gate Array and/or Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), and/or the like. 
     In some examples, the print head synchronization unit  2722  may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may cause the print head synchronization unit  2722  to generate one or more signals based on the clock signal, the one or more signals are further described in conjunction with  FIGS. 41-47 . As discussed, the one or more signals may facilitate synchronization between the control unit  138  and the print head  302 . For example, based on the one or more signals, the print head  302  may be configured to control the speed of the polygon mirror  2106 . Similarly, based on the one or more signals, the print head  302  may control other operations of the print head  302 . The print head synchronization unit  2722  may be implemented using Field Programmable Gate Array and/or Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), and/or the like. 
     The data synchronization unit  2724  may include suitable logic and/or circuitry that may cause generation of one or more data signals. In an example embodiment, based on the one or more data signals the control unit  138  may transmit data such as data indicative of content to be printed, to the print head  302 . In some examples, the one or more data signals may include, but are not limited to, a frame sync signal (F-Sync), and a Line Sync (L-Sync) signal. In an example embodiment, the F-Sync signal may indicate to the print head  302  that control unit  138  is transmitting data to be printed on the label of the print media  104 . In an example embodiment, the L-Sync signal may indicate to the print head  302  that the control unit  138  is transmitting segmented data to be printed on the label of the print media  104 . 
     The data synchronization unit  2724  may be implemented using Field Programmable Gate Array and/or Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), and/or the like. 
     The operation of the control unit  138  is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 28 . 
     Method of Flattening Media 
       FIG. 28  illustrates a flowchart  2800  of a method for operating the printing apparatus  100 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     At step  2802 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the media characteristic determination unit  2710 , and/or the like for receiving an input of the print media name from the operator. In an example embodiment, the media characteristic determination unit  2710  may receive the input from the operator through the I/O device interface unit  2706 . For example, the I/O device interface unit  2706  may receive the input from the operator through the UI. Upon receiving the input, the I/O device interface unit  2706  may be configured to transmit the input to the media characteristic determination unit  2710 . 
     In an example embodiment, the input from the operator may include, but is not limited to, information pertaining to the print media name of the print media  104  loaded in the printing apparatus  100 . Some examples of the type of the media are illustrated below: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 3 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Print media name 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Duratherm Synthetic 
               
               
                 Duratherm II Floodcoated 
               
               
                 Duratherm III Receipt 
               
               
                 Duratherm II Gloss Polyester 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     At step  2804 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , media characteristic determination unit  2710 , and/or the like for determining the one or more print media characteristics based on the print media named in an example embodiment, the media characteristic determination unit  2710  by utilizing a first look-up table. The following table illustrates an example first lookup table: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 4 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 First look-up table including the one or more print media characteristics 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Name of print media 
                 Type of print media 104 
                 Print media thickness 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Duratherm Synthetic 
                 Continuous 
                 1  
                 mm 
               
               
                 Duratherm II Floodcoated 
                 Gap media 
                 0.5  
                 mm 
               
               
                 Duratherm III Receipt 
                 Black mark media 
                 0.25  
                 mm 
               
               
                 Duratherm II Gloss Polyester 
                 Continuous 
                 0.75  
                 mm 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     At step  2806 , the printing apparatus  100  includes the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the media speed determination unit  2714 , and/or the like for determining the media traversal speed. In an example embodiment, prior to determining the print media traversal speed, the media speed determination unit  2714  may be configured to receive another input pertaining to the speed at which the printing apparatus  100  is to be operated. Thereafter, the media speed determination unit  2714  may be configured to determine the media traversal speed by utilizing the second look-up table that includes the mapping between the media traversal speed and the speed at which the printing apparatus  100  is to be operated. The following table illustrates an example second look-up table: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 5 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Second look-up table illustrating the mapping between the speed at which 
               
               
                 the printing apparatus 100 is to be operated and the media traversal speed. 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Speed at which the printing  
                   
               
               
                 apparatus 100 is to be operated 
                 Media traversal speed (ips) 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 High 
                 5 ips 
               
               
                 Medium 
                 2 ips 
               
               
                 Low 
                 1 ips 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Additionally, or alternatively, the media speed determination unit  2714  may be configured to receive the input from the operator of the printing apparatus  100  pertaining to the expected print quality. In such an example implementation, the media speed determination unit  2714  may be configured to determine the media traversal speed by utilizing a third look-up table that includes the mapping between the expected print quality and the media traversal speed. The following table illustrates an example third look-up table: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 6 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Third look-up table illustrating the mapping between the measure 
               
               
                 of the expected print media quality and the media traversal speed. 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Expected print media quality 
                 Media traversal speed (ips) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 High 
                 1 ips 
               
               
                   
                 Medium 
                 2 ips 
               
               
                   
                 Low 
                 5 ips 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     At step  2808 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the media flattening unit  2712 , and/or the like for determining the time period after which the second roller  134  is to be halted based on the one or more print media characteristics and the media traversal speed. In some examples, the media flattening unit  2712  may utilize a fourth look-up table, which includes a mapping between the one or more print media characteristics, the media traversal speed, and the time period, to determine the time period. The following table illustrates the example fourth look-up table: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 7 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Fourth look-up table illustrating the mapping between the one or more print media 
               
               
                 characteristics, the media traversal speed, and the time period, to determine the time period. 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Print media thickness 
                 Media traversal speed 
                 Type of print media 
                 Time period (ms) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 1  
                 mm 
                 5 ips 
                 Continuous 
                 1  
                 ms 
               
               
                 0.5  
                 mm 
                 2 ips 
                 Gap media 
                 0.5  
                 ms 
               
               
                 0.25  
                 mm 
                 1 ips 
                 Black mark media 
                 2  
                 ms 
               
               
                 0.75  
                 mm 
                 5 ips 
                 Continuous 
                 1  
                 ms 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     At step  2810 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the media flattening unit  2712 , and/or the like for activating the first actuation unit  129  and the second actuation unit  136 . The activation of the first actuation unit  129  and the second actuation unit  136  causes the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  to rotate, respectively. The rotation of the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  causes the print media  104  to traverse along the print direction. 
     At step  2812 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the media flattening unit  2712 , and/or the like for deactivating the first actuation unit  129  at a first time instant. Deactivation of the first actuation unit  129  causes the first roller  132  to stop rotating. At step  2814 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the media flattening unit  2712 , and/or the like for determining whether the time period (determined in the step  2808 ) has elapsed since the first time instant. If the media flattening unit  2712  determines that the time period has elapsed, the media flattening unit  2712  may be configured to perform the step  2816 . However, if the media flattening unit  2712  determines that the time period has not elapsed, the media flattening unit  2712  may be configured to repeat the step  2814 . 
     At step  2816 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the media flattening unit  2712 , and/or the like for deactivating the second actuation unit  136  at a second time instant in response to the expiration of the time period. In an example embodiment, the second time instant corresponds to a time instant at which the time period expires. Deactivation of the second actuation unit  136  causes the second roller  134  to stop rotating. In an example embodiment, the second time instant is chronologically later than the first time instant. Further, a time difference between the first time instant and the second time instant is equivalent to the time period determined at step  2808 . Since the second actuation unit  136  is active after the deactivation of the first actuation unit  129 , the second roller  134  keeps rotating even after the first roller  132  stops rotating. Such scenario causes the second roller  134  to pull and stretch the print media  104 . Accordingly, the print media  104  flattens between the first roller  132  and the second roller  134 . 
     At step  2818 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , and/or the like for causing the print head engine  122  to print content on the print media  104 . 
       FIG. 29  illustrates a functional block diagram  2900  of the portion of the printing apparatus  100 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. The functional block diagram  2900  includes the first roller  132  and the second roller  134 , the print head engine  122 , the print media  104 , the first actuation unit  129 , the second actuation unit  136 , and the control unit  138 . 
     As depicted, the control unit  138  is coupled to the first actuation unit  129  and the second actuation unit  136 . Further, as depicted, the first actuation unit  129  and the second actuation unit  136  are coupled to the first roller  132  and the second roller  134 , respectively. 
     In an example embodiment, the control unit  138  transmits the deactivation signal to the first actuation unit  129  at the first time instant (T 1 ). Thereafter, the control unit  138  transmits the deactivation signal to the second actuation unit  136  at the second time instant (T 2 ). In an example embodiment, the second time instant (T 2 ) occurs chronologically after the first time instant (T 1 ). Therefore, the first roller  132  keeps rotating even after the one or more second rollers  134  stops rotating. Such scenario causes the first roller  132  to pull and stretch the print media  104 . Accordingly, the print media  104  flattens between the first roller  132  and the one or more second rollers  134 . 
       FIG. 30  illustrates a flowchart  3000  of a method for operating the printing apparatus  100 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     At step  3002 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , and/or the like, for causing the print media  104  to travel in a print direction along the print path. 
     At step  3004 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , and/or the like, for determining whether the print media  104  is positioned on the platform  1222 . In an example embodiment, the I/O device interface unit  2706  may rely on a media signal from a media sensor to determine the position of the print media on the platform  1222 . In some examples, the media sensor may include a light transmitter and a light receiver that may operate in conjunction to generate the media signal, which is deterministic of the position of the print media on the platform  1222 . In some examples, the media signal may be indicative of the position of the print media  104 . For example, the media sensor may be configured to generate media signal based on the transmissivity/reflectivity of the print media  104 , while the print media  104  travels along the print path. Sudden change in the transmissivity/reflectivity of the print media  104  may be indicative of a partition between the labels passing over the media sensor, as partitions between the labels in the print media  104  may be indicated by black dot marks or through perforations in the print media  104 . In some examples, when such sudden changes in the transmissivity/reflectivity in the print media  104  is identified by the processor  2702  in the media signal, the processor  2702  may determine that a label of the print media  104  is received and is positioned on the platform  1222 . In response to determining that the print media  104  is positioned on the platform  1222 , the processor  2702  may be configured to perform the step  3006 . However, if the processor  2702  determines that the print media  104  is not positioned on the platform  1222 , the processor  2702  may be configured to repeat the step  3004 . 
     At step  3006 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , and/or the like, for causing the travel of the print media  104  to halt. 
     At step  3008 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , and/or the like, for activating the vacuum generating unit  1602 . For example, the I/O device interface unit  2706  may activate the vacuum generating unit  1602  (e.g., fan). Activating the vacuum generating unit  1602  generates a negative pressure at the platform  1222  causing the print media  104  to stick to the platform  1222 . 
     At step  3010 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , and/or the like, for activating the fifth actuation unit  1412  that applies the external force on the frame  1216 . The external force on the frame  1216  causes the frame  1216  to traverse to the second position. As discussed above and in an instance in which the frame  126  is in the second position, the frame  1216  abuts the bottom chassis portion  128  of the print head engine  122 . As the print media  104  is positioned on the platform  1222  (defined on the bottom chassis portion  128 ), the frame  1216  may press on the print media  104 . More particularly, the frame  1216  may press the one or more edges of the print media  104  against the platform  1222 . Thus, combination of the vacuum (generated by the vacuum generating unit) and the frame  1216  flattens the print media  104 . In some examples, the steps  3008  and  3010  may be performed concurrently. 
     At step  3012 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , and/or the like, for causing the print head to print content on the flattened print media. 
     Thereafter, in some examples, after the content is printed, the processor  2702  may be configured to deactivate the fifth actuation unit  1412  and the vacuum generating unit  1602 . Accordingly, the external force acting on the frame  1216  is removed and the frame  1216  may traverse to the first position under the effect of the biasing force applied by the biasing member  1402 . Accordingly, the print media  104  may freely travel along the print path. 
       FIG. 31A  and  FIG. 31B  illustrate the positioning of the frame  1216  with respect to the print media  104 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. Referring to  FIG. 31 a   , the frame  1216  is in the first position, where the frame  1216  is positioned proximal to the top chassis portion  126 . Accordingly, the frame  1216  does not press the print media  104 , thus, allowing the print media  104  to freely travel along the print path. Referring to  FIG. 31B , the second actuation unit  136  (e.g., the electromagnet  1604 ) is activated. The electromagnet  1604  generates the external force that acts on the frame  1216  causing the frame  1216  to traverse to the second position. In the second position, the frame  1216  presses the one or more edges of the print media  104 , thus, flattening the print media  104 . When the electromagnets are deactivated, the biasing force applied by the biasing member  1402  causes the frame  1216  to traverse back to the first position. 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the biasing member  1402  applying the biasing force that causes the frame  1216  to be in the first position. In an example embodiment, the biasing member  1402  may apply the biasing force that causes the frame  1216  to be in the second position, where the frame  1216  presses the one or more edges of the print media  104 . In such an embodiment, the fifth actuation unit  1412  may be configured to apply the external force to cause the frame  1216  to traverse to the second position. For example, the electromagnet  1604  may apply a repulsive force on the frame  1216  causing the frame  1216  to traverse to the first position. 
     In yet another embodiment, the positioning of the biasing member  1402  and the electromagnets  1604  (i.e., the second actuation unit  136 ) may be swapped with each other. In such an embodiment, the biasing member  1402  may be coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128  and the electromagnets  1604  may be positioned in the top chassis portion  126 . Further, to this end, the frame  1216  may be coupled to the bottom chassis portion  128  through the biasing member  1402 . The biasing member  1402  may be configured to apply the biasing force on the frame causing the frame  1216  to be in the second position (i.e., pressing the one or more edges of the print media  104 ). When the electromagnets  1604  are activated, the external force is applied on the frame  1216  causing the frame  1216  to traverse to the first position. For example, the electromagnet  1604  may apply an attractive force on the frame  1216  causing the frame  1216  to traverse to the first position. 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited the traversal of the frame  1216  and the vacuum generating unit  1602  operating concurrently. In an example embodiment, both the traversal of the frame  1216  and the vacuum generating unit  1602  may operate independently. For example, in one embodiment, the traversal of the frame  1216  may be disabled and only vacuum generating unit  1602  may operate to flatten the print media. In another embodiment, the vacuum generating unit  1602  may be disabled and only the frame  1216  may be operated to flatten the print media  104 . 
     In some examples, printing apparatus  100  may receive a command or instruction, such through a configuration setting or a print job, to print at a particular resolution and/or at a particular print speed. In some examples, the command or instruction may cause a change to a different resolution or a different print speed than the resolution or print speed previously used. In such a scenario, the print head  302  may generate a plurality of laser beams that are capable of printing multiple lines in parallel. Varying the count of laser beams allows the printing apparatus  100  to print content at a variety of printing speeds. Additionally, or alternatively, multiple printing speeds may be achieved by varying rotation speed of optics, such as the polygon mirror  2106 . One such method of varying the count of laser beams and the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106  is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 32 . 
     In some examples, the control unit  138  may be configured to configure the print head  302  to operate in one or more modes. For example, the control unit  138  may be configured to receive one or more configuration settings based on which the control unit  138  may be configured to configure the print head  302 . Some examples of the one or more configuration settings include, but are not limited to, a resolution at which the print head  302  is to print content, a content width, a speed at which the content is to be printed, a contrast and/or darkness value at which the content is to be printed, a time duration for which the polygon mirror  2106  rotates at an unchanged rotation speed, a print head mode, a print head pressure, and/or the like. 
     In an example embodiment, the control unit  138  may be configured to set configuration values in the one or more configuration registers (in the memory device  2010  of the print head  302 ) based on the one or more configuration settings. In some examples, the control unit  138  may be configured to transmit the configuration values to the one or more configuration registers using one or more communication protocols such as, but not limited to, a serial peripheral interface (SPI), a serial bus, a parallel bus, and/or the like. To this end, each of the one or more configuration registers are stored at a determined memory location in the memory device  2010 . To set a configuration value in the configuration register (of the one or more configuration registers), the control unit  138  may be configured to address the location of the configuration register. Thereafter, the control unit  138  may be configured to transmit the configuration value to the configuration register. As discussed, the configuration value in the configuration register is deterministic, in some examples, of the one or more configuration settings according to which the print head  302  operates. 
     Thereafter, the control unit  138  may be configured to receive the data to be printed from a remote device. Further, the control unit  138  may be configured to transmit the data, to be printed on the print media  104 , to the print head  302  in accordance with one or more data signals. In some examples, the control unit  138  may be configured to generate the one or more data signals based on which the control unit  138  may be configured to transmit the data to the print head  138 . 
       FIG. 40  illustrates a flowchart  4000  of a method for configuring the print head  302 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     At step  4002 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , and/or the like, for receiving the one or more configuration settings from a remote computing device, from a user interface, from storage, and/or the like. As discussed, the one or more configuration settings may be deterministic of the mode of operation of the printing apparatus  100 . Some examples of the one or more configuration settings may include, but are not limited to, the resolution at which the print head  302  prints content, the content width, the print speed at which the content is to be printed, the contrast and darkness values based on which the content is to be printed, the time duration for which the polygon mirror  2106  is at an unchanged rotation speed, mode of operation of the print head  302 , pressure, and/or the like. 
     At step  4004 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , and/or the like, for storing the one or more configuration values to the one or more configuration registers. For example, the processor  2702  may be configured to cause the configuration value to be stored in the print head control register (stored in the memory devices  2010 ). The following table illustrates an example structure of the print head control register: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 8 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Print head control register 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 15 
                 Reserved for 
               
               
                   
                 14 
                 future use 
               
               
                   
                 13 
                 LPH_BUF_Data 
               
               
                   
                 12 
                   
               
               
                   
                 11 
                   
               
               
                   
                 10 
                 Media 
               
               
                   
                 9 
                 RESET 
               
               
                   
                 8 
                 PH_LP 
               
               
                   
                 7 
                 Reserved for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 future use 
               
               
                   
                 6 
                 Error_INT_EN 
               
               
                   
                 5 
                 Color 
               
               
                   
                 4 
                   
               
               
                   
                 3 
                 Reserved for 
               
               
                   
                 2 
                 future use 
               
               
                   
                 1 
                   
               
               
                   
                 0 
                 Raster mode/ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Vector mode 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     In an example embodiment, the print head control register is a 16-bit configuration register. Bit- 0  of the print head control register is deterministic of whether the print head  302  is to be operated in raster mode or in the vector mode. Bit- 1  to bit  3  are reserved for future configuration settings. 
     Bit  5  and bit  6  of the print head control register are deterministic of one or more color settings in which the print head  302  is to be operated. The following table illustrates examples of the one or more color settings: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 9 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Color settings 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Bit 5 
                 Bit 4 
                 Color setting 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 0 
                 0 
                 Black and White 
               
               
                 0 
                 1 
                 Grayscale 
               
               
                 1 
                 0 
                 Color 
               
               
                 1 
                 1 
                 Reserved for future 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Bit  6  of the print head control register is used to interrupt the print head  302  in an instance in which the control unit  138  encounters an error. Bit  7  of the print head control register is reserved for future. Bit  8  of the print head control register is utilized to configure a power mode of the print head  302 . Bit  9  of the print head control register is utilized to reset the print head  302 . Bit  10  of the print head control register is indicative of a type of print media  104  installed in the printing apparatus  100 . Bit  11  to bit  13  are indicative of a type of data received by the print head  302 . For example, values of the Bit  11  to bit  13  may be used indicate to the print head  302  that the data in data buffer corresponds to a new line to be printed on a label or media, to a new line to be printed on a new label or new media, to a new line to be printed irrespective of the label or media. Additionally or alternatively, based on the values of Bit  11  to bit  13 , the print head  302  may clear the data buffer. Further, bits  14 - 15  are reserved for future use. 
     In an example embodiment, the processor  2702  may be configured to transmit the configuration value or otherwise permit access to the print head control register based on the structure of the print head control register and the mode in which the print head  302  is to be configured. For example, if the print head  302  is to be configured to print color content, the processor  2702  may be configured to set bits  4 - 5  in the print head control register to “10”. Similarly, the processor  2702  may be configured to set/reset other bits of the print head control register in order to configure the mode of operation of the print head  302 . 
     In another example, the processor  2702  may receive the configuration setting that includes information pertaining to the resolution at which the printing apparatus  100  is to print content. In such an embodiment, the processor  2702  may be configured to transmit or otherwise make resolution configuration values available to the print head  302 . More particularly, the processor  2702  may be configured to cause the resolution configuration value to be stored in the print head DPI register. Prior to transmitting the resolution configuration value, the processor  2702  may be configured to determine the resolution configuration value based on the information pertaining to the resolution received in the one or more configuration settings and the structure of the print head DPI register. The following table illustrates the structure of an example print head DPI register: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 10 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Print head DPI register 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 15 
                 14 
                 13 
                 12 
                 11 
                 10 
                 9 
                 8 
                 7 
                 6 
                 5 
                 4 
                 3 
                 2 
                 1 
                 0 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 RFU 
                 resolution configuration value 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The example values in example bits  0 - 11  of the print head DPI register are configured to store or otherwise represent the resolution configuration value received from the processor  2702 . As discussed, based on the information pertaining to the resolution included in the one or more configuration settings, the processor  2702  may be configured to determine the resolution configuration value. In an example embodiment, the processor  2702  may be configured to use a look-up table, such as the following look-up table, to determine the resolution configuration value based on the information pertaining to the resolution included in one or more of the configuration settings: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 11 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Look-up table for determining resolution configuration value 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Resolution (included in the one  
                   
               
               
                 or more configuration settings) 
                 Resolution configuration value 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 203 DPI 
                  0 × 0 CB 
               
               
                 300 DPI 
                  0 × 12 C 
               
               
                 600 DPI 
                 0 × 258  
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     For example, in an instance in which the information pertaining to the resolution (included in the one or more configuration settings) is 300 DPI, the processor  2702  may determine the resolution configuration value as “0x12C”. To this end, the processor  2702  may be configured to cause the resolution configuration value “0x12C” to be stored on the print head DPI register. 
     In another example, the processor  2702  may receive a configuration setting that includes information pertaining to the print speed at which the printing apparatus  100  is to print content. In such an embodiment, the processor  2702  may be configured to cause a print speed configuration value to be transmitted or otherwise be made accessible to the print head  302 . More particularly, the processor  2702  may be configured to cause the print speed configuration value to be stored in a print speed register. Prior to transmitting the print speed configuration value, the processor  2702  may be configured to determine the print speed configuration value based on the information pertaining to the print speed received in the one or more configuration settings and a structure of the print speed register. The following table illustrates an example structure of the print speed register: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 12 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Print speed register 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 15 
                 14 
                 13 
                 12 
                 11 
                 10 
                 9 
                 8 
                 7 
                 6 
                 5 
                 4 
                 3 
                 2 
                 1 
                 0 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 RFU 
                 Print speed configuration value 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The values in the Bits  0 - 8  of the example print speed register are configured to store the print speed configuration value received from the processor  2702 . As discussed, based on the information pertaining to the print speed included in the one or more configuration settings, the processor  2702  may be configured to determine the print speed configuration value. In an example embodiment, the processor  2702  may be configured to use a lookup table, such as the following look-up table, to determine the print speed configuration value based on the information pertaining to the print speed included in one or more of the configuration settings: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 13 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Look-up table to determined print speed configuration value 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Print Speed (included in the one 
                   
               
               
                   
                 or more configuration settings) 
                 Configuration value 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   0 mm/s 
                 “000000000” 
               
               
                   
                 100 mm/s 
                 “001100100” 
               
               
                   
                 150 mm/s 
                 “010010110” 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     For example, in an instance in which the information pertaining to the print speed (included in the one or more configuration settings) is 100 mm/s, the processor  2702  may determine the configuration value as “001100100”. To this end, the processor  2702  may be configured to cause the configuration value “001100100” to be stored in the print speed register. In another example, the processor  2702  may be configured to directly convert the print speed (obtained from the one or more configuration settings) to a print speed configuration value. For example, the processor  2702  may be configured to convert the print speed to a binary number, where the binary number corresponds to or otherwise represents the configuration value. For example, processor  2702  may convert the print speed of 200 mm/s to “011001000”, where the value “011001000” corresponds to or otherwise represents the configuration value to be stored on the print speed register. 
     In another example, the processor  2702  may receive a configuration setting that includes information pertaining to darkness and/or contrast settings at which the printing apparatus  100  is to print content. In such an embodiment, the processor  2702  may be configured to transmit or otherwise make darkness and/or contrast configuration values available to the print head  302 . More particularly, the processor  2702  may be configured to cause the darkness and/or contrast configuration values to be stored in a darkness and contrast register. Prior to transmitting the darkness and/or contrast configuration value, the processor  2702  may be configured to determine the darkness and/or contrast configuration value based on the information pertaining to the darkness and/or contrast settings received in the one or more configuration settings and the structure of the darkness and/or contrast register. The following table illustrates the example structure of the darkness and/or contrast register: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 14 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Darkness and/or contrast register 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 15 
                 14 
                 13 
                 12 
                 11 
                 10 
                 9 
                 8 
                 7 
                 6 
                 5 
                 4 
                 3 
                 2 
                 1 
                 0 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Contrast configuration value 
                 Darkness configuration value 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The example values in the bits  0 - 7  of the darkness and/or contrast register are configured to store or otherwise represent a darkness configuration value. Further, values in the bits  8 - 15  of the darkness and/or contrast register are configured to store or otherwise represent a contrast configuration value. As discussed, based on the information pertaining to the darkness and/or contrast settings included in the one or more configuration settings, the processor  2702  may be configured to determine the darkness and/or contrast configuration value. In an example embodiment, the processor  2702  may be configured to use a look-up table, such as the following look-up table, to determine the darkness and/or contrast configuration value based on the information pertaining to the darkness and/or contrast settings included in one or of more the configuration settings: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 15 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Look-up table to determine the darkness and/or contrast configuration value 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Darkness settings 
                 Configuration value 
                 Contrast settings 
                 Configuration value 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 100% 
                 “0 × 64” 
                 100% 
                 “0 × 64” 
               
               
                   0% 
                  “0 × 9C” 
                   0% 
                  “0 × 9C” 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     For example, in an instance in which the information pertaining to the darkness setting (included in the one or more configuration settings) is 100%, the processor  2702  may determine the configuration value as “0x64”. To this end, the processor  2702  may be configured to cause the configuration value “0x64” to be stored in the darkness and/or contrast register. 
     In another example, the processor  2702  may receive the configuration setting that includes information pertaining to the polygon mirror rotation timeout. The polygon mirror rotation timeout corresponds, in some examples, to a time duration after which the polygon mirror  2106  stops rotating or is caused to reduce rotation speed in an instance in which no new print job/data is received or otherwise detected by the print head  302 . In such an embodiment, the processor  2702  may be configured to transmit or otherwise make the rotation speed configuration value available to the print head  302 . More particularly, the processor  2702  may be configured to cause the rotation speed configuration values to be stored in the mirror overrun register. Prior to transmitting the rotation speed configuration value, the processor  2702  may be configured to determine the rotation speed configuration value based on the information pertaining to the polygon mirror rotation timeout received in the one or more configuration settings and the structure of the mirror overrun register. The following table illustrates an example structure of the mirror overrun register: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 16 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Mirror overrun register 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 15 
                 14 
                 13 
                 12 
                 11 
                 10 
                 9 
                 8 
                 7 
                 6 
                 5 
                 4 
                 3 
                 2 
                 1 
                 0 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Rotation speed configuration value 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The example values in the bits  0 - 15  of the mirror overrun register are configured to store or otherwise represent the rotation speed configuration value. As discussed, based on the information pertaining to the polygon mirror rotation timeout included in the one or more configuration settings, the processor  2702  may be configured to determine the rotation speed configuration value. In an example embodiment, the processor  2702  may be configured to use a look-up table, such as the following look-up table, to determine the rotation speed configuration value based on the information pertaining to the polygon mirror rotation timeout included in one or more of the configuration settings: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 17 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 look-up table to determine the rotation speed configuration value 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Polygon mirror rotation 
                 Rotation speed 
               
               
                   
                 timeout 
                 configuration value 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 120 seconds 
                 0 × 78  
               
               
                   
                 Infinite seconds 
                   0 × FFFF 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     For example, in an instance in which the information pertaining to the polygon mirror rotation timeout (included in the one or more configuration settings) is 120 seconds, the processor  2702  may determine the configuration value as “0x78”. To this end, the processor  2702  may be configured to store the configuration value “0x78” in the mirror overrun register. 
     Similarly, the processor  2702  may be configured to transmit other configuration values to the other configuration registers based on respective look-up tables, predetermined values, default settings, and/or the like. In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to determining the configuration value based on the respective look-up tables. In an example embodiment, the processor  2702  may determine the configuration value directly from the one or more configuration settings. Further, in some examples, the configuration values depicted in look-up tables (i.e., tables 11, 13, 15, and 17) are example values and the scope of the disclosure is not limited to depicted configuration values. 
     In some examples, based on the configuration values in the one or more configuration registers, the print head  302  may print content on the print media  104 . For example, based on the darkness configuration value, the print head  302  may be configured to print dark content on the print media  104 . In another example, the print head  302  may be configured to determine the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106  based on the one or more configuration values stored in the one or more configuration register. 
     In some examples, multiple writing laser beams are used to print content on the print media. Using multiple writing laser beams may enable the printing apparatus  100  to operate and/or support multiple print resolutions at multiple print speeds. Further, the printing apparatus  100  may modify the count of writing laser beams to achieve different resolutions and different print speeds. One such method of printing content using multiple wiring laser beams is described in conjunction with  FIG. 32 . 
     In some examples, multiple writing laser beams are used to print content on the print media. Using multiple writing laser beams may enable the printing apparatus  100  to operate and/or support multiple print resolutions at multiple print speeds. Further, the printing apparatus  100  may modify the count of writing laser beams to achieve different resolutions and different print speeds. One such method of printing content using multiple wiring laser beams is described in conjunction with  FIG. 32 . 
       FIG. 32  illustrates a flowchart  3200  of a method for printing content in the print media  104 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     At step  3202 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , and/or the like, for receiving the one or more configurations settings associated with the printing apparatus  100 . In an example embodiment, the I/O device interface unit  2706  may receive the one or more configuration settings associated with the printing apparatus  100  through the UI  140 . In some examples, as discussed, the one or more configuration settings may include the print resolution at which the content is to be printed on the print media  104 , and the speed at which the print media  104  is to be traversed along the print path. For example, the I/O device interface unit  2706  may receive the one or more configuration settings as 600 DPI (dots per inch) at 6 IPS (inches per second). In some examples, the 600 DPI corresponds to the print resolution at which the content is to be printed on the print media  104 . Further, 6 IPS corresponds to the speed at which the print media  104  is to be traversed along the print path. Additionally, the one or more configuration settings may include information pertaining to the count of writing laser beams to be used to write content on the print media  104 . For example, the one or more configuration settings may state that the count of writing laser beams to write content is three. 
     At step  3204 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the printing operation control unit  2716 , and/or the like, for determining one or more print head parameters based on the one or more configuration parameters. For example, the printing operation control unit  2716  may determine the rotation speed at which the polygon mirror  2106  rotates. In some examples, the printing operation control unit  2716  may be configured to determine the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106  based on the one or more configuration settings (resolution and media traversal speed). In some examples, the printing operation control unit  2716  may be configured to utilize the following equation to determine the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106 . 
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   ω 
                   = 
                   
                     
                       
                         
                           r 
                           p 
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         
                           D 
                           r 
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         
                           v 
                           ⁡ 
                           
                             ( 
                             
                               1 
                               + 
                               
                                 N 
                                 S 
                               
                             
                             ) 
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         Nn 
                         L 
                       
                     
                     × 
                     60 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     rpm 
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   ( 
                   2 
                   ) 
                 
               
             
           
         
       
     
     Where, 
     D r =r L /r p ;
 
ω=rotation speed of the polygon mirror;
 
r p =print resolution;
 
r L =writing laser beam resolution;
 
D r =Data redundancy (the number of adjacent laser lines utilized to print the same content);
 
v=Speed at which the print media  104  traverses;
 
n L =Count of writing laser beams utilized to write content on print media  104 ;
 
N=number of polygon faces; and
 
N S =number of faces to skip after each scanning face.
 
Equation 2 presumes that adjacent printed lines are spaced apart from each other by the writing laser beam resolution.
 
     Considering that the media traversal speed is 6 IPS, the print resolution is 600 DPI, and writing laser beam resolution is 600 DPI, the printing operation control unit  2716  may be configured to determine the data redundancy as 1. Accordingly, the printing operation control unit  2716  may determine that three writing laser beams are configured to simultaneously print separate content on the print media  104 . Additionally, considering that none of the faces polygon mirror  2106  are to be skipped while printing the content (i.e. all eight faces of the polygon mirror  2106  are used to print content), based on equation 2, the printing operation control unit  2716  may determine the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106  as 9000 rpm. 
     At step  3206 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the printing operation control unit  2716 , and/or the like, for causing the one or more laser sources  2102  to generate the writing laser beams (depicted by  2604 ) and the pre-energizing laser beam (depicted by  2606 ), while the polygon mirror  2106  rotates at the determined rotation speed. In some examples, the one or more laser sources  2102  may be configured to generate the three writing laser beams having predetermined laser resolution. For example, the one or more laser sources  2102  may be configured to generate the three writing laser beams having the print resolution of 600 DPI. 
     Since the polygon mirror  2106  rotates at 9000 rpm and the three writing laser beams have the laser resolution of 600 dpi, the print resolution of 600 DPI and the printing speed of 6 IPS is achieved. In some examples, to modify the print resolution of the printed content and the print media traversal speed without modifying the polygon rotation speed, the multiple writing laser beams may be configured to write the same content on the print media  104 . For example, to achieve the resolution of 200 DPI at the media traversal speed of 6 IPS, the printing operation control unit  2716  may be configured to determine the data redundancy as 3. Accordingly, the printing operation control unit  2716  may determine that the three writing laser beams may be configured to simultaneously write the same content on the print media  104 . To this end, when the polygon mirror  2106  rotates at 9000 rpm and the three writing laser beams are configured to write the same content, a resolution of 200 DPI at 6 IPS is achieved. 
     In another example, to achieve the print resolution of 600 DPI and the print speed of 12 IPS, the printing operation control unit  2716  may be configured to determine the polygon mirror  2106  as 18000 rpm. Accordingly, when the polygon mirror  2106  rotates at 18000 rpm and the three writing laser beams are configured to write content on the print media  104 , the print resolution of 600 dpi at 12 IPS is achieved. To modify the print resolution at the same print speed, printing operation control unit  2716  may be configured to modify the data redundancy. As discussed, data redundancy may be deterministic of a count of writing laser beams used to write the same content on the print media  104 . For example, to achieve the print resolution of the 200 DPI at the same print speed 12 IPS, the printing operation control unit  2716  may be configured to modify the data redundancy as 3. Accordingly, the three writing laser beams may be configured to write the same content on the print media  104 . 
     In some examples, during the configuration of the printing apparatus, the polygon mirror speed and the count of the writing laser beams to be used corresponding to the various print speeds and the resolution are pre-stored in the memory of the printing apparatus  100 . In an alternative embodiment, the polygon mirror speed and the count of the writing laser beams may be prestored in the memory of the print head. 
     In an additional embodiment, to achieve the resolution of 300 DPI at the media traversal speed of 10 IPS, the printing operation control unit  2716  may be configured to determine the data redundancy as 2. Accordingly, the printing operation control unit  2716  may determine that the two writing laser beams may be configured to simultaneously write the same content on the print media  104 . Further, the third writing laser beam may be configured to write a different content in the print media. To this end, the printing operation control unit  2716  may determine that the rotation speed of the polygon mirror is 15000 rpm. Therefore, to achieve the print resolution of 300 DPI at 10 IPS, the printing operation control unit  2716  may be configured to rotate the polygon mirror at 15000 rpm. Further, the printing operation control unit  2716  may be configured to cause two writing laser beams to print the same content on the print media  104 . 
     Similarly, printing operation control unit  716  may be configured to modify one or more of the print head parameters to achieve different print resolutions and print speed. 
       FIG. 33  illustrates another method  3300  for printing content on the print media  104 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. At step  3302 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , and/or the like, for receiving the one or more configuration settings associated with the printing apparatus  100 . At step  3304 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the printing operation control unit  2716 , and/or the like for determining one or more print head parameters based on the one or more configuration settings. At step  3306 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the printing operation control unit  2716 , and/or the like for causing the one or more laser sources  2102  to generate the writing laser beams (depicted by  2604 ) and the pre-energizing laser beam (depicted by  2606 ), while the polygon mirror  2106  rotates at the determined rotation speed. Additionally, or alternatively, the printing operation control unit  2716  may be configured to control activation and/or deactivation of the one or more laser sources based on the faces of the polygon mirror  2106  to be skipped (determined from equation 2). In some examples, a single laser source  2102  may be used to generate the writing laser beam (depicted by  2604 ) and the pre-energizing laser beam (depicted by  2606 ), while the polygon mirror  2106  rotates at the determined rotation speed. 
       FIG. 41  illustrates a flowchart  4100  of a method of synchronization between the print head  302  and the control unit  138 . 
     At step  4102 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the laser subsystem control unit  2014 , the SOL detector  2004 , and/or the like, for determining a current rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106 . As discussed, the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106  is modified based on the one or more configuration settings. For example, the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106  is modified based on the print resolution and the print speed determined, as is described in  FIG. 32  and  FIG. 33 . Further,  FIG. 32  and  FIG. 33  describe an example method for modifying the rotation speed of the polygon mirror that could occur in advance of or simultaneously with the steps of  FIG. 41 . 
     To this end, in an example embodiment, the controller  2008  may be configured to determine the current rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106  based on one or more signal parameters associated with the SOL signal received from the SOL detector  2004 . As discussed, the SOL detector  2004  may be configured to generate a pulse when the SOL detector  2004  receives the writing laser beam. The pulse corresponds to the SOL signal. Further, as discussed, the SOL detector  2004  receives reflected the writing laser beam for each face of the polygon mirror  2106 , as the polygon mirror  2106  rotates. Accordingly, based on the frequency of the SOL signal, the controller  2008  may be configured to determine the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106 . In an example embodiment, the controller  2008  may be configured to utilize the following equation to determine the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106 : 
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   ω 
                   = 
                   
                     Nr 
                     Nf 
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   ( 
                   3 
                   ) 
                 
               
             
           
         
       
     
     Where, 
     Nr=Number of pulses received from SOL detector  2004  in a minute; and
 
Nf=Number of faces in the polygon mirror  2106 .
 
     At step  4104 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , and/or the like, for determining whether the current rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106  is the same speed as the rotation speed of polygon mirror  2106  at which the print head  302  is to print content (determined in the flowchart  3200  and  3300 ). In an instance in which the controller  2008  determines that the current rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106  is the same as the rotation speed of polygon mirror  2106  at which the print head  302  is to print content, the controller  2008  performs the step  4106 . However, in an instance in which the controller  2008  determines the current rotation speed is not the same as the rotation speed of polygon mirror  2106  at which the print head  302  has to print content, the controller  2008  may be configured to repeat the step  4102 . 
     At step  4106 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the synchronization unit  2016 , and/or the like, for generating a Laser print head ready (LPH_RDY_N) signal and transmitting the LPH_RDY_N signal to control unit  138 . More particularly, the synchronization unit  2016  may be configured to modify the state of the LPH_RDY_N pin on the print head interface. For example, the synchronization unit  2016  may be configured to modify the state of the pin LPH_RDY_N to “0”. 
     At step  4108 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the synchronization unit  2016 , and/or the like, for determining whether the SOL signal has been received from the SOL detector  2004 . As discussed, the writing laser may sweep across one face of the polygon mirror  2106  (as the polygon mirror  2106  rotates) to print one line on the print media  104 . Further, as discussed, the writing laser beam is directed to the SOL detector  2004  in an instance in which a location of the writing laser beam transitions between two faces of the polygon mirror  2106 . Therefore, SOL signal is indicative of an instance in which the print head  302  is ready to print a new line on the print media  104 . If the synchronization unit  2016  determines that the SOL signal is received, the synchronization unit may be configured to perform the step  4109 . However, if the synchronization unit  2016  determines that the SOL signal is not received, the synchronization unit  2016  may be configured to repeat the step  4110  until the SOL signal is received. 
     At step  4110 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the synchronization unit  2016 , and/or the like, for generating a Laser position (Laser_POS) signal. In an example embodiment, the synchronization unit  2016  may be configured to modify the state of the Laser_POS pin in the print head interface to indicate the generation of the Laser_POS signal. For example, the synchronization unit  2016  may change the state of Laser_POS signal to “1”. In some examples, the state “1” of the Laser_POS signal may indicate that the writing laser beam is at a blanking location on the face of the polygon mirror  2106 . That is, and in some examples, the writing laser beam may reflect from the blanking location (on the face of the polygon mirror  2106 ) to a location other than the print media  104 . In some examples, as the polygon mirror  2106  rotates, the angle of incidence of the writing laser beam changes. Therefore, the writing laser beam may sweep in accordance with the angle of incidence of the writing laser beam on the polygon mirror  2106 . Further, the angle of incidence is determined based on the location on the polygon mirror from where the writing laser beam reflects. As the polygon mirror rotates, the location from where the writing laser beam reflects changes. Accordingly, the blanking locations and non-blanking locations on the polygon mirror  2106  are defined. For example, the writing laser beam may be reflected from the blanking location to the SOL detector  2004 . Accordingly, no content is printed, while the writing laser beam reflects from the blanking location on the face of the polygon mirror  2106 . In some examples, the face of the polygon mirror  2106  may include multiple blanking locations. Further, a time duration during which the writing laser beam reflects from the multiple blanking locations corresponds to blanking time period. During blanking time period, no content is printed on the print media  104  (since the writing laser beam is not directed on the print media  104 ). In some examples, the blanking period may indicate that the print head  302  is ready to print content on the print media  104 . In some examples, the blanking time period is determined from the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106 . For instance, and in some examples, the blanking time period is inversely proportional to the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106 . 
     In an example embodiment, the locations on the polygon mirror  2106  that facilitate reflection of the writing laser beam on the print media  104  correspond to non-blanking locations. Further, a time duration during which the writing laser beam reflects from the non-blanking locations corresponds to the non-blanking time period. During the non-blanking time period, content is printed on the print media  104  (since the writing laser beam is directed on the print media  104 ). 
     At step  4112 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the synchronization unit  2016 , and/or the like, for determining whether a ready to print (RDY2PRINT) signal from the control unit  138  is received, in response to change in the state of the Laser_POS signal. In an example embodiment, the RDY2PRINT signal indicates that the control unit  138  has traversed the print media  104  by a single line. In an example embodiment, the size of the single line is deterministic based on the resolution at which the printing apparatus  100  is to print content on the print media  104 . For example, if the resolution is 600 dpi, the size of the single line is 0.01667 inches. Accordingly, the control unit  138  may be configured to traverse the print media  104  by 0.01667 inches. Thereafter, the control unit  138  may be configured to generate and transmit (or otherwise indicate) the RDY2PRINT signal to the print head  302 . Additionally, or alternatively, the control unit  138  may be configured to modify the state of the RDY2PRINT pin on the print head interface. 
     The synchronization unit  2016  may, in some examples, be configured to read the RDY2PRINT pin. Reading the RDY2PRINT pin corresponds to receiving the RDY2PRINT signal. If the synchronization unit  2016  determines that RDY2PRINT is received, the synchronization unit  2016  may be configured to perform the step  4114 . However, if the synchronization unit  2016  determines that it has not received the RDY2PRINT signal, the synchronization unit  2016  may be configured to repeat the step  4112  until the RDY2PRINT signal is received. 
     At step  4114 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the synchronization unit  2016 , and/or the like, for determining whether the blanking period has expired. If the synchronization unit  2016  determines that the blanking period has expired, the synchronization unit  2016  may be configured to perform the step  4116 . However, if the synchronization unit  2016  determines that blanking period has not expired, the synchronization unit  2016  may be configured to repeat the step  4114  until the blanking period expires. 
     At step  4116 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the synchronization unit  2016 , and/or the like, for modifying the state of Laser_POS signal to “0”. State “0” of the Laser_POS signal is indicative of the start of the non-blanking period. 
     At step  4116 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the synchronization unit  2016 , and/or the like, for modifying the state of Laser Print (Laser_print) signal to “1” in response to the modification of the LASER_POS signal to state “0”. State “1” of the Laser_print signal indicates that the content is being printed on the print media  104  using the writing laser beam. 
       FIG. 42  illustrates a flowchart  4200  of another method of synchronization between the print head  302  and the control unit  138 . 
     At step  4202 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the print head synchronization unit  2722 , and/or the like, for determining whether the LPH_RDY_N signal from the print head  302  is received. In an example embodiment, the LPH_RDY_N signal indicates that polygon mirror  2106  is rotating at the determined rotation speed. For example, the print head synchronization unit  2722  may be configured to receive the state “0” of the LPH_RDY_N signal. As discussed, the state “0” of the LPH_RDY_N signal indicates that the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106  has reached the determined rotation speed, such as the rotation speed determined in  FIGS. 32 and 33 . If the print head synchronization unit  2722  determines that the LPH_RDY_N is not received, the print head synchronization unit  2722  may be configured to repeat the step  4202  until LPH_RDY_N is received. However, if the print head synchronization unit  2722  determines that the LPH_RDY_N is received, the print head synchronization unit  2722  may be configured to perform the step  4204 . 
     At step  4204 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the print head synchronization unit  2722 , and/or the like, for receiving the LASER_POS signal from the print head  302 . In an example embodiment, the LASER_POS signal indicates the start of the blanking period. For instance, the print head synchronization unit  2722  may be configured to receive the state “1” of the LASER_POS signal indicating the start of the blanking period. 
     At step  4206 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the print head synchronization unit  2722 , the I/O device interface unit  2706  and/or the like, for causing the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  to cause the print media  104  to traverse by one line, in response to receiving the state “0” of the LPH_RDY_N signal and the state “1” of the LASER_POS signal. More particularly, the I/O device interface unit  2706  may cause the first roller  132  and the second roller  134  to move the print media  104  by a distance determined based on the print resolution (as discussed in the step  4108 ). 
     At step  4208 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the print head synchronization unit  2722 , and/or the like, for transmitting RDY2PRINT signal to the print head  302 . More particularly, the print head synchronization unit  2722  may be configured to transmit state “1” of the RDY2PRINT signal. 
       FIG. 43  is a timing diagram  4300  illustrating synchronization between the print head  302  and the control unit  138 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     The timing diagram  4300  includes the clock signal  4302 , RDY2Print signal  4304 , LPH_RDY_N signal  4306 , LASER_POS signal  4308 , and Laser_print signal  4310 . From timing diagram  4300 , it can be observed that at time instant T 1 , the LPH_RDY_N signal  4306  is set to state “0”. As discussed, the LPH_RDY_N signal  4306  indicates that polygon mirror  2106  is rotating at the determined rotation speed. At time instant T 2 , the LASER_POS signal  4308  is set to state “1”. As discussed, the LASER_POS signal  4308  indicates the start and/or end of the blanking period (depicted by  4312 ). At time instant T 3 , the RDY2PRINT signal  4306  is set to state “1”. The control unit  138  is configured to transmit the RDY2PRINT signal  4306  to the print head  302 . As discussed, the RDY2PRINT signal indicates traversal of the print media  104  by a predetermined distance (e.g., one dot size and/or one line). At time instant T 4 , the Laser_print signal  4310  is set to state “1” indicating the printing of a line on the print media  104 . 
       FIG. 44  illustrates a flowchart  4400  of a method of data synchronization between the print head  302  and the control unit  138 . 
     At step  4402 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the data synchronization unit  2724 , and/or the like, for receiving data to be printed from a remote device such as remote computer, remote data source, network, or the like. In an example embodiment, the received data includes segmented data, where each segmented data corresponds to a portion of the data to be printed in a single line. 
     At step  4406 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the data synchronization unit  2724 , and/or the like, for generating one or more data packets (to be transmitted to print head  302  for printing) based on segmented data. Each segmented data is included in the one or more data packets. Further, the data synchronization unit  2724  may determine a count of data packets to be transmitted to the print head in order to transmit the segmented data. The data synchronization unit  2724  may be configured to determine the count of the one or more data packets based on the print resolution, a color scheme in which the data is to be printed, a count of bits included in a single data packet. In another embodiment, the data synchronization unit  2724  may be configured to determine the count of the one or more data packets based on a look-up table, such as the following look-up table: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 18 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Look-up table to determine the count of the one or more data packets 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 # bit per 
                 2550 
                 1275 
                 863 
                 20400 
                 10200 
                 6904 
               
               
                 line 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 # 32b word 
                 80 
                 40 
                 27 
                 638 
                 319 
                 216 
               
               
                 bit padding 
                 10 
                 5 
                 1 
                 16 
                 8 
                 8 
               
               
                 Total # bit 
                 2560 
                 1280 
                 864 
                 20416 
                 10208 
                 6912 
               
               
                 send 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     From the example look-up table, it can be observed that to print content at 600 dpi, the segmented data is configured to be transmitted in 80 data packets to the print head  302 . In another example, to print content at 203 dpi, the segmented data is configured to be transmitted into 27 data packets. In some examples, one or more portions of the segmented data are distributed in the one or more data packets based on a position on the print media  104  at which a portion of the segmented data is to be printed and a writing laser sweep direction. In some examples, the writing laser sweep direction corresponds to a direction in which the writing laser sweeps the print media  104 . In one example, the writing laser beam may sweep the print media  104  from left to right. In another example, the writing laser beam may sweep the print media  104  from right to left. 
     For example, if the writing laser beam sweeps the print media  104  from left to right and the portion of the segmented data is to be printed at a left most position (along the writing laser sweep direction), the portion of the segmented data is included in the first or earlier data packet (to be transmitted to the print head  302 ). Similarly, if another portion of the segmented data is to be printed at a right most position (along the writing laser sweep direction), the other portion of the segmented data is included in the last or later data packet (to be transmitted to the print head  302 ). 
       FIG. 45  is a schematic diagram  4500  illustrating the distribution of the one or more portions of the segmented data in the one or more data packets, according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     The schematic diagram  4500  includes the writing laser sweep direction  4502  and the one or more data packets  4504 . In an example, the one or more data packets  4504  are arranged in a sequence in which the one or more data packets are to be printed on the print media  104 . For example, the portion of the segmented data included in the first data packet  4504   a  is printed at the right most position on the print media  104 . Accordingly, the data synchronization unit  2724  may be configured to transmit the first data packet  4504   a  before any other data packet in the one or more data packets. In another example, another portion of the segmented data included in the data packet  4504   b  is to be printed at the left most position on the print media  104 . Accordingly, the data packet  4504   b  corresponds to the last data packet that is transmitted to the print head  302 . Referring back to  FIG. 44 , at step  4408 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the data synchronization unit  2724 , and/or the like, for modifying a state of Frame sync (F-Sync) signal. In an example embodiment, the F-Sync signal may indicate to the print head  302  that control unit  138  is transmitting data to be printed on the label of the print media  104 . In an example embodiment, the data synchronization unit  2724  may be configured to modify the state of the F-Sync signal to “0”, which may indicate to the print head  302  that the control unit  138  is transmitting data to be printed on the label of the print media  104 . 
     Thereafter, at step  4410 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the data synchronization unit  2724 , and/or the like, for modifying a state of Line sync (L-Sync) signal. In an example embodiment, the L-Sync signal may indicate to the print head  302  that the control unit  138  is transmitting segmented data to be printed on the label of the print media  104 . As discussed, the segmented data corresponds to the portion of the data that is to be printed in a single line on the print media  104 . In an example embodiment, the data synchronization unit  2724  may be configured to modify the state of the L-Sync signal to “0”, which may indicate to the print head  302  that the control unit  138  is transmitting the segmented data. 
     While the state of the F-Sync signal and the L-Sync signal are “0”, at step  4412 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the data synchronization unit  2724 , and/or the like, for transmitting the segmented data to the print head  302 . After the transmission of the segmented data, at step  4414 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the data synchronization unit  2724 , and/or the like, for modifying the state of the L-Sync signal to “1” indicating completion of the transmission of the segmented data (i.e., the data to be printed in a line on the print media  104 ). 
     At step  4416 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the data synchronization unit  2724 , and/or the like, for determining whether the data to be printed on the label of the print media  104  has been transmitted to the print head  302 . If the data synchronization unit  2724  determines that the complete data has been transmitted to the print head  302 , the data synchronization unit  2724  may be configured to perform the step  4418 . However, if the data synchronization unit  2724  determines that the complete data has not been transmitted, the data synchronization unit  2724  may be configured to repeat the step  4412 . 
     At step  4418 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the data synchronization unit  2724 , and/or the like, for modifying the state of the F-Sync signal to “1” indicating end of transmission of the data (i.e., the complete data to be printed on the label of the print media  104 ). 
       FIG. 46  is a timing diagram  4600  illustrating data synchronization between the print head  302  and the control unit  138 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. The timing diagram  4600  includes the clock signal  4602 , a data bus  4604 , the L-Sync signal  4606 , and the F-Sync signal  4608 . 
     It can be observed that at time instant T 1 , the L-sync signal  4606  and the F-Sync  4608  signal are in the state “0”. Further, it can be observed the L-sync signal  4606  is in the state “0” until time instant T 2 . Between the time instant T 1  and T 2 , the data bus  4604  transmits the segmented data to the print head  302  (depicted by  4610 ). After the transmission of the segmented data, the L-Sync signal  4606  is in the state “1” (depicted by  4612 ), however, the F-Sync signal  4608  is in the state “0”. To this end, such states of L-sync  4606  and F-sync signal  4608  indicate that the control unit  138  has additional data to be transmitted to the print head  302 . 
     In some examples, the states of the L-Sync signal and the F-Sync signal may be indicative of a mode of data transmission between the control unit  138  and the print head  302 . The following example table illustrates the mode of data transmission between the control unit  138  and the print head  302 : 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 19 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 mode of data transmission between the control unit and the print head 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 L-Sync Signal 
                 F-Sync Signal 
                 Mode of data transmission 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 0 
                 0 
                 Start of transfer segmented data 
               
               
                 1 
                 0 
                 End of transmission of segmented data 
               
               
                 0 
                 1 
                 Program mode 
               
               
                 1 
                 1 
                 End of data transfer 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     In an example embodiment and in an instance in which the L-Sync signal is “0” and the F-Sync signal “1”, the data transmitted corresponds to a firmware data. To this end, the control unit  138  may utilize an aforementioned data mode to update a firmware of the print head  302 . 
     In some examples, when the print head  302  does not receive any data to be printed, it may be required to save power by modifying the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106 . Modifying the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106  may include reducing the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106 . In another example, modifying the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106  may include halting the rotation of the polygon mirror  2106 . One such method of operating the print head  302  is described in conjunction with  FIG. 47 . 
       FIG. 47  illustrates a flowchart  4700  of a method for operating the print head  302 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     At step  4702 , the printing apparatus  100  includes means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the laser subsystem control unit  2014 , and/or the like, for determining a state of the L-Sync signal and the F-Sync signal. In an example embodiment, the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may be configured to determine the state of L-Sync signal and the F-Sync signal from the print head interface. 
     At step  4704 , the printing apparatus  100  includes means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the laser subsystem control unit  2014 , and/or the like, for determining whether the control unit  138  is transmitting data (to be printed on the print media  104 ) based on the state of the L-Sync signal and the F-Sync signal. For example, referring to table 19, if the laser subsystem control unit  2014  determines that the state of the L-Sync signal is “1” and the F-Sync signal is “1”, the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may determine that the control unit  138  is not transmitting any data to the print head  302 . Accordingly, the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may perform the step  4706 . However, if the laser subsystem control unit  2014  determines that the control unit  138  is transmitting data to the print head  302 , the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may be configured to repeat the step  4702 . 
     At step  4706 , the printing apparatus  100  includes means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the laser subsystem control unit  2014 , and/or the like, for determining if the polygon mirror rotation timeout has elapsed. The laser subsystem control unit  2014  may be configured to determine a polygon mirror rotation timeout from the mirror overrun register. If the laser subsystem control unit  2014  determines that the polygon mirror rotation timeout has elapsed, the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may be configured to perform the step  4708 . However, if the laser subsystem control unit  2014  determines that the polygon mirror rotation timeout has not expired, the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may be configured to repeat the step  4702 . 
     At step  4708 , the printing apparatus  100  includes means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the laser subsystem control unit  2014 , and/or the like, for reducing the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106 . At step  4710 , the printing apparatus  100  includes means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the laser subsystem control unit  2014 , and/or the like, for determining the state of the L-Sync signal and the F-Sync signal. At step  4712 , the printing apparatus  100  includes means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the laser subsystem control unit  2014 , and/or the like, for determining whether the control unit  138  is transmitting data (to be printed on the print media  104 ) based on the state of the L-Sync signal and the F-Sync signal. If the laser subsystem control unit  2014  determines that the control unit  138  is transmitting data to the print head  302 , the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may be configured to perform the step  4714 . However, if the laser subsystem control unit  2014  determines that the control unit  138  is not transmitting data to the print head  302 , the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may be configured to perform the step  4716 . 
     At step  4714 , the printing apparatus  100  includes means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the laser subsystem control unit  2014 , and/or the like, for increasing the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106  to the determined rotation speed ( FIG. 32  and  FIG. 33 ). At step  4716 , the printing apparatus  100  includes means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the laser subsystem control unit  2014 , and/or the like, for determining whether a predetermined time period has elapsed. If the laser subsystem control unit  2014  determines that the predetermined time period has elapsed, the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may be configured to perform the step  4718 . However, if the laser subsystem control unit  2014  determines that the predetermined time period has not elapsed, the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may be configured to repeat the step perform the step  4712 . 
     At step  4718 , the printing apparatus  100  includes means such as, the print head  302 , the controller  2008 , the laser subsystem control unit  2014 , and/or the like, for halting the rotation of the polygon mirror  2106 . 
     In some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to reducing the rotation speed of the polygon mirror  2106  and thereafter halting the polygon mirror  2106 . In an example embodiment, the laser subsystem control unit  2014  may be configured to directly halt the polygon mirror if at step  4706 , it is determined that the polygon mirror rotation timeout has elapsed. Alternatively, or additionally, the speed of the polygon mirror could be increased at step  4706 , if it is determined that the control unit is transmitting data. 
     As is described herein, print media is configured to traverse along the print path and past the print head throughout operation. As a result of the continuous traversal and in some examples, the printed content may exhibit a skew. The embodiments illustrated herein disclose one or methods in which an image or content is pre-compensated for skew. For example, a skew may be introduced in the original image or content in order to compensate for the skew. The systems and methods herein may determine skew based on one or more markings on the print media, a traversal speed, results from a verifier, and/or the like. In other examples, the speed of traversal may also be altered. In some examples,  FIGS. 34-38  illustrate methods for compensating the skew that may get introduced in the print media  104 . 
       FIG. 34  is a flowchart  3400  illustrating another method for printing content on the print media  104 , according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     At step  3402 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , and/or the like, for receiving the one or more configuration settings associated with the printing apparatus  100 . In an example embodiment, the I/O device interface unit  2706  may receive the one or more configuration settings associated with the printing apparatus  100  through the UI  140 . In some examples, as discussed, the one or more configuration settings may include the resolution at which the content is to be printed on the print media  104 , and the speed at which the print media  104  is to be traversed along the print path. Additionally, or alternatively, the one or more configuration settings may include a count of writing laser beams to be used to print content on the print media  104 . For example, the I/O device interface unit  2706  may receive the one or more configuration settings as 600 DPI (dots per inch) at 6 IPS (inches per second), and three writing laser beams to be used to print content on the print media  104 . 
     At step  3404 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the printing operation control unit  2716 , and/or the like, for determining a measure of the skew that may get introduced in the printed content based on the one or more configuration settings of the printer (received in the step  3402 ). For example, the printing operation control unit  2716  may be configured to determine the measure of the skew based on the print resolution, the media traversal speed, and a count of writing laser beams to be utilized to print content on the print media  104 . Additionally, or alternately, the printing operation control unit  2716  may determine the measure of skew based on the one or more print media characteristics (refer  FIG. 28 ). As discussed, the one or more print media characteristics may include, but are not limited to, the width of the print media  104 , the type of the print media  104 , thickness of the print media  104 , and/or the like. Determining the measure of the skew is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 35 . 
     At step  3406 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the printing operation control unit  2716 , and/or the like, for receiving the content to be printed. In some examples, the I/O device interface unit  2706  may receive the content from a remote computer. In another embodiment, the I/O device interface unit  308  may receive the content (to be printed) from the UI  140 . 
     At step  3408 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the printing operation control unit  2716 , the image processing unit  2718 , and/or the like, for modifying the received content to compensate for the measure of the skew (determined in the step  3404 ). The method of modifying the content is further described in conjunction with  FIG. 37 . 
       FIG. 35  illustrates a flowchart  3500  of a method for determining the measure of the skew that may get introduced in the printed content, according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     At step  3502 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the printing operation control unit  2716 , and/or the like, for determining a dot size based on the resolution at which the content is to be printed on the print media  104 . In some examples, the printing operation control unit  2716  may utilize the following formula to determine the dot size: 
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     dot 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     size 
                   
                   = 
                   
                     1 
                     resolution 
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   ( 
                   4 
                   ) 
                 
               
             
           
         
       
     
     For example, the printing operation control unit  2716  may determine the dot size as 0.005 inches if the resolution is 203 DPI. In another example, the printing operation control unit  2716  may determine the dot size as 0.0016 inches of the resolution is 600 DPI. In some examples, the printing operation control unit  2716  may not utilize the Equation 4 to determine the dot size. In an example embodiment, the printing operation control unit  2716  may utilize the following look-up table to determine the dot size: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 3 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 look-up table illustrating the dot size and the corresponding resolution. 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Resolution 
                 200 
                 300 
                 600 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 dot size 
                 0.125 
                 0.085 
                 0.042 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Alternatively, or additionally, dot size may be determined by other means such as by way of a verifier, scanner, images, and/or other image-based testing. 
     At step  3504 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the printing operation control unit  2716 , and/or the like, for determining the measure of the skew based on the dot size (determined in the step  3502 ), the width of the print media  104  (refer  FIG. 28 ), and a count of the writing laser beams. In some examples, the printing operation control unit  2716  may determine the skew by utilizing the following formula: 
       Measure of skew=Tan(size of one dot*count of the first laser beams/((width of the print media  104 ))  (5)
 
     For example, if a count of the writing laser beam used for printing content is one, the width of the print media  104  is 4.25 inches, and dot size is 0.0016 inches, the measure of the skew is 0.07 degrees. In another example, if a count of the writing laser beam used for printing content is one, the width of the print media  104  is 4.25 inches, and the dot size is 0.005 inches, the measure of the skew is 0.02 degrees. 
     In some examples, the measure of the skew increases when the count of writing laser beams used to print content on the print media  104  increases. For example, when multiple writing laser beams are utilized to print a single line on the print media  104 , the skew angle increases, as is described in  FIG. 36 a   ,  FIG. 36 b   , and  FIG. 36 c   .  FIG. 36 a   ,  FIG. 36 b   , and  FIG. 36 c    are schematic diagrams illustrating the relationship between the count of writing laser beams and the measure of the skew, according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     Referring to  FIG. 36 a   , the print head  302  may cause the single writing laser beam  3602   a  to sweep across the width of the print media  104 . Since the print media  104  traverses along the print path, the single writing laser beam  3602   a  may sweep the width of print media  104  at a skew to generate skewed printed content  3604 . The skew may correspond to an angle between an imaginary line (depicted by  3606 ) representing a line swept by the single writing laser beam and an imaginary line depicting the width of the print media  104  (depicted by  3608 ). Further, in  FIG. 36 a   , the skew angle is determined based on Equation 5. 
     Referring to  FIG. 36 b   , the print head  302  may cause the two writing laser beams  3602   b  and  3602   c  to sweep across the width of the print media  104  such that 50% of the content is printed by the writing laser beam  3602   b  and 50% of the content is printed by the writing laser beam  3602   c . The printed content generated by the writing laser beams  3602   b  and  3602   c  is depicted by  3606 . To this end, the printed content  3606  may include a joint  3608  that decides that the printed content enters into a first printed content portion  3610  and a second printed content portion  3612 . In some examples, the writing laser beam  3602   b  prints the first printed content portion  3610  and the writing laser beam prints the second printed content portion  3612 . Further, it can be observed that the first printed content portion  3610  and the second printed content portion  3612  have respective skews (as both portions of the printed content are printed by separate writing laser beams). Additionally, the respective measure of the skew in the first portion of the printed content and the second portion of the printed content, is greater than the measure of the skew in the printed content printed by the single writing laser beam. In some examples, the measure of the skew of the first printed content portion  3610  and the second printed content portion  3612  is the same. However, in some examples, the scope of the disclosure is not limited to the first printed content portion  3610  and the second printed content portion  3612  having the same measure of the skew. In an example embodiment, the measure of the skew of the first printed content portion  3610  and the second printed content portion  3612  may vary based on a percentage of the content printed by the writing laser beams  3602   b  and  3602   c  as is further described in  FIG. 36   c.    
     Referring to  FIG. 36 c   , the writing laser beam  3602   b  prints 25% of the content, while the writing laser beam  3602   c  prints 75% of the content. To this end, the writing laser beam  3602   b  sweeps 25% print media  104  width, while the writing laser beam  3602   c  sweeps 75% of the print media  104  width. The measure of skew in a portion of the printed content, in such an embodiment, is determined based on the following equation: 
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     Measure 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     of 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     skew 
                   
                   = 
                   
                     Tan 
                     ( 
                     
                       
                         size 
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         of 
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         one 
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         dot 
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               
                                 ( 
                                 
                                   width 
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                       
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   of 
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                       
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   the 
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                       
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   print 
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                       
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   media 
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                       
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   104 
                                 
                                 ) 
                               
                               * 
                             
                           
                         
                         
                           
                             
                               percentage 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               of 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               print 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               media 
                             
                           
                         
                         
                           
                             
                               swept 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               by 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               the 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               first 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               laser 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               beam 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                     
                     ) 
                   
                 
               
               
                 
                   ( 
                   6 
                   ) 
                 
               
             
           
         
       
     
     Accordingly, based on Equation 6, the skew of the first printed portion may be greater than the skew of the second printed portion. 
       FIG. 37  illustrates a flowchart  3700  of a method for modifying the content prior to printing, according to one or more embodiments described herein. 
     At step  3702 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the printing operation control unit  2716 , the image processing unit  2718 , and/or the like, for determining whether the multiple writing laser beams are to be used to print content based on the configuration setting of the printing apparatus  100  (determined in the step  3402 ). If the image processing unit  2718  determines that a single writing laser beam is to be used to print content, the image processing unit  2718  may be configured to perform the step  3704 . However, if the image processing unit  2718  determines that multiple writing laser beams are to be used to print content, such as because the content is of a certain size or requires a certain resolution, the image processing unit  2718  may be configured to perform the step  3708 . 
     At step  3704 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the printing operation control unit  2716 , the image processing unit  2718 , and/or the like, for determining a second measure of the skew based on the measure of the skew determined in the step  3504 . In an example embodiment, second measure of the skew is a negative value of the measure of the skew, as is depicted by the following mathematical relation: 
       Second measure of skew=−(measure of skew)  (7)
 
     At step  3706 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the printing operation control unit  2716 , the image processing unit  2718 , and/or the like, for updating the content (to be printed) by modifying a skew of the content based on the second measure of skew. In an example embodiment, the image processing unit  2718  may be configured to purposely add skew to the content (to be printed) such that printing of the skewed content generated printed content with zero degrees skew. 
     At step  3708 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the printing operation control unit  2716 , the image processing unit  2718 , and/or the like, for determining the second measure of skew for each of the multiple writing laser beams based on the measure of skew determined for each of the multiple writing laser beams. In an example embodiment, the image processing unit  2718  may be configured to utilize Equation 7 to determine the second measure of skew for each of the multiple writing laser beams. 
     At step  3710 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the printing operation control unit  2716 , the image processing unit  2718 , and/or the like, for determining the portion of the content to be printed by each of the multiple writing laser beams. For example, if the count of the writing laser beams is two and each of the two writing laser beams are configured to print the 50% of the content (along the width of the print media  104 ), the image processing unit  2718  may be configured to segment the content to be printed along the width of the print media  104  by a percentage of the content that each of the multiple writing laser beams have to print. Each segment of the content corresponds to the portion of the content. 
     At step  3712 , the printing apparatus  100  may include means such as, the control unit  138 , the processor  2702 , the I/O device interface unit  2706 , the printing operation control unit  2716 , the image processing unit  2718 , and/or the like, for modifying each portion of the content based on the second measure of skew determined for the respective writing laser beams. For example, the image processing unit  2718  may be configured to individually modify the skew of each portion of the content. For instance, the skew associated with one of the two writing laser beams is 0.5 degrees and the skew associated with the second of the two writing laser beams is 0.1 degrees. In such an embodiment, the image processing unit  2718  may be configured to modify the skew of the portion of the content, to be printed by first of the two writing laser beams, by −0.5 degrees. Further, the image processing unit  2718  may be configured to modify the skew of the portion of the content, to be printed by second of the two writing laser beams, by −0.1 degrees. In an example embodiment, the image processing unit  2718  may be configured to utilize known methods to modify the skew of the portion of the content. Some examples of the known methods may include, but are not limited to, coordinate transformation, coordinate rotation, and/or the like. 
       FIG. 38 a    illustrates an image  3802  of the modified content to be printed using a single writing laser beam, according to one or more embodiments described herein. It can be observed that the modified content is skewed by an angle (determined based on the second measure of the skew). Further,  FIG. 38 b    illustrates an image  3804  of the modified content to be printed by multiple writing laser beams, according to one or more embodiments described herein. It can be observed that the image  3804  of the modified content has a first portion  3806  and a second portion  3808 . Both the first portion  3806  and the second portion  3808  are individually skewed (based on the second measure of skew associated with each of the multiple writing laser beams configured to print the first portion  3806  of the content and the second portion  3808  of the content). 
     Print Media Authentication 
     As described above, an example printing apparatus in accordance with example embodiments of the present disclosure may be “inkless” in that it may utilize laser interaction with laser reactive media on a print media to conduct printing instead of using ink. In order to ensure that the printing is conducted on the correct print media with the best print quality performance, it is necessary to determine and confirm that the print media loaded in the printing apparatus is a print media that is supported by the printing apparatus. For example, the printing apparatus may need to authenticate the print media to confirm that the print media is a genuine print media that is suitable for the printing apparatus and/or for inkless printing. 
     In some embodiments, a “watermark” (for example, in the form of a reactive coating) may be applied on print media that is supported by the printing apparatus. For example, as described above in connection with at least  FIG. 25A , the protective layer  2506  (also referred to as a UV reactive layer) may include a UV dye. The UV dye may be configured to validate the authenticity of the print media. For example, the UV dye/UV reactive layer may comprise UV reactive coating (e.g. coated with UV reactive chemical). When the print media is illuminated with the UV radiation, the light may get reflected from the print media surface (for example, by the UV reactive layer). 
     In some embodiments, when the print media is loaded to a printing apparatus, the printing apparatus may authenticate the print media based on the light reflection from the print media. In response to determining that the print media is authenticated (e.g. the print media is supported by the printing apparatus), the printing apparatus may enable printing on the print media (for example, enable the print head of the printing apparatus). In response to determining that the print media is not authenticated (e.g. the print media is not supported by the printing apparatus), the printing apparatus may disable printing on the print media (for example, disable the print head of the printing apparatus). 
     In addition, example embodiments of the present disclosure may determine a type or category of print media (also referred to as “print media signature”) to provide the best printing quality. For example, the print media signature may correspond to a type of the print media, whether the print media is intended for black and white printing, whether the print media is intended for greyscale printing, whether the print media is intended for color printing, and/or the like. In some embodiments, using a different type of UV reactive coatings (for example, every type of print media is coated with a unique UV coating), the printing apparatus is able to differentiate different print media signatures of print media loaded in the printing apparatus. Based on the print media signatures, the printing apparatus may set up the printing parameters automatically and without the need of user intervention. 
     As such, various example embodiments of the present disclosure may implement a UV light source (such as a UV LED source) and one or more light sensors (such as one or both of a UV light sensor and a Red-Green-Blue (RGB) sensor) to emit UV light on the print media, determine the luminescence level from the print media, and determine whether the print media loaded in the printing apparatus is supported by the printing apparatus, and/or a print media signature of the print media. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 48 , an example view of a portion of an example printing apparatus  4800  according to one or more embodiments is illustrated. 
     For example,  FIG. 48  illustrates an example top chassis portion  4802  of the example printing apparatus  4800 . The top chassis portion  4802  is similar to various example top chassis portions illustrated and described above, including, but not limited to, the top chassis portion  126  illustrated and described above. For example, the top chassis portion  4802  may be configured to receive a print head engine  4804  that is configured to emit a laser beam onto the print media to conduct laser printing, similar to the example print head engine  122  illustrated and described above. 
     In some embodiments, the top chassis portion  4802  may house a media supply spindle  4806 , similar to the media supply spindle  108  illustrated and described above. For example, the media supply spindle  4806  may receive a roll of print media, which may travel along a print direction during the printing process (as shown by the arrow in  FIG. 48 ). As described above, the roll of print media may be supported by the example printing apparatus  4800  and is coated with a dedicated chemical that luminates when exposed to UV light. 
     In some embodiments, a print media authentication module  4808  is disposed on the top chassis portion. In some embodiments, the print media authentication module  4808  is disposed at a location along the print direction between the print head engine  4804  and the media supply spindle  4806 . Referring now to  FIG. 49 , an example block diagram illustrating some example components of an example print media authentication module is illustrated. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 49 , the print media authentication module may comprise a UV light source  4901  and a light sensor  4903 . In some embodiments, the UV light source  4901  and the light sensor  4903  are electrically coupled to and secured on a circuit board. In some embodiments, the UV light source  4901  and the light sensor  4903  are electrically coupled to a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus). In some embodiments, the print media authentication module is disposed within the print head engine or the print head. As described herein, the print head engine or the print head may comprise a housing that prevents the laser from leaking out of the print head engine or the print head. As such, disposing the print media authentication module within the print head engine or the print head may prevent light disturbance from the local environment that may interfere with the print media authentication module. In some embodiments, the print media authentication module is located away from the media opening (where the print media exits the printing apparatus), therefore preventing ambient light from interfering with the UV light emitted by the print media authentication module. In some embodiments, the platen roller may block ambient light from interfering with the UV light emitted by the print media authentication module. 
     In some embodiments, the UV light source  4901  is configured to emit a UV light onto the print media  4905 . For example, the UV light source  4901  may be in the form of, including but not limited to, a UV LED, a fluorescent lamp, and/or the like. 
     In some embodiments, if the print media  4905  comprises the UV reactive layer/coating, the print media  4905  may reflect the light from the UV light source  4901 . The reflected light from the print media  4905  may be received by the light sensor  4903 , which may in turn convert the light signal into a light intensity indication that indicates, including, but not limited to, a light intensity level. 
     In some embodiments, the light sensor  4903  may be an ambient light sensor. For example, the ambient light sensor may be configured to detect the light intensity of ambient light. In some embodiments, the light sensor  4903  may be a RGB sensor. For example, the RGB sensor may be configured to detect a light intensity of a red light from the ambient light, a light intensity of a green light from the ambient light, and a light intensity of a blue light from the ambient light. In some embodiments, the light sensor  4903  may be other type(s) of light sensor(s). 
     Referring now to  FIG. 50 , an example method  5000  is illustrated. In particular, the example method  5000  illustrates example steps/operations of determining whether an example print media is supported by an example printing apparatus. For example, the example method  5000  illustrates determining whether a print media is supported based on whether the reflected light (for example, as detected by an ambient light sensor) satisfies a threshold. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 50 , the example method  5000  starts at block  5002  and then proceeds to step/operation  5004 . At step/operation  5004 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may trigger a UV light emission to print media. 
     For example, the processing circuitry may be electrically coupled to a UV light source. When the processing circuitry determines that a print media is loaded into the example printing apparatus and that the printing apparatus is in a closed state (for example, based on the signals from various sensors described above), the processing circuitry may transmit a signal to the UV light source, and the UV light source may emit a UV light onto the print media, similar to those described above in connection with  FIG. 48  and  FIG. 49 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 50 , subsequent to step/operation  5004 , the method  5000  proceeds to step/operation  5006 . At step/operation  5006 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may detect a reflected light from the print media. 
     In some embodiments, a light sensor (such as an ambient light sensor) may receive light that is reflected from the print media, and may convert it into an electrical signal proportional to the amount of light that the sensor received. For example, when a print media that is supported by the printing apparatus is loaded and exposed to UV light, a certain amount of light may be reflected from the print media, which may be received by the light sensor. The light sensor may convert the amount of light into an electrical signal (for example, in the form of a given voltage). 
     Referring back to  FIG. 50 , subsequent to step/operation  5006 , the method  5000  proceeds to step/operation  5008 . At step/operation  5008 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may generate a light intensity indication. 
     For example, the light sensor and/or the processing circuitry may convert the electrical signal (for example, in the form of a given voltage) into an electronic indication that corresponds to the intensity of the light received by the light sensor. For example, the light sensor and/or the processing circuitry may conduct one or more signal functions, such as, but not limited to, signal conditioning, signal amplifying, analog-to-digital converting, and/or the like, to generate the light intensity indication based on the electrical signal. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 50 , subsequent to step/operation  5008 , the method  5000  proceeds to step/operation  5010 . At step/operation  5010 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may determine whether the light intensity indication satisfies light intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, the light intensity threshold may correspond to a light intensity level of reflected light that is received by the light sensor and from a print media that is supported by the printing apparatus. In some embodiments, the light intensity threshold may be determined based on the amount of chemical coating in the UV reactive layer of print media that is supported by the printing apparatus. 
     If, at step/operation  5010 , the processing circuitry determines that the light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold, the method  5000  proceeds to step/operation  5012 . At step/operation  5012 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may determine that the print media is supported by the printing apparatus. 
     For example, referring now to the example shown in  FIG. 51 , the light intensity indication  5101  satisfies the light intensity threshold  5103 . In this example, the processing circuitry determines that the print media corresponding to the light intensity indication  5101  is supported by the printing apparatus. In this example, the printing apparatus may enable all operations on the print media. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 50 , if, at step/operation  5010 , the processing circuitry determines that the light intensity indication does not satisfy the light intensity threshold, the method  5000  proceeds to step/operation  5014 . At step/operation  5014 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may determine that the print media is not supported by the printing apparatus. 
     In some embodiments, when a non-supported print media is loaded, due to the lack of (or insufficient) UV reactive coating, the non-supported print media may not reflect light to the light sensor, or may reflect light having less intensity than light that is reflected by a supported print media. 
     For example, referring now to the example shown in  FIG. 51 , the light intensity indication  5105  does not satisfy the light intensity threshold  5103 . In this example, the processing circuitry determines that the print media corresponding to the light intensity indication  5105  is not supported by the printing apparatus. In this example, the printing apparatus may prevent all operation on the print media and may further show an alert message on a display associated with the printing apparatus, indicating that a non-supported print media is loaded. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 50 , subsequent to step/operation  5012  and/or step/operation  5014 , the method  5000  proceeds to block  5016  and ends. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 52 , an example method  5200  is illustrated. In particular, the example method  5200  illustrates example steps/operations of determining whether an example print media is supported by an example printing apparatus. For example, the example method  5200  illustrates determining whether a print media is supported based on whether at least one of the reflected red lights, the reflected green lights, or the reflected blue lights (for example, as detected by an ambient light sensor) satisfies a threshold. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 52 , the example method  5200  starts at block  5202  and then proceeds to step/operation  5204 . At step/operation  5204 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may trigger a UV light emission to print media. 
     For example, the processing circuitry may be electrically coupled to a UV light source. When the processing circuitry determines that a print media is loaded into the example printing apparatus and that the printing apparatus is in a closed state (for example, based on the signals from various sensors described above), the processing circuitry may transmit a signal to the UV light source, and the UV light source may emit a UV light onto the print media, similar to those described above in connection with  FIG. 48  and  FIG. 49 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 52 , subsequent to step/operation  5204 , the method  5200  proceeds to step/operation  5206 . At step/operation  5206 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may detect a reflected light from the print media. 
     In some embodiments, a light sensor (such as an RGB sensor) may receive light that is reflected from the print media. For example, when a print media that is supported by the printing apparatus is loaded and exposed to UV light, a certain amount of red light, green light, and/or blue light may be reflected from the print media, which may be received by the light sensor. The light sensor may convert the amount of red light, the amount of green light, and the amount of blue light into electrical signals (for example, in the form of given voltages). 
     Referring back to  FIG. 52 , subsequent to step/operation  5206 , the method  5200  proceeds to step/operation  5208 . At step/operation  5208 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may generate a red light intensity indication. 
     For example, the light sensor may determine an amount of red light from the light detected at step/operation  5206 , and may generate an electrical signal (for example, in the form of a given voltage) indicating the amount of red light. Additionally, in some embodiments, the processing circuitry may convert the electrical signal (for example, in the form of a given voltage) into an electronic indication that corresponds to the intensity of the red light received by the light sensor. For example, the light sensor and/or the processing circuitry may conduct one or more signal functions, such as, but not limited to, signal conditioning, signal amplifying, analog-to-digital converting, and/or the like, to generate the red light intensity indication based on the electrical signal. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 52 , subsequent to step/operation  5206 , the method  5200  proceeds to step/operation  5210 . At step/operation  5210 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may generate a green light intensity indication. 
     For example, the light sensor may determine an amount of green light from the light detected at step/operation  5206 , and may generate an electrical signal (for example, in the form of a given voltage) indicating the amount of green light. Additionally, in some embodiments, the processing circuitry may convert the electrical signal (for example, in the form of a given voltage) into an electronic indication that corresponds to the intensity of the green light received by the light sensor. For example, the light sensor and/or the processing circuitry may conduct one or more signal functions, such as, but not limited to, signal conditioning, signal amplifying, analog-to-digital converting, and/or the like, to generate the green light intensity indication based on the electrical signal. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 52 , subsequent to step/operation  5206 , the method  5200  proceeds to step/operation  5212 . At step/operation  5212 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may generate a blue light intensity indication. 
     For example, the light sensor may determine an amount of blue light from the light detected at step/operation  5206 , and may generate an electrical signal (for example, in the form of a given voltage) indicating the amount of blue light. Additionally, in some embodiments, the processing circuitry may convert the electrical signal (for example, in the form of a given voltage) into an electronic indication that corresponds to the intensity of the blue light received by the light sensor. For example, the light sensor and/or the processing circuitry may conduct one or more signal functions, such as, but not limited to, signal conditioning, signal amplifying, analog-to-digital converting, and/or the like, to generate the blue light intensity indication based on the electrical signal. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 52 , subsequent to step/operation  5208 , step/operation  5210 , and step/operation  5212 , the method  5200  proceeds to step/operation  5214 . At step/operation  5214 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may determine whether at least one of the red light intensity indication, the green light intensity indication, or the blue light intensity indication satisfies a light intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, the light intensity threshold may correspond to a light intensity level of reflected red light, reflected green light, and/or reflected blue light that is/are received by the light sensor and from a print media that is supported by the printing apparatus. In some embodiments, the light intensity threshold may be determined based on the amount of chemical coating in the UV reactive layer of print media that is supported by the printing apparatus. 
     If, at step/operation  5214 , the processing circuitry determines that at least one light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold, the method  5200  proceeds to step/operation  5216 . At step/operation  5216 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may determine that the print media is supported by the printing apparatus. 
     In some embodiments, when a supported print media is loaded, the light intensity of the reflected light to the light sensor may satisfy the light intensity threshold, as the light intensity threshold may be set based on light that would be reflected if a supported print media is loaded. 
     For example, referring now to the example shown in  FIG. 53 , the red light intensity indication  5301 , the green light intensity indication  5303 , and the blue light intensity indication  5305  all satisfy the light intensity threshold  5307 . In this example, the processing circuitry determines that the print media corresponding to the red light intensity indication  5301 , the green light intensity indication  5303 , and the blue light intensity indication  5305  is supported by the printing apparatus. In this example, the printing apparatus may allow all operations on the print media. 
     If, at step/operation  5214 , the processing circuitry determines that none of the light intensity indications satisfy the light intensity threshold, the method  5200  proceeds to step/operation  5218 . At step/operation  5218 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may determine that the print media is not supported by the printing apparatus. 
     In some embodiments, when a non-supported print media is loaded, due to the lack of (or insufficient) UV reactive coating, the non-supported print media may not reflect light to the light sensor, or may reflect red light, green light, and blue light that all have less intensity than light that is reflected by a supported print media. 
     For example, referring now to the example shown in  FIG. 51 , the red light intensity indication  5309 , the green light intensity indication  5311 , and the blue light intensity indication  5313  all fail to satisfy the light intensity threshold  5307 . In this example, the processing circuitry determines that the print media corresponding to the red light intensity indication  5309 , the green light intensity indication  5311 , and the blue light intensity indication  5313  is not supported by the printing apparatus. In this example, the printing apparatus may prevent all operation on the print media and may further show an alert message on a display associated with the printing apparatus, indicating that a non-supported print media is loaded. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 52 , subsequent to step/operation  5216  and/or step/operation  5218 , the method  5200  proceeds to block  5220  and ends. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 54 , an example method  5400  is illustrated. In particular, the example method  5400  illustrates example steps/operations of determining the print media signature of an example print media associated with an example printing apparatus. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 54 , the example method  5400  starts at block  5402  and then proceeds to step/operation  5404 . At step/operation  5404 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may trigger a UV light emission to print media, similar to those described above in connection with at least step/operation  5204  of  FIG. 52 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 54 , subsequent to step/operation  5404 , the method  5400  proceeds to step/operation  5406 . At step/operation  5406 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may detect a reflected light from the print media, similar to those described above in connection with at least step/operation  5206  of  FIG. 52 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 54 , subsequent to step/operation  5406 , the method  5400  proceeds to step/operation  5408 . At step/operation  5408 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may generate a red light intensity indication, similar to step/operation  5208  described above in connection with at least step/operation  5208  of  FIG. 52 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 54 , subsequent to step/operation  5408 , the method  5400  proceeds to step/operation  5410 . At step/operation  5410 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may compare the red light intensity indication with a light intensity threshold, and determine whether the red light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold, similar to those described above in connection with at least step/operation  5214  of  FIG. 52 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 54 , subsequent to step/operation  5406 , the method  5400  proceeds to step/operation  5412 . At step/operation  5414 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may generate a green light intensity indication, similar to step/operation  5210  described above in connection with at least  FIG. 52 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 54 , subsequent to step/operation  5412 , the method  5400  proceeds to step/operation  5414 . At step/operation  5414 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may compare the green light intensity indication with a light intensity threshold, and determine whether the green light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold, similar to those described above in connection with at least step/operation  5214  of  FIG. 52 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 54 , subsequent to step/operation  5406 , the method  5400  proceeds to step/operation  5416 . At step/operation  5416 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may generate a blue light intensity indication, similar to step/operation  5212  described above in connection with at least  FIG. 52 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 54 , subsequent to step/operation  5416 , the method  5400  proceeds to step/operation  5418 . At step/operation  5418 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may compare the blue light intensity indication with a light intensity threshold, and determine whether the blue light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold, similar to those described above in connection with at least step/operation  5214  of  FIG. 52 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 54 , subsequent to step/operation  5410 , step/operation  5414 , and step/operation  5418 , the method  5400  proceeds to step/operation  5420 . At step/operation  5420 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may determine a print media signature based on the red light intensity indication, the green light intensity indication, and the blue light intensity indication. 
     For example, an example printing apparatus may associate a print media signature of a print media whether its red light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold, whether its green light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold, and whether its blue light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold. The printing apparatus may store such information on a data look-up table, and the processing circuitry may retrieve the data look-up table to determine the print media signature of a particular print media loaded in the example printing apparatus. 
     Referring now to the example shown in  FIG. 55 , the red light intensity indication  5501 , the green light intensity indication  5503 , and the blue light intensity indication  5505  may be associated with a print media loaded in a printing apparatus. As shown, the red light intensity indication  5501  satisfies the light intensity threshold  5525  (e.g. a high level of red light), the green light intensity indication  5503  satisfies the light intensity threshold  5525  (e.g. a high level of green light), and the blue light intensity indication  5505  does not satisfy the light intensity threshold  5525  (e.g. a low level of blue light). The processing circuitry may determine a print media signature from the data look-up table that corresponds to a high level of red light, a high level of green light, and a low level of blue light, and may determine that the print media is associated with this print media signature. 
     As another example, the red light intensity indication  5507 , the green light intensity indication  5509 , and the blue light intensity indication  5511  may be associated with a print media loaded in a printing apparatus. As shown, the red light intensity indication  5507  does not satisfy the light intensity threshold  5525  (e.g. a low level of red light), the green light intensity indication  5509  satisfies the light intensity threshold  5525  (e.g. a high level of green light), and the blue light intensity indication  5511  does not satisfy the light intensity threshold  5525  (e.g. a low level of blue light). The processing circuitry may determine a print media signature from the data look-up table that corresponds to a low level of red light, a high level of green light, and a low level of blue light, and may determine that the print media is associated with this print media signature. 
     As another example, the red light intensity indication  5513 , the green light intensity indication  5515 , and the blue light intensity indication  5517  may be associated with a print media loaded in a printing apparatus. As shown, the red light intensity indication  5513  satisfies the light intensity threshold  5525  (e.g. a high level of red light), the green light intensity indication  5509  does not satisfy the light intensity threshold  5525  (e.g. a low level of green light), and the blue light intensity indication  5517  satisfies the light intensity threshold  5525  (e.g. a high level of blue light). The processing circuitry may determine a print media signature from the data look-up table that corresponds to a high level of red light, a low level of green light, and a high level of blue light, and may determine that the print media is associated with this print media signature. 
     As another example, the red light intensity indication  5519 , the green light intensity indication  5521 , and the blue light intensity indication  5523  may be associated with a print media loaded in a printing apparatus. As shown, the red light intensity indication  5519  does not satisfy the light intensity threshold  5525  (e.g. a low level of red light), the green light intensity indication  5521  does not satisfy the light intensity threshold  5525  (e.g. a low level of green light), and the blue light intensity indication  5523  satisfies the light intensity threshold  5525  (e.g. a high level of blue light). The processing circuitry may determine a print media signature from the data look-up table that corresponds to a low level of red light, a low level of green light, and a high level of blue light, and may determine that the print media is associated with this print media signature. 
     In some embodiments, based on the print media signature, the printing apparatus may adjust the setting and parameters, such as darkness, contrast, speed, black and white, greyscale, color printing and/or other. For example, the print media signature may not only indicate whether the print media is for color printing, black and white printing, or grayscale printing, but can also indicate how much power is needed to make proper marks on the print media. In such an example, based on the print media signature, the printing apparatus may adjust power level and dwelling duration, such that the output provides better print quality (e.g. clearer text, higher grade barcodes, etc.). 
     Referring back to  FIG. 54 , subsequent to step/operation  5420 , the method  5400  proceeds to block  5422  and ends. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 56 , an example method  5600  is illustrated. In particular, the example method  5600  illustrates example steps/operations of determining the print media signature of an example print media associated with an example printing apparatus. In particular, the example method  5600  illustrates determining print media signature based on one or more light intensity thresholds. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 56 , the example method  5600  starts at block  5602  and then proceeds to step/operation  5604 . At step/operation  5604 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may trigger a UV light emission to print media, similar to those described in connection with at least step/operation  5004  of  FIG. 50 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 56 , subsequent to step/operation  5604 , the method  5600  proceeds to step/operation  5606 . At step/operation  5606 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may detect a reflected light from the print media, similar to those described above in connection with at least step/operation  5006  of  FIG. 50 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 56 , subsequent to step/operation  5606 , the method  5600  proceeds to step/operation  5608 . At step/operation  5608 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may generate a light intensity indication, similar to those described above in connection with step/operation  5008  of  FIG. 50 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 56 , subsequent to step/operation  5608 , the method  5600  proceeds to step/operation  5610 . At step/operation  5610 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may compare the light intensity indication with a first light intensity threshold, similar to those described above in connection with step/operation  5010  of  FIG. 50 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 56 , subsequent to step/operation  5608 , the method  5600  proceeds to step/operation  5612 . At step/operation  5612 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may compare the light intensity indication with a second light intensity threshold, similar to those described above in connection with step/operation  5010  of  FIG. 50 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 56 , subsequent to step/operation  5610  and step/operation  5612 , the method  5600  proceeds to step/operation  5614 . At step/operation  5614 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may determine a print media signature based at least in part on the light intensity indication, the first light intensity threshold, and the second light intensity threshold. 
     For example, referring now to  FIG. 57 , the processing circuitry may determine that the first light intensity indication  5701  and the third light intensity indication  5705  (for example, determined by an ambient light sensor described here) are at a medium level (e.g. between the threshold  5709  and threshold  5711 ), and may determine that the print media corresponding to the first light intensity indication  5701  and the print media corresponding to the third light intensity indication  5705  have a print media signature that corresponds to a medium level light intensity. The processing circuitry may determine that the second light intensity indication  5703  and the fourth light intensity indication  5707  are at a high level (e.g. above the threshold  5711 ), and may determine that the print media corresponding to the second light intensity indication  5703  and the print media corresponding to the fourth light intensity indication  5707  have a print media signature that corresponds to a high level light intensity. 
     As another example, referring now to  FIG. 58 , the red light intensity indication  5802 , the green light intensity indication  5804 , and the blue light intensity indication  5806  may be associated with a print media loaded in a printing apparatus. As shown, the red light intensity indication  5802  is at a medium level (e.g. between the threshold  5828  and the threshold  5826 ), the green light intensity indication  5804  is at a high level (e.g. above the threshold  5826 ), and the blue light intensity indication  5806  is at a low level (e.g. below the threshold  5828 ). The processing circuitry may determine a print media signature from the data look-up table that corresponds to a medium level of red light, a high level of green light, and a low level of blue light, and may determine that the print media is associated with this print media signature. 
     As anther example, the red light intensity indication  5808 , the green light intensity indication  5810 , and the blue light intensity indication  5812  may be associated with a print media loaded in a printing apparatus. As shown, the red light intensity indication  5808  is at a low level, the green light intensity indication  5810  is at a high level, and the blue light intensity indication  5812  is at a high level. The processing circuitry may determine a print media signature from the data look-up table that corresponds to a low level of red light, a high level of green light, and a high level of blue light, and may determine that the print media is associated with this print media signature. 
     As another example, the red light intensity indication  5814 , the green light intensity indication  5816 , and the blue light intensity indication  5818  may be associated with a print media loaded in a printing apparatus. As shown, the red light intensity indication  5814  is at a high level, the green light intensity indication  5816  is at a low level, and the blue light intensity indication  5818  is at a medium level. The processing circuitry may determine a print media signature from the data look-up table that corresponds to a high level of red light, a medium level of green light, and a medium level of blue light, and may determine that the print media is associated with this print media signature. 
     As another example, the red light intensity indication  5820 , the green light intensity indication  5822 , and the blue light intensity indication  5824  may be associated with a print media loaded in a printing apparatus. As shown, the red light intensity indication  5820  is at a medium level, the green light intensity indication  5822  is at a medium level, and the blue light intensity indication  5824  is at a high level. The processing circuitry may determine a print media signature from the data look-up table that corresponds to a medium level of red light, a medium level of green light, and a high level of blue light, and may determine that the print media is associated with this print media signature. 
     In some embodiments, the number of print media signatures that can be identified increases as the number of threshold increases. For example, while a RGB sensor with one threshold could only detect 7 possible print media signatures, a RGB sensor with two thresholds (e.g. three different levels) can detect 26 print media signatures. With fourth level of intensity, 63 print media signatures are supported. In some embodiments, the number of print media signatures that can be detected may be calculated based on the following formula: 
       Number of print media signatures=Σ R=0   1 Σ G=D   1 Σ B=0   1  (number of level−1) (R+G+B) +1
 
     In the above formula, R stands for Red light, G stands for Green light, and B stands for Blue light. R, G, B take the value of 0 or 1. The mathematic symbol “Σ R=0   1 ” means that the sum is calculated. The number below is the starting point, and the one on the top is the ending point. For example, the sum for R=0 is calculated, and then R=1. The formula is used to calculate how many media types can be supported for different media level if three R, G, B component are used. As an example, if number of level equals to 3, if all three component of R, G, B are used, the number of media types supported can be calculated as: 
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   R 
                   ⁢ 
                     
                   = 
                 
               
               
                 
                     
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     
                       01 
                       ⁢ 
                       G 
                     
                     = 
                     
                       
                         01 
                         ⁢ 
                         B 
                       
                       = 
                       
                         013 
                         - 
                         
                           1 
                           ⁢ 
                           R 
                         
                         + 
                         G 
                         + 
                         B 
                         - 
                         1 
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 
                     
                   = 
                 
               
               
                 
                     
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     20 
                     + 
                     0 
                     + 
                     0 
                     + 
                     20 
                     + 
                     0 
                     + 
                     1 
                     + 
                     20 
                     + 
                     1 
                     + 
                     0 
                     + 
                     20 
                     + 
                     1 
                     + 
                     1 
                     + 
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                   
               
               
                 
                     
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     21 
                     + 
                     0 
                     + 
                     0 
                     + 
                     21 
                     + 
                     0 
                     + 
                     1 
                     + 
                     21 
                     + 
                     1 
                     + 
                     0 
                     + 
                     21 
                     + 
                     1 
                     + 
                     1 
                     - 
                     1 
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 
                     
                   = 
                 
               
               
                 
                     
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     
                       20 
                       + 
                       21 
                       + 
                       21 
                       + 
                       22 
                       + 
                       21 
                       + 
                       22 
                       + 
                       22 
                       + 
                       23 
                       - 
                       1 
                     
                     = 
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                   
               
               
                 
                     
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     
                       1 
                       + 
                       2 
                       + 
                       2 
                       + 
                       4 
                       + 
                       2 
                       + 
                       4 
                       + 
                       4 
                       + 
                       8 
                       - 
                       1 
                     
                     = 
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                   
               
               
                 
                     
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     26 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     possible 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     media 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     types 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       supported 
                       . 
                     
                   
                 
               
             
           
         
       
     
     Referring back to  FIG. 56 , subsequent to step/operation  5614 , the method  5600  proceeds to block  5616  and ends. 
     As such, by introducing a UV reactive coating in the media and paired with a UV LED and sensor, various embodiments of the present disclosure may detect if a supported print media is loaded in the printing apparatus (the printing apparatus may only allow supported print media for printing). Additionally, based on the coating type, various embodiments of the present disclosure may detect various media signatures, which are used to detect the print media signatures loaded in the printing apparatus. Based on the print media signature, the system may automatically adjust its settings to ensure the best print quality will be available. 
     Print Safety Protection 
     As described above, various embodiments of the present disclosure may implement a laser to print texts, images, barcodes, and the like on print media. For example, an example printing apparatus in accordance with examples of the present disclosure may include a print head engine that is configured to emit a laser beam onto the print media during the printing process. 
     In some embodiments, an example print media may comprise a printable area and a non-printable area. As an example, an example print media may be in the form of an example label that is carried by an example label liner (also referred to as “label backing”). In such an example, the example label may correspond to a printable area, and the example label liner may correspond to a non-printable area. In some embodiments, the example label may be positioned along a center line of the label liner and on a top surface of the label liner. As such, a center portion of the example print media may comprise the example label, while an outer portion (or the “edge”) of the print media may comprise the example label liner. 
     In some embodiments, the example label is attached to the example label liner through an adhesive material. In some embodiments, the example label and the example label liner may travel together within the example printing apparatus and under the print head engine of the example printing apparatus. In some embodiments, the example label liner may serve as a carrier sheet for the example label in the example printing apparatus. After texts, images, barcodes, and/or the like are printed on the example label, the example label may be detached from the example label liner and applied onto a surface of packaging, box, carton, product, and/or the like. 
     When applying a laser beam in laser printing, safety is always a concern. For example, a laser beam not handled properly may accidently be in direct or indirect contact with a human (for example, a user of the laser printer), and may produce serious injuries to the human (such as burned cornea, blindness, burned skin, and/or laceration). 
     Continuing from the example related to label and label liner, while the example label may not reflect a laser beam from its surface, the example label liner may comprise material and/or coating that may reflect the laser beam. When a laser beam is accidently directed to the example label liner, the example label liner may reflect and/or redirect the laser beam, which can cause a safety hazard. As such, there is a need to prevent the laser beam from traveling toward the edge of the print media. 
     Various embodiments of present disclosure may provide example apparatus, systems, and methods to detect the edge position of a print media within a printing apparatus and/or adjust the printing apparatus when it is detected that a laser travel path associated with the printing apparatus overlaps or extends from the edge portion of the print media. As such, various embodiments of the present disclosure may guide and guard the laser beam emitted from the print head engine to ensure that the laser beam is directed only to the printable area of the print media, and may present a safety hazard due to laser printing outside the edge of the print media. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 59A  and  FIG. 59B , an example portion of an example printing apparatus  5900  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is illustrated. In particular,  FIG. 59A  illustrates an example top view of the example portion of the example printing apparatus  5900 .  FIG. 59B  illustrates an example cross-sectional view of the example printing apparatus  5900  along the cut line A-A′ and viewing in the direction of the arrows in  FIG. 59A . 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 59A , an example section associated with an example bottom chassis portion of the example printing apparatus  5900  is illustrated. In this example, a print media  5919  may travel on the bottom chassis portion. The print media  5919  may travel along a media path at the travel direction  5921 . 
     The print media  5919  may comprise a printable portion  5915  and a non-printable portion  5917 . For example, the printable portion  5915  may correspond to the label portion described above, while the non-printable portion  5917  may correspond to the label liner portion described above. In the example shown in  FIG. 59A , the printable portion  5915  may correspond to a center portion of the print media  5919  while the non-printable portion  5917  may correspond to an edge portion of the print media  5919 . 
     As described above, when a laser beam is emitted to a non-printable portion  5917  of the print media, the laser beam may be reflected from the non-printable portion  5917 , causing safety hazards. As such, it is important to detect the edge position of the print media so as to prevent the laser beam from being emitted to the non-printable portion  5917 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 59B , an example cross-sectional view is provided. In the example shown in  FIG. 59B , an example media guard bar  5903  and an example media guard bar  5905  may be disposed on a top surface  5901  of the example bottom chassis portion. In some embodiments, one of the media guard bars may be fixed on the top surface  5901 , while the other of the media guard bars may be moveable on the top surface  5901 . For example, the position of the media guard bar  5903  may be fixed on the top surface  5901 , while the position of the media guard bar  5905  may be adjustable. In some embodiments, the print media  5919  travels between the example media guard bar  5903  and the example media guard bar  5905 . In some embodiments, the fixed media guard bar (for example, the media guard bar  5903 ) may be aligned at the starting position of the print media, while the position of the adjustable media guard bar (for example, the media guard bar  5905 ) may be adjusted based on the width of the print media. In some embodiments, the central axis B-B′ of the media guard bar  5903  and the media guard bar  5905 , as shown in  FIG. 59A , is in a perpendicular arrangement with the travel direction  5921  of the print media  5919 . In some embodiments, the central axis B-B′ of the media guard bar  5903  and the media guard bar  5905 , as shown in  FIG. 59A , is in a parallel arrangement with the laser printing direction, as described above. 
     Continuing with reference to the example shown in  FIG. 59B , an example media sensor holding bar  5907  may be disposed on a surface of the example media guard bar  5903 . For example, the example media sensor holding bar  5907  may be disposed on the side surface that faces the print media  5919  and may be positioned above the print media  5919 . In some embodiments, a central axis of the example media sensor holding bar  5907  may be in a perpendicular arrangement with the central axis of the example media guard bar  5903 . 
     Similarly, an example media sensor holding bar  5909  may be disposed on a surface of the example media guard bar  5905 . For example, the example media sensor holding bar  5909  may be disposed on the side surface that faces the print media  5919  and may be positioned above the print media  5919 . In some embodiments, a central axis of the example media sensor holding bar  5909  may be in a perpendicular arrangement with the central axis of the example media guard bar  5905 . 
     Continuing with reference to the example shown in  FIG. 59B , an example media sensor  5911  may be disposed on a surface of the example media sensor holding bar  5907 . For example, the example media sensor  5911  may be disposed on a bottom surface of the example media sensor holding bar  5907  facing the example print media  5919 . In some embodiments, the example media sensor  5911  may be configured to emit a first ultraviolet (UV) light on the print media  5919  and may detect a level of light reflected from the print media  5919 . In some embodiments, the media sensor  5911  may be configured to detect the UV reactive coating on the print media, similar to those described above. 
     Similarly, an example media sensor  5913  may be disposed on a surface of the example media sensor holding bar  5909 . For example, the example media sensor  5913  may be disposed on a bottom surface of the example media sensor holding bar  5909  facing the example print media  5919 . In some embodiments, the example media sensor  5913  may be configured to emit a first ultraviolet (UV) light on the print media  5919  and may detect a level of light reflected from the print media  5919 . In some embodiments, the media sensor  5913  may be configured to detect the UV reactive coating on the print media, similar to those described above. 
     In some embodiments, each of the example media sensors may be moveable along the bottom surface of the media sensor holding bar. For example, the example media sensor  5911  may be attached to a sliding guard that travels along a sliding rail disposed on the bottom surface of the media sensor holding bar  5907 . In some embodiments, the movement of the media sensor  5911  may be controlled by a motor, and the media sensor  5911  may travel in the direction  5923  that is in a perpendicular arrangement with the travel direction of the print media  5919 . Similarly, the example media sensor  5913  may be attached to a sliding guard that travels along a sliding rail disposed on the bottom surface of the media sensor holding bar  5909 . In some embodiments, the movement of the media sensor  5913  may be controlled by a motor, and the media sensor  5913  may travel in the directions  5925  that is in a perpendicular arrangement with the travel direction  5921  of the print media  5919 . 
     In some embodiments, as the print media  5919  travels along the travel direction  5921 , the example media sensor  5911  and the example media sensor  5913  may move along its respective path to detect the edge positions of the print media  5919  and are determined. For example, the example media sensor  5911  is configured to detect a first media edge of the print media  5919  based on the first reflected light from the print media  5919 , and the example media sensor  5913  is configured to detect a second media edge of the print media  5919  based on the second reflected light from the print media  5919 . Additional details associated with determining the media edges are described in connection with at least  FIG. 60 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 60 , an example method  6000  is illustrated. In particular, the example method  6000  illustrates example steps/operations of determining the edge positions of an example print media associated with an example printing apparatus. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 60 , the example method  6000  starts at block  6002  and then proceeds to step/operation  6004 . At step/operation  6004 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may detect a first media edge of a print media. 
     In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may be electrically coupled to a media sensor, such as, but not limited to, the example media sensor  5911  described above in connection with  FIG. 59A  and  FIG. 59B . In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may trigger the media sensor to emit a UV light onto the print media, and the media sensor may detect the amount of light reflected from the print media. In some embodiments, the amount of light reflected from a printable portion of the print media (for example, a center portion of the print media such as an example label) may be different from (for example, less than or more than) the amount of light reflected from a non-printable portion of the print media (for example, an edge portion of the print media such as an example label liner). 
     In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may trigger the example media sensor to continuously move on the bottom surface of its corresponding media sensor holding bar until the amount of reflected light received by the example media sensor corresponds to the amount of reflected light from a non-printable portion of the print media. Once the amount of reflected light received by the example media sensor corresponds to the amount of reflected light from a non-printable portion, the media sensor may detect the first media edge of the print media. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 60 , subsequent to step/operation  6004 , the method  5600  proceeds to step/operation  6006 . At step/operation  6006 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may determine a first media edge position. 
     In some embodiments, based on the length that the media sensor traveled until detecting the first media edge, the processing circuitry may determine a corresponding position of the first media edge. 
     For example, the media sensor  5911  described above in connection with  FIG. 59A  and  FIG. 59B  may start at a position (0, 0, 0) and travel 5 millimeters horizontally and away from the print media until the edge is detected. In this example, the processing circuitry determines that that first edge of the print media is at (−5 mm, 0, 0). 
     Referring back to  FIG. 60 , subsequent to step/operation  6006 , the method  6000  proceeds to step/operation  6008 . At step/operation  6008 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may compare the laser travel path with the first media edge position to determine whether the laser travel path overlaps with the first media edge position. 
     As described above, the laser travel path of an example laser beam may begin from a print head engine and end on the surface print media. As an example, the laser travel path may begin at position (−5 mm, 0, 5 mm) and end at position (−5 mm, 0, 0). In this example, the laser travel path may overlap with the edge position (−5 mm, 0, 0). As another example, the laser travel path may begin at position (3 mm, 5 mm, 5 mm) and end at position (3 mm, 5 mm, 0). In this example, the laser travel path does not overlap with the edge position (−5 mm, 0, 0). 
     Referring back to  FIG. 60 , subsequent to block  6002 , the method  6000  proceeds to step/operation  6010 . At step/operation  6010 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may detect a second media edge of a print media. 
     In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may be electrically coupled to a media sensor, such as, but not limited to, the example media sensor  5913  described above in connection with  FIG. 59A  and  FIG. 59B . In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may trigger the media sensor to emit a UV light onto the print media, and the media sensor may detect the amount of light reflected from the print media. As described above, the amount of light reflected from a printable portion of the print media (for example, a center portion of the print media such as an example label) may be different from the amount of light reflected from a non-printable portion of the print media (for example, an edge portion of the print media such as an example label liner). 
     In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may trigger the example media sensor to continuously move on the bottom surface of its corresponding media sensor holding bar until the amount of reflected light received by the example media sensor corresponds to the amount of reflected light from a non-printable portion of the print media. Once the amount of reflected light received by the example media sensor corresponds to the amount of reflected light from a non-printable portion, the media sensor may detect the second media edge of the print media. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 60 , subsequent to step/operation  6010 , the method  6000  proceeds to step/operation  6012 . At step/operation  6012 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may determine a second media edge position. 
     In some embodiments, based on the length that the media sensor traveled until detecting the second media edge, the processing circuitry may determine a corresponding position of the second media edge. 
     For example, the media sensor  5913  described above in connection with  FIG. 59A  and  FIG. 59B  may start at a position (0, 0, 0) and travel 5 millimeters on the horizontal plane and away from the print media until the edge is detected. In this example, the processing circuitry determines that that second edge of the print media is at (5 mm, 0, 0). 
     Referring back to  FIG. 60 , subsequent to step/operation  6012 , the method  6000  proceeds to step/operation  6014 . At step/operation  6014 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may compare the laser travel path with the second media edge position to determine whether the laser travel path overlaps with the second media edge position. 
     As described above, the laser travel path of an example laser beam may begin from a print head engine and ends on the surface print media. As an example, the laser travel path may begin at position (5 mm, 0, 5 mm) and end at position (5 mm, 0, 0). In this example, the laser travel path may overlap with the edge position (5 mm, 0, 0). As another example, the laser travel path may begin at position (3 mm, 5 mm, 5 mm) and end at position (3 mm, 5 mm, 0). In this example, the laser travel path does not overlap with the edge position (5 mm, 0, 0). 
     Referring back to  FIG. 60 , subsequent to step/operation  6008  and step/operation  6014 , the method  6000  proceeds to step/operation  6016 . At step/operation  6016 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may determine whether a laser travel path associated with a laser subsystem of the printing apparatus overlaps with at least one of the first media edge positions or the second media edge positions. 
     If, at step/operation  6016 , the processing circuitry determines that the laser travel path overlaps with one of the first media edge positions or the second media edge positions, the method  6000  proceeds to step/operation  6018 . At step/operation  6018 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may execute protective operations. 
     In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may cause the laser subsystem to be turned off. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 60 , subsequent to step/operation  6018 , the method  6000  proceeds to block  6020  and ends. 
     If, at step/operation  6016 , the processing circuitry determines that the laser travel path does not overlap with any one of the first media edge positions or the second media edge positions, the method  6000  proceeds to block  6020  and ends. 
     Print Media Height Limiter 
     As described above, various embodiments of the present disclosure may provide an example printing apparatus that utilizes laser technology for printing. In order to achieve the desired print quality and throughput, there is a need to manage and/or control the print media that is provided to the example printing apparatus. In particular, different types of print media may have different characteristics and requirements associated with laser printing, and/or corresponding method(s) of addressing issues in the example printing apparatus. 
     For example, certain types of print media may easily be curled-up and/or buckled during the processing circuitry (especially when the print media is near the end of the print media roll), which reduces the flatness of the print media and the quality of laser printing. As such, controlling the flatness of the print media during laser printing can be one of the key challenges. 
     As described above, an example printing apparatus may comprise a top chassis portion and a bottom chassis portion. In some embodiments, the print head engine may be mounted on the bottom surface of the top chassis portion, and the print media may travel on the top surface of the bottom chassis portion. 
     In some embodiments, the top chassis portion and the bottom chassis portion may be coupled through a latch. In some embodiments, the bottom chassis portion may be designed with a downward opening mechanism (for example, pivotally rotating around the central axis of the latch). In some embodiments, the distance tolerance between bottom surface of the top chassis portion and the top surface of the bottom chassis portion may be higher than the +/−0.05-millimeter maximum toleration that enables optimum printing quality. In some embodiments, a large gap may occur between the bottom surface of the top chassis portion and the top surface of the bottom chassis portion, which may impact the laser focal option and affect the print quality. In some embodiments, a narrow gap (or no gap) may occur between the bottom surface of the top chassis portion and the top surface of the bottom chassis portion, which may cause jamming of the print media. 
     Various embodiments of the present disclosure may overcome the above-referenced technical challenges. For example, various example embodiments of the present disclosure may achieve good and desirable print quality through proper media management that controls the media flatness for various media sizes and types. For example, an example height limiter panel and an example height limiter groove can be integrated within the printing apparatus and provide for raster mode printing. Various embodiments of the present disclosure may achieve the controlled media flatness without creating unnecessary media flow (or movement) disruption or causing potential risks of media curl-up (buckle) that may lead to media jam inside the printing apparatus. Additionally, or alternatively, an example biasing mechanism comprising a spring element may eliminate and/or reduce the tolerance of the distance between the top surface of the bottom chassis portion and the bottom surface of the top chassis portion. Additionally, or alternatively, example rib elements in accordance with examples of the present disclosure may control the distance between the top surface of the bottom chassis portion and the bottom surface of the top chassis portion. As such, various embodiments of the present disclosure may achieve the desired distance between the top surface of the bottom chassis portion and the bottom surface of the top chassis portion of 0.4 mm with a tolerance of +/−0.05 mm. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 61A ,  FIG. 61B , and  FIG. 61C , various example views associated with example portions of an example printing apparatus  6100  are illustrated. In particular,  FIG. 61A  illustrates an example perspective view of the example printing apparatus  6100 .  FIG. 61B  illustrates an example cross-sectional view of the example printing apparatus  6100  along the cut line A-A′ and viewing in the direction of the arrows in  FIG. 61A .  FIG. 61C  illustrates an example zoomed view of the example portion  6127  shown in  FIG. 61B . 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 61A , a section of an example bottom chassis portion  6101  is illustrated. Similar to the various example bottom chassis portions described above, the example bottom chassis portion  6101  defines a platform  6115  that may correspond to a region on which the print media is received and travels along a print path for printing operation. 
     For example, one or more rollers (such as, but not limited to, an example roller  6117 ) may be disposed on or embedded in the platform  6115 . As the print media travels on the rollers, the rollers may rotate. Due to the friction between the roller surface and the print media, the rotational force of the rollers may be translated into forward motion of the print media. As such, the print media may travel along a media path at a print direction  6119 . In some embodiments, the print direction  6119  of the print media may be in a perpendicular arrangement with an axis along the width of the platform  6115 . 
     In some embodiments, the example bottom chassis portion  6101  comprises an example height limiter panel  6103 . In some embodiments, the example height limiter panel  6103  may be disposed along a width of the platform  6115 . For example, a central axis B-B′ along the width of the example height limiter panel  6103  may be in a parallel arrangement with an axis along the width of the platform  6115 . Additionally, or alternatively, the central axis B-B′ along the width of the example height limiter panel  6103  may be in a perpendicular arrangement with the print direction  6119 . 
     While the description above provides an example arrangement of the height limiter panel, it is noted that the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the description above. In some examples, an example height limiter panel may be positioned (relatively to the print direction and/or the width of the platform) differently than those described above. 
     In some embodiments, at least one bottom rib element may protrude from a top surface of the example height limiter panel. In some embodiments, a first bottom rib element and a second bottom rib element may protrude from the top surface of the height limiter panel. In some embodiments, a print media travels between the first bottom rib element and the second bottom rib element. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 61A , a first bottom rib element  6105  and a second bottom rib element  6107  may protrude from the top surface of the example height limiter panel  6103 . The print media may travel between the first bottom rib element  6105  and the second bottom rib element  6107 . As such, the width of the example height limiter panel  6103  may be larger than the width of the print media. 
     While the description above provides an example of two bottom rib elements, it is noted that the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the description above. In some examples, less than two or more than two bottom rib elements may protrude from the surface of the example height limiter panel. 
     Similar to the various example bottom chassis portions described above, the example bottom chassis portion  6101  may be positioned under a top chassis portion of the example printing apparatus. Referring now to  FIG. 61B , the example printing apparatus  6100  comprises an example top chassis portion  6109  and the example bottom chassis portion  6101 . As shown, the example printing apparatus  6100  is in a closed state, and the bottom chassis portion  6101  may be positioned under the top chassis portion  6109 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 61C , in some embodiments, the example top chassis portion  6109  comprises a height limiter groove  6111 . In particular, when the example printing apparatus is in a closed position, the height limiter groove  6111  on the top chassis portion  6109  may correspond to the height limiter panel  6103  on the bottom chassis portion  6101 . 
     In some embodiments, at least one top rib element protrudes from a bottom surface of the height limiter groove. Referring now to the example shown in  FIG. 61C , the example top rib element  6113  protrudes from a bottom surface of the height limiter groove  6111 . 
     In some embodiments, a distance between a top surface of one of the at least one bottom rib element and a bottom surface of one of the at least one top rib element is 0.4 millimeters. For example, the distance H between a top surface of the second bottom rib element  6107  and a bottom surface of the top rib element  6113  is 0.4 millimeters. As such, the distance H may enable the printing apparatus to achieve optimum flatness. 
     In some embodiments, a biasing mechanism may be disposed on a bottom surface of the height limiter panel. In some embodiments, the biasing mechanism comprises a supporting beam and a spring element. In some embodiments, the supporting beam is disposed on the bottom surface of the height limiter panel. 
     Referring now to the example shown in  FIG. 61A  and  FIG. 61B , the example biasing mechanism  6121  is illustrated. As shown, the example biasing mechanism  6121  may comprise a supporting beam  6125  and a spring element  6123 . As shown in  FIG. 61C , the supporting beam  6125  is disposed on a bottom surface of the height limiter panel  6103 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 62A  and  FIG. 62B , various example views associated with example portions of an example printing apparatus  6200  are illustrated. In particular,  FIG. 62A  illustrates an example top view of the example printing apparatus  6200 .  FIG. 62B  illustrates an example perspective view of the example portion  6202  shown in  FIG. 62B . 
     In some embodiments, the bottom chassis portion further comprises a fixed panel. In some embodiments, a plurality of locking rib elements protrude from a side surface of the height limiter panel. In some embodiments, a plurality of locking groove elements protrudes from a side surface of the fixed panel. In some embodiments, the height limiter panel is secured to the fixed panel through the plurality of locking rib elements and the plurality of locking groove elements. 
     For example, with reference to the example shown in  FIG. 62A  and  FIG. 62B , the example bottom chassis portion  6204  comprises a fixed panel  6206  and a height limiter panel  6208 . As shown, a plurality of locking rib elements (such as, but not limited to, locking rib element  6210 ) protrude from a side surface of the height limiter panel  6208 . A plurality of locking groove elements (such as, but not limited to, locking groove element  6212 ) are disposed on a side surface of the fixed panel  6206 . In some embodiments, the height limiter panel  6208  is secured to the fixed panel  6206  through the plurality of locking rib elements (such as, but not limited to, locking rib element  6210 ) and the plurality of locking groove elements (such as, but not limited to, locking groove element  6212 ). 
     Referring now to  FIG. 63A  and  FIG. 63B , various example views associated with example portions of an example printing apparatus  6300  are illustrated. In particular,  FIG. 63A  illustrates an example cross-sectional view of the example printing apparatus  6300 .  FIG. 63B  illustrates an example perspective view of the example portion  6301  shown in  FIG. 63A . 
     In particular, as shown in  FIG. 63A , the example printing apparatus  6300  is in an open state, and the bottom chassis portion  6303  is not secured to the top chassis portion  6313 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 63B , the example biasing mechanism  6305  may be disposed on a bottom surface of the height limiter panel  6307 . In some embodiments, the biasing mechanism  6305  may comprise a supporting beam  6309  and a spring element  6311 . In some embodiments, the supporting beam  6309  is disposed on the bottom surface of the height limiter panel  6307 . In some embodiments, a first end of the spring element  6311  is secured to the supporting beam  6309  and a second end of the spring element  6311  is secured to the bottom surface of the height limiter panel  6307 . 
     Referring again to  FIG. 20 , an example printing apparatus may comprise a laser print head  302  having one or more laser sources that are configured to facilitate direct printing, using one or more laser beams emanating from one or more laser sources, of content on print media. As depicted in  FIG. 20 , the laser print head  302  comprises an SOL detector  2004 , a laser power control system  2006 , a laser subsystem control unit and I/O device interface unit  2012 , and a synchronization unit  2016 . Each of the SOL detector  2004 , laser power control system  2006 , laser subsystem control unit and I/O device interface unit  2012  and synchronization unit  2016  of the laser print head  302  may be configured to perform one or more operations of the example printing apparatus. As such, the laser print head  302  can control one or more operations of one or more components (e.g., laser sources) electronically coupled with and/or in electronic communication with the laser print head  302 . While some of the embodiments herein provide an example laser print head, as described in connection with  FIG. 20 , it is noted that the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For example, in some examples, a laser print head in accordance with the present disclosure may be in other forms. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 64 , a schematic diagram depicting an example laser print head controller  6400  in electronic communication with various other components in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. As shown, the laser print head controller  6400  comprises processing circuitry  6401 , a communication module  6403 , input/output module  6405 , a memory  6407  and/or other components configured to perform various operations, procedures, functions, or the like described herein. 
     As shown, the laser print head controller  6400  (such as the processing circuitry  6401 , communication module  6403 , input/output module  6405  and memory  6407 ) is electrically coupled to and/or in electronic communication with one or more laser sources  6409 , one or more sensors  6411 , an optical assembly  6413  and a print media assembly  6415 . The laser print head controller  6400  may also be electrically coupled to and/or in electronic communication with other components of the example printing apparatus, including the control unit  138  described above in connection with  FIG. 27 . As depicted, each of the communication module  6403 , input/output module  6405  and memory  6407  may exchange (e.g., transmit and receive) data with the processing circuitry  6401  of the laser print head controller  6400 . 
     The processing circuitry  6401  may be implemented as, for example, various devices comprising one or a plurality of microprocessors with accompanying digital signal processors; one or a plurality of processors without accompanying digital signal processors; one or a plurality of coprocessors; one or a plurality of multi-core processors; one or a plurality of controllers; processing circuits; one or a plurality of computers; and various other processing elements (including integrated circuits, such as ASICs or FPGAs, or a certain combination thereof). In some embodiments, the processing circuitry  6401  may comprise one or more processors. In one exemplary embodiment, the processing circuitry  6401  is configured to execute instructions stored in the memory  6407  or otherwise accessible by the processing circuitry  6401 . When executed by the processing circuitry  6401 , these instructions may enable the laser print head controller  6400  to execute one or a plurality of the functions as described herein. No matter whether it is configured by hardware, firmware/software methods, or a combination thereof, the processing circuitry  6401  may comprise entities capable of executing operations, according to the embodiments of the present invention when correspondingly configured. Therefore, for example, when the processing circuitry  6401  is implemented as an ASIC, an FPGA, or the like, the processing circuitry  6401  may comprise specially configured hardware for implementing one or a plurality of operations described herein. Alternatively, as another example, when the processing circuitry  6401  is implemented as an actuator of instructions (such as those that may be stored in the memory  6407 ), the instructions may specifically configure the processing circuitry  6401  to execute one or a plurality of algorithms and operations, according to the embodiments of the present disclosure. 
     The memory  6407  may comprise, for example, a volatile memory, a non-volatile memory, or a certain combination thereof. Although illustrated as a single memory in  FIG. 3 , the memory  6407  may comprise a plurality of memory components. In various embodiments, the memory  6407  may comprise, for example, a hard disk drive, a random access memory, a cache memory, a flash memory, a Compact Disc Read-Only Memory (CD-ROM), a Digital Versatile Disk Read-Only Memory (DVD-ROM), an optical disk, a circuit configured to store information, or a certain combination thereof. The memory  6407  may be configured to store information, data, application programs, instructions, and etc., so that the laser print head controller  6400  can execute various functions, according to the embodiments of the present disclosure. For example, in at least some embodiments, the memory  6407  is configured to cache input data for processing by the processing circuitry  6401 . Additionally, or alternatively, in at least some embodiments, the memory  6407  is configured to store program instructions for execution by the processing circuitry  6401 . The memory  6407  may store information in the form of static and/or dynamic information. When the functions are executed, the stored information may be stored and/or used by the laser print head controller  6400 . 
     The communication module  6403  may be implemented as any apparatus included in a circuit, hardware, a computer program product, or a combination thereof, which is configured to receive and/or transmit data from/to another component or apparatus. The computer program product comprises computer-readable program instructions stored on a computer-readable medium (for example, the memory  6407 ) and executed by a laser print head controller  6400  (for example, the processing circuitry  6401 ). In some embodiments, the communication module  6403  (as with other components discussed herein) may be at least partially implemented as the processing circuitry  6401  or otherwise controlled by the processing circuitry  6401 . In this regard, the communication module  6403  may communicate with the processing circuitry  6401 , for example, through a bus. The communication module  6403  may comprise, for example, antennae, transmitters, receivers, transceivers, network interface cards and/or supporting hardware and/or firmware/software and is used for establishing communication with another apparatus. The communication module  6403  may be configured to receive and/or transmit any data that may be stored by the memory  6407  by using any protocol that can be used for communication between apparatuses. The communication module  6403  may additionally or alternatively communicate with the memory  6407 , the input/output module  6405  and/or any other component of the laser print head controller  6400 , for example, through a bus. 
     In some embodiments, the laser print head controller  6400  may comprise an input/output module  6405 . The input/output module  6405  may communicate with the processing circuitry  6401  to receive instructions input by the user and/or to provide audible, visual, mechanical, or other outputs to the user. Therefore, the input/output module  6405  may be in electronic communication with supporting devices, such as a keyboard, a mouse, a display, a touch screen display, and/or other input/output mechanisms. Alternatively, at least some aspects of the input/output module  6405  may be implemented on a device used by the user to communicate with the laser print head controller  6400 . The input/output module  6405  may communicate with the memory  6407 , the communication module  6403  and/or any other component, for example, through a bus. One or a plurality of input/output modules and/or other components may be included in the laser print head controller  6400 . 
     Printing with Two Crossed High-Aspect Ratio Multi-Mode Lasers 
     In various laser printing and laser marking applications, controlling spot size and focal depth of a laser beam are important for print quality. Typically, Nd:YAG or carbon dioxide (CO 2 ) lasers are used in such systems. However, such lasers may be expensive and are not capable of operating at a switching bandwidth required to print quickly. In some embodiments of the present disclosure, various configurations of low-cost, high-power multi-mode laser diodes may be utilized to reduce product costs and achieve fast printing speeds. 
     In some examples, two crossed high-aspect-ratio lasers (e.g., multi-mode laser spots/diodes) may be utilized to provide a low-cost, high-speed print and/or marking system. In some examples, the implementation of the two crossed high-aspect-ratio laser configuration may facilitate the use of print media with media coatings having higher sensitivity threshold characteristics. 
     In general, multi-mode lasers exhibit a high-aspect beam profile where the laser energy is distributed over an elliptical area that cannot be optically focused/resolved in a circular shape in both axes. In some examples, attempting to print using a single multi-mode laser would produce a rectangular or high aspect ellipse that would not meet print quality or DPI (dots per inch) requirements. Additionally, it may be difficult to control print quality of a single-mode laser in various printing applications. Accordingly, by constructing the print head to use two multi-mode lasers (e.g., two multi-mode lasers arranged perpendicular to one another) at a lower power setting a high-power spot at the center of both beams can be generated due to the combined laser irradiance at the center of both high-aspect ratio ellipses. This output mimics a single high-power laser with a circular beam to produce a print dot that meets required specifications (e.g., print quality or DPI requirements). 
     As discussed above in connection with  FIG. 21 , the laser subsystem  2002  may include one or more laser sources  2102 , an optical assembly  2104  positioned adjacent and/or close to the one or more laser sources  2102 , a polygon mirror  2106 , and a reflective surface  2110 . The optical assembly  2104  and the one or more laser sources  2102  may operate in conjunction with the laser print head  302  to facilitate the directing of laser beams onto a print media. For example, the one or more laser sources  2102  may including suitable logic and/or circuitry that enable the one or more laser sources  2102  to generate one or more laser beams in response to receiving laser control signal(s) from the laser print head  302 /laser print head controller. 
     In some examples, a plurality of laser sources (e.g., multi-mode lasers) may be provided. In some examples, two multi-mode lasers may be provided and arranged in a perpendicular fashion with respect to one another. In some examples, the output of each multi-mode laser may be approximately 10 watts. 
       FIG. 65  provides an example schematic  6500  depicting laser beams generated by two laser sources in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure. 
     As depicted, an example laser print head controller (such as, but not limited to, the laser print head controller  6400  illustrated in connection with  FIG. 64 , discussed above) may cause a first laser source to generate a first laser beam  6501  and a second laser source to generate a second laser beam  6503  directed through an optical assembly  6505 . The optical assembly  6505  may be similar to the optical assembly  2104  described herein in connection with  FIG. 21 . The laser print head controller may be configured to generate one or more laser control signals in order to cause two or more laser sources to each generate a respective laser beam concurrently or in close succession (e.g., within 1-4 milliseconds of one another). In some examples, the laser print head controller may generate one or more laser control signals to cause the one or more laser sources  2102  to each generate a laser beam incident on a target location of a print media  6507  (e.g., a width or line of the print media  6507 ). 
     As noted, the first laser beam  6501  and the second laser beam  6503  may be directed onto a print media through an optical assembly  6505 . For example, the optical assembly  6505  may comprise at least a polygon mirror. The laser print head controller may cause the first laser beam  6501  and the second laser beam  6503  to sweep across a width of a print media  6507 . As depicted in  FIG. 65 , in some examples, the laser print head controller may cause the first laser beam  6501  and the second laser beam  6503  to sweep a target location (e.g., a width) of the print media  6507  such that at least a portion of the output of first laser beam  6501  and the second laser beam  6503  overlap. For example, as depicted, the output of the first laser beam  6501  and the second laser beam  6503  may generate a high-power spot at the center of both beams. For example, the output of the first laser beam  6501  and the second laser beam  6503  may be superimposed onto one another in order to impinge a mark (e.g., a dot) onto the print media  6507 . In other examples, the output of each laser beam may be directed through the optical assembly  6505 , so as to impinge a respective portion of content (e.g., marks, dots, and/or the like) onto the print media. The laser print head controller may be configured to cause a first laser source to generate a first laser beam  6501  at a first power output and a second laser source to generate a second laser beam  6503  at a second power output. As such, the power output of each respective laser source may be a configurable parameter. For example, the output of each respective laser source may be a configurable parameter corresponding with one or more printing parameters such as, for example without limitation, a print resolution. 
     Pre-Energizing Direct-Print Media with a High-Power Laser &amp; High-Frequency SM Pulsed Laser Data with Low-Frequency MM Pulsed Data for Improved Efficiency 
     In various embodiments, a high-power laser capable of generating a high-intensity laser beam may be required to impinge content onto a print media. In addition to cost implications associated therewith, laser beam quality may reduce as a result of increased power output of a laser source. 
     Although a low-quality, multi-mode laser may be unsuitable for generating a high-resolution mark, it may be utilized to supply energy to the print media up to/just before an activation threshold at which content can be impinged onto the print media (i.e., a threshold at a mark can be made). A relatively large amount of energy is needed to energize the print media up to the activation threshold and then any additional energy supplied thereafter operates to activate the “ink” and mark the print media. 
     As such, in some embodiments of the present disclosure, a combination of high-power and low-quality lasers may be utilized to sustain both high printing speeds and high-quality print resolution. By way of example, a first high-power, low-quality laser (e.g., pre-energizing laser) may be utilized for pre-energizing a target area of a print media, followed rapidly by a low or medium power, high-quality laser (e.g., writing laser/beam) to impinge content onto the print media (i.e., perform color changing operations with respect to the print media). 
     In some examples, the example pre-energizing laser may comprise a multi-mode laser. The example multi-mode laser may have multiple-transverse modes limiting the ability of the laser to focus the size of a beam in at least one dimension (e.g., x-dimension). However, in a second dimension (e.g., y-dimension), the example multi-mode laser may operate in a single-mode fashion and is capable of being focused similarly to a high-quality laser. 
     In some examples, the writing laser may comprise a single-mode laser. The example single-mode laser can be focused with accuracy in both the x-dimension and the y-dimension. Accordingly, the marking area of the pre-energizing area may be significantly larger than that of the writing laser. For example, the shape or mark generated by the pre-energizing laser may be substantially rectangular (e.g., 1 mm long and 80 μm wide with slightly rounded corners). 
     In some examples, the pre-energizing beam should be quickly followed (e.g., within 1 millisecond) by the writing beam so that the energy absorbed by the print media does not disperse prior to the writing beam being incident on the target area. In contrast with the pre-energizing laser, the mark generated by the writing laser may be substantially circular, e.g., a dot that is approximately 80 μm in diameter. In some examples, the high-quality dimension of the pre-energizing laser is oriented to the line width of the print media such that a high-resolution band matching the resolution of the writing beam is deposited prior to the writing beam being incident on the target area such that maximum energy efficiency is achieved. As the pre-energizing beam and the writing beam scan by, each beam may be selectively turned on and off only to deposit energy as required in order to conserve power and eliminate component temperate increases. By way of example, in order to print content onto a print media requiring an overall print density of approximately 30%, laser sources do not need to be left on continuously. A control algorithm may be utilized to turn on each respective laser as needed. With respect to the writing beam, a higher frequency-controlled pulsing at the rate of the actual print dots may be utilized. With respect to the pre-energizing beam, a lower frequency pulsing may be utilized such that the pre-energizing laser turns off when traversing large areas where no print is to occur. 
     As discussed above in relation to  FIG. 32 , the example printing apparatus may include means for receiving one or more configurations values. As discussed, the one or more configuration values are deterministic and/or representative of the configuration in which the print head is to operate in order to print content onto the print media. Additionally, multiple printing parameters (e.g., print speeds) may be implemented by varying rotation speed of the optical assembly, such as the polygon mirror. In some examples, a count of laser beams and/or a rotation speed of the polygon mirror may be varied. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 66 , a flowchart diagram illustrating example operations  6600  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. The operations  6600  may be performed by a laser print head controller. The laser print head controller may be similar to the laser print head controller  6400  described herein in connection with  FIG. 64 . For example, the laser print head controller may similarly comprise processing circuitry  6401 , a communication module  6403 , an input/output module  6405 , and a memory  6407 . The laser print head controller may be electrically coupled to and/or in electronic communication with various components of the printing apparatus, such as one or more laser sources  6409 , one or more sensors  6411 , an optical assembly  6413 , and a print media assembly  6415 . 
     The example method  6600  begins with step/operation  6601 . At step/operation  6601 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the processing circuitry  6401  of laser print head controller  6400  illustrated in regard to  FIG. 64 ) may, in response to receiving one or more configuration values, transmit a first laser control signal in order to cause the first laser source to generate a pre-energizing beam incident on a target location of a print media. As discussed above, the first laser source may comprise a multi-mode laser configured to supply energy to the print media up to an activation threshold at which content can be impinged onto the print media. The example first laser source may have a power output of approximately 10 watts. The high-quality dimension of the pre-energizing beam may be oriented to a line width of the print media such that the energy supplied by the pre-energizing beam is in the shape of a dash (e.g., more focused in the y-dimension than in the x-dimension). However, the energy supplied by the pre-energizing beam may not result in a visible mark on the print media. In some examples, the first laser source/pre-energizing laser may be configured to be in an off state when traversing a portion of the print media where no content is to be printed, such that it operates at a lower frequency than the second laser source/writing laser. 
     Subsequent to step/operation  6601 , the method  6600  proceeds to step/operation  6603 . At step/operation  6603 , the processing circuitry transmits a second laser control signal to cause the second laser source to generate a writing beam in incident on the target location of the print media. In various embodiments, the second laser source may be caused to generate the writing beam within 1 millisecond of the first laser source generating the pre-energizing beam. In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may transmit the second laser control signal in response to determining that a condition of the print media satisfies an activation threshold. In some embodiments, the processing circuitry may transmit a single laser control signal to cause the first laser source and the second laser source to generate a respective laser beam. As noted above, the second laser source may comprise a single-mode laser configured to supply energy to the print media above the activation threshold. The example second laser source/single-mode laser may have a power output of approximately 0.5 watts. In some examples, the writing beam may impinge a dot superimposed onto the dash impinged by the pre-energizing beam. In some examples, the first laser source may generate the pre-energizing beam at a first frequency and the second laser source may generate the writing beam at a second frequency. The first frequency may be lower than the second frequency such that the second laser source/writing beam operates to generate a plurality of pulses at a rapid, uniform frequency in order to impinge small dots onto the print media. In some examples, a resolution band of the pre-energizing beam may match a resolution band of the writing beam. 
     Perform Laser Power Compensation Utilizing Printed Grayscale Calibration Data in Printed Media 
     In various laser printing and laser marking applications, well calibrated power delivery to print media is required in order to achieve good print quality over all environmental conditions and over the operating life of the apparatus. As noted herein, print media is sensitive to the wavelength and optical power of a light source incident thereon. Both the optical power and wave wavelength of a light source may vary with temperature and due to optical transmission variation across a scan or sweep. Additionally, laser/drive circuit efficiency may change with respect to temperature and time. In some embodiments of the present disclosure, a calibration system is provided. In some examples, image data (e.g., printed media) and a correction lookup table is utilized to adjust laser power parameters. The printed media may be in the form of optical density as a function of beam sweep angle for a constant laser power output. The data may be incorporated as a lookup table or a calculated function in memory and used to scale the output power of one or more laser sources based on, for example, known polygon speed and a start-of-line pulse. 
     In some embodiments, calibration operations may occur during printing operations and with respect to a print media as required. As a result, a calibration system providing an improved print quality can be realized. For instance, the uniformity and/or accuracy of grayscale printing across an example label can be enhanced. In some examples, printed media with data/content impinged thereon contains information which can be analyzed and utilized for calibration operations. Such techniques may be used during the apparatus design or manufacturing process. For instance, a media scanner device may be used for unit calibration during the design or manufacturing process. In another example, an example printing apparatus may comprise a sensor, such as an image sensor for real-time calibration adjustment during operations. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 67 , a flowchart diagram illustrating example operations  6700  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. The operations  6700  may be performed by a laser print head controller. The laser print head controller may be similar to the laser print head controller  6400  described herein in connection with  FIG. 64 . For example, the laser print head controller may similarly comprise processing circuitry  6401 , a communication module  6403 , an input/output module  6405  and a memory  6407 . The laser print head controller may be electrically coupled to and/or in electronic communication with various components of the printing apparatus such as one or more laser sources  6409 , one or more sensors  6411 , an optical assembly  6413 , and a print media assembly  6415 . 
     The example method  6700  begins with step/operation  6701 . At step/operation  6701 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the processing circuitry  6401  of laser print head controller  6400  illustrated in regard to  FIG. 64 ) obtains data associated with a printed media. As noted, the printed media may be in the form of optical density as a function of beam sweep angle for a constant laser power output. In some examples, the data (e.g., image data) may be obtained using a media scanner device in electronic communication with the processing circuitry. In some examples, the data (e.g., image data) may be obtained using one or more sensors (such as, but not limited to, the one or more sensors  6411  in communication with the laser print head controller  6400  illustrated in regard to  FIG. 64 ). In some examples, the one or more sensors may be or comprise linear sensor(s) (e.g., linear CCD sensor(s)), optical camera(s) and/or the like. The example sensor may be coupled to the example printing apparatus. For example, an example image sensor may be arranged adjacent (e.g., downstream) with respect to a printed media such that it can capture printed media data subsequent to content being impinged onto the print media as it traverses the example printing apparatus. By way of example, with reference to  FIG. 1 , discussed herein, the one or more sensors may be located adjacent to a surface of the print head engine  122 . 
     Subsequent to step/operation  6701 , the example method  6700  proceeds to step/operation  6703 . At step/operation  6703 , the processing circuitry determines one or more required adjustments to operational parameters of the printing apparatus based on analysis of the data. For example, the processing circuitry may determine one or more operational parameters with reference to a stored correction lookup table or a calculated function in memory (such as, but not limited to, the memory  6407  of laser print head controller  6400  illustrated in regard to  FIG. 64 ). The one or more operational parameters may be or comprise print resolution parameters. For example, a print resolution may comprise a particular print density (e.g., 100% black print density, 0% print density, 10% greyscale print density, 20% greyscale print density, 30% greyscale print density, or the like). A print resolution may be associated with various operational parameters, such as laser output power, polygon mirror speed, start-of-line pulse, and/or the like. As such, the processing circuitry may utilize a stored correction lookup table or calculated function in memory to determine required adjustments/compensations to operational parameters for generating a target print resolution. By way of example, the processing circuitry may determine a required adjustment to a timing and/or power output associated with one or more laser sources of the printing apparatus. By way of example, the processing circuitry may determine, based at least in part on analysis of a printed media, that the 15% greyscale print density is darker than required. Therefore, the processing circuitry may determine that the 15% greyscale print density parameters (e.g., power output and/or timing of one or more lasers configured to impinge content at 15% greyscale print density) need to be reduced. In another example, the processing circuitry may determine, based at least in part on analysis of a printed media, that the 30% greyscale print density is lighter than required. Therefore, the processing circuitry may determine that the 30% greyscale print density parameters (e.g., power output and/or timing of one or more lasers configured to impinge content at 30% greyscale print density) need to be increased. In another example, the processing circuitry may determine, based at least in part on analysis of a printed media, that the 100% black print density is within target print quality parameters. Therefore, the processing circuitry may determine that no changes are required with respect to the 100% black print density parameters. 
     Subsequent to step/operation  6703 , the method proceeds to step/operation  6705 . At step/operation  6705 , the processing circuitry transmits a control signal to cause the laser print head to adjust one or more operational parameters of the printing apparatus. For example, the processing circuitry may cause the laser print head to adjust one or more operational parameters of the optical assembly (such as, but not limited to, the optical assembly  6413  of laser print head controller  6400  illustrated in regard to  FIG. 64 ). In some examples, the processing circuitry may cause the laser print head to adjust one or more of a laser output power, polygon mirror speed, start-of-line pulse, and/or the like. 
     Accordingly, using the above-detailed techniques, print quality issues due to variations in optical power caused by polarization and/or reflectivity characteristics of the optical assembly can be adjusted during design, manufacturing and/or in real-time during printing operations. 
     Lasing Single Print Lines Multiple Times 
     In various examples, delivery of sufficient power to a print media surface is critical for proper operation of a printing apparatus. The amount of optical power that can be delivered per laser scan or sweep is limited by the available laser power and optical system (e.g., optical assembly) losses, including less than 100% reflectivity on mirrors and less than 100% transmissivity in lenses. Additionally, minimum polygon motor operation speed is limited primarily by jitter performance. Slower polygon motor speeds result in higher jitter, which is incompatible with high precision laser imaging/printing. 
     In some embodiments, a number of required writes cycles (e.g., “N” write cycles) is a pre-determined value or integer based on, for example, a media type, a sweep rate, a required print speed and/or the like. In some examples, the laser print head/laser print head controller drives the laser sources, polygon motor, and printer platen roller in such a manner such that each horizontal print line on a surface of the print media is impinged (i.e., printed) “N” times. In some examples, adjacent polygon facets may be selectively used to facilitate the fastest possible printing. Any pyramidal error may be compensated for using wobble-correction optics, and any facet to facet angular error may be compensated for by adjusting laser timing. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 68 , a flowchart diagram illustrating example operations  6800  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. The operations  6800  may be performed by a laser print head controller. The laser print head controller may be similar to the laser print head controller  6400  described herein in connection with  FIG. 64 . For example, the laser print head controller may similarly comprise processing circuitry  6401 , a communication module  6403 , an input/output module  6405  and a memory  6407 . The laser print head controller may be electrically coupled to and/or in electronic communication with various components of the printing apparatus such as one or more laser sources  6409 , one or more sensors  6411 , an optical assembly  6413  and a print media assembly  6415 . 
     The example method  6800  begins with step/operation  6801 . At step/operation  6801 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the processing circuitry  6401  of laser print head controller  6400  illustrated in regard to  FIG. 64 ) determines a required number of write cycles with respect to particular data/content to be printed by the printing apparatus. As noted above, the number of write cycles may be determined based at least in part on a media type, a sweep rate and a required print speed. The number of write cycles may be a value or integer (e.g., “N”) corresponding to a number of laser source iterations required to impinge/print the content. 
     Subsequent to step/operation  6801 , the method  6800  proceeds to step/operation  6803 . At step/operation  6803 , the processing circuitry transmits a control signal to the print media assembly to control the traversal of the print media. In some examples, the laser print head controller may transmit a control signal to cause the print media assembly to stop or adjust a traversal speed of the print media. 
     Subsequent to step/operation  6803 , the method  6800  proceeds to step/operation  6805 . At step/operation  6805 , the processing circuitry transmits a laser control signal to cause the one or more laser sources to perform the plurality of write cycles by generating one or more laser beams incident on the print media such that content is impinged onto a print media. Additionally, in some examples, adjacent polygon facets of the optical assembly may be selectively used to optimize print speed. 
     In some embodiments, the print media assembly may be in a fixed position while the one or more lasers impinge content thereon. In some embodiments, the print media assembly may operate to resume traversal of the print media, such as from a first width of the print media to a second width of the print media subsequent to content being impinged in an area corresponding with the first width. In some examples, the one or more laser sources may generate one or more laser beams incident on the print media while the print media traverses the printing apparatus. In another example, performing the plurality of write cycles may comprise sequentially sweeping a first portion of a first print media width. In some examples, subsequent to sequentially sweeping the first portion of the first print media width, a second portion of a second print media width may be scanned or swept. By way of example, the scan line of a laser beam may sweep at a rate such that the print media traverses a fraction of a dot. For instance, one or more laser beams may sweep a number of times (e.g., 10 times) during a time duration within which the print media traverses from a first width or line to a second width or line. 
     In some embodiments, prior to causing the one or more lasers to perform the pre-determined number of write cycles, the processing circuitry may transmit a control signal to cause the print media assembly to stop traversal of the print media. Then, the processing circuitry may transmit a laser control signal to cause one or more lasers to perform the pre-determined number of write cycles. Upon completion of the plurality of write cycles, the processing circuitry may transmit another control signal to cause the print media assembly to start (i.e., resume) traversal of the print media. 
     Subsequent to step/operation  6805 , the method  6800  proceeds to step/operation  6807 . At step/operation  6807 , the processing circuitry transmits a control signal to cause the optical assembly to implement wobble-correction optics. As noted above, wobble-correction optics may be used to compensate for pyramidal error while facet to facet angular error may be compensated for by adjusting a timing of one or more lasers. Accordingly, by combining print media assembly and optical assembly control techniques, an example printing apparatus can produce high quality printed media that is also effective on print media with media coatings having higher sensitivity threshold characteristics. 
     Laser Spot Shaping Beam Delivery System 
     In many examples, a laser source/diode may have variable beam divergence that is not precisely controlled. Additionally, a laser source/diode may produce beams with elliptical cross sections. By way of example, the output of an example single mode laser source/diode (i.e., a laser beam shape) may diverge between 33 and 40 degrees. In another example, the output of an example multi-mode laser source/diode may diverge between 8 and 12 degrees. This variability translates to an inability to accurately control an output of a laser source/diode resulting in product variability and inconsistent performance. In some cases, a laser beam output/shape may be controlled by providing an aperture in front of the beam to truncate a portion of the laser beam output to a target size/shape. However, in situations where limited power is available (e.g., a lower power laser source/diode) using an aperture results in inefficiency and wastage of power. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 69 , an example schematic diagram depicting an optical assembly  6900  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. In various examples, the optical assembly  6900  may be configured to control or condition a laser beam (e.g., collimate, circularize and/or focus a laser beam). As depicted in  FIG. 69 , the optical assembly  6900  comprises a collimating component  6901 , a beam control component  6903  and a focusing component  6905 . 
     As depicted in  FIG. 69 , the optical assembly  6900  comprises a collimating component  6901  configured to collimate an output of a laser source (e.g., control a resolution of a laser beam in a cross-scan dimension). In various examples, the collimating component  6901  may be or comprise one or more pluralities of lenses (e.g., one or more groups of lenses). The optical assembly  6900  may be configured to operate with various types of laser sources/diodes, such as, but not limited to, a multi-mode laser, a single-mode laser, or the like. In some examples, the collimating component  6901  may be removably attached to or otherwise connected/coupled to an example laser assembly (e.g., comprising a laser source) so as to collimate an output (i.e., laser beam(s)) generated by the laser assembly. For example, at least one surface of the collimating component  6901  may be disposed adjacent to at least a surface of an example laser assembly. 
     As noted above, and as depicted in  FIG. 69 , the optical assembly  6900  comprises a beam control component  6903 . As shown in some examples, at least a surface of the beam control component  6903  is disposed adjacent to a surface of the collimating component  6901  such that a laser beam can traverse the collimating component  6901  to reach the beam control component  6903 . As depicted, the beam control component  6903  comprises a pair of prisms  6902  and  6904  (e.g., an anamorphic prism pair) configured to modify a dimension of a laser beam along one axis. For example, the beam control component  6903  may operate to modify the shape of a laser beam by adjusting angles between a laser beam and the example pair of prisms. In various examples, the beam control component  6903  may operate to modify an aspect ratio associated with a laser beam. For example, the beam control component  6903  may operate to modify an elliptical beam shape generated by a laser source into a circular beam shape. In various examples, the size of a laser beam may be reduced or expanded based on an angular relative position of the pair of prisms. In various examples, as depicted, the example beam control component  6903  comprises a control pin  6906  for simultaneously adjusting relative positions of the pair of prisms  6902  and  6904 . 
     As noted above, and as depicted in  FIG. 69 , the optical assembly  6900  comprises a focusing component  6905  configured to direct an output (e.g., laser beam) of the optical assembly  6900  within an example printing apparatus (e.g., direct a laser beam to be incident on a print media). As shown in some examples, at least a surface of the focusing component  6905  may be disposed adjacent to a surface of the beam control component  6903  such that a laser beam traverses the beam control component  6903  to reach the focusing component  6905 . In some examples, the focusing component  6905  may comprise one or more mirrors. 
     While some of the embodiments herein provide an example optical assembly  6900 , it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For instance, in some examples, optical assembly  6900  in accordance with the present disclosure may comprise other elements, one or more additional and/or alternative elements, and/or may be structured/positioned differently than that illustrated in  FIG. 69 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 70 , an example schematic diagram depicting a cross-sectional view of a collimating component  7000  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. In various examples, the collimating component  7000  may be configured to collimate an output of a laser source (i.e., laser beams). For example, the collimating component  7000  may be configured to control a resolution of a laser beam in a cross-scan dimension. At least a surface of the collimating component  7000  may be disposed adjacent to at least a surface of an example laser assembly so as to collimate an output (i.e., laser beam(s)) generated by the laser assembly. The example collimating component  7000  may be configured to collimate an output of a multi-mode laser (e.g., in some examples, with a beam divergence variability between 8 and 12 degrees). In some examples, the collimating component  7000  may operate to focus the cross scan to approximately 1000 DPI in the cross-scan dimension. 
     In some examples, as depicted, the collimating component  7000  may be or comprise a cylindrical member (e.g., barrel) containing at least one plurality of lenses. As depicted in  FIG. 70 , the example collimating component  7000  comprises a housing  7002 , a first plurality of lenses  7001  and a second plurality of lenses  7003 . In various embodiments, the first plurality of lenses  7001  and the second plurality of lenses  7003  may be at least partially disposed within the housing  7002  of the collimating component  7000 . 
     As depicted in  FIG. 70 , the example collimating component  7000  comprises a housing  7002 . The example housing  7002  may be or comprised of a metal or any other suitable material. 
     As depicted in  FIG. 70 , the collimating component  7000  comprises a first plurality of lenses  7001 . In some examples, the first plurality of lenses  7001  may be disposed within and/or define a first end portion of the collimating component  7000  (e.g., adjacent an example laser assembly). As depicted, the first plurality of lenses  7001  comprises three spherical lenses configured to move independently in relation to the second plurality of lenses  7003 . Each spherical lens may comprise glass or a similar material. Each spherical lens may be or comprise a Fast-Axis Collimator (FAC). The example collimating component  7000  may operate to output a laser beam within a particular divergence range (e.g., 10×10 degrees Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM)). The example first plurality of lenses  7001  may be configured to tolerate a laser chip offset of plus or minus 0.1 mm. Accordingly, the first plurality of lenses  7001  may operate to control a resolution in a cross-scan dimension of a laser beam (e.g., a pre-energizing laser beam). 
     As depicted in  FIG. 70 , the collimating component  7000  comprises a second plurality of lenses  7003 . In some examples, the second plurality of lenses  7003  may be disposed within and/or define a second end portion of the collimating component  7000  (e.g., remote from an example laser assembly). Thus, an example laser beam may travel from an example laser assembly to the first plurality of lenses  7001  and subsequently reach the second plurality of lenses  7003 . As depicted, the second plurality of lenses  7001  comprises two spherical lenses configured to move independently in relation to the first plurality of lenses  7003 . Each spherical lens may comprise glass or a similar material. Each spherical lens may be or comprise a Fast-Axis Collimator (FAC). The example second plurality of lenses  7003  may be configured to tolerate a laser chip offset of plus or minus 0.1 mm. Accordingly, the second plurality of lenses  7003  may also operate to control a resolution in a cross-scan dimension of a laser beam (e.g., a pre-energizing laser beam). Subsequent to reaching the second plurality of lenses  7003 , the example laser beam may then enter another component of the optical assembly/printing apparatus (e.g., an example focusing component). 
     While some of the embodiments herein provide an example collimating component  7000 , it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For instance, in some examples, a collimating component  7000  in accordance with the present disclosure may comprise other elements, one or more additional and/or alternative elements, and/or may be structured/positioned differently than that illustrated in  FIG. 70 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 71 , an example schematic diagram depicting a cross-sectional view of a collimating component  7100  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. In various examples, the collimating component  7100  may be configured to collimate an output of a laser source (i.e., laser beams). For example, the collimating component  7100  may be configured to control a resolution of a laser beam in a cross-scan dimension. At least a surface of the collimating component  7100  may be disposed adjacent to at least a surface of an example laser assembly so as to collimate an output (i.e., laser beam(s)) generated by the laser assembly. The example collimating component  7100  may be configured to collimate an output of a single-mode laser (e.g., in some examples, with a beam divergence variability between 33 and 40 degrees). In some examples, the collimating component  7100  may operate to focus the cross-scan to approximately 1000 DPI in the cross-scan dimension. 
     In some examples, the collimating component  7100  may be or comprise a cylindrical member containing at least one plurality of lenses. The example housing  7002  may be or comprise a metal or any other suitable material. As depicted in  FIG. 71 , the example collimating component  7100  comprises a housing  7002 , a first plurality of lenses  7101  and a second plurality of lenses  7103 . In various embodiments, the first plurality of lenses  7101  and the second plurality of lenses  7103  may be at least partially disposed within the housing  7102  of the collimating component  7100 . 
     As depicted in  FIG. 71 , the collimating component  7100  comprises a first plurality of lenses  7101 . In some examples, the first plurality of lenses  7101  may be disposed within and/or define a first end portion of the collimating component  7100  (e.g., adjacent an example laser assembly). As depicted, the first plurality of lenses  7101  comprises three spherical lenses configured to move independently in relation to the second plurality of lenses  7103 . Each spherical lens may comprise glass or a similar material. Each spherical lens may be or comprise a Fast-Axis Collimator (FAC). The example collimating component  7100  may operate to output a laser beam within a particular divergence range (e.g., 35×5 degrees FWHM). The example first plurality of lenses  7101  may be configured to tolerate a laser chip offset of plus or minus 0.1 mm. Accordingly, the first plurality of lenses  7101  may operate to control a resolution in a cross-scan dimension of a laser beam (e.g., a writing laser beam). 
     As depicted in  FIG. 71 , the collimating component  7100  comprises a second plurality of lenses  7103 . In some examples, the second plurality of lenses  7103  may be disposed within and/or define a second end portion of the collimating component  7100  (e.g., remote from an example laser assembly). Thus, an example laser beam may travel from an example laser assembly to the first plurality of lenses  7101  and subsequently reach the second plurality of lenses  7103 . As depicted, the second plurality of lenses  7101  comprises two spherical lenses configured to move independently in relation to the first plurality of lenses  7103 . Each spherical lens may comprise glass or a similar material. Each spherical lens may be or comprise a Fast-Axis Collimator (FAC). The example second plurality of lenses  7103  may be configured to tolerate a laser chip offset of plus or minus 0.1 mm. Accordingly, the second plurality of lenses  7103  may also operate to control a resolution in a cross-scan dimension of a laser beam (e.g., a writing laser beam). The slow axis of the example collimating component  7100  may be collimated and expanded to produce approximately 200 DPI directly through the first and second plurality of lenses  7101  and  7103  in the scan dimension. Subsequent to reaching the second plurality of lenses  7103 , the example laser beam may then enter another component of the optical assembly/printing apparatus (e.g., an example focusing component). 
     While some of the embodiments herein provide an example collimating component  7100 , it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For instance, in some examples, a collimating component  7100  in accordance with the present disclosure may comprise other elements, one or more additional and/or alternative elements, and/or may be structured/positioned differently than that illustrated in  FIG. 71 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 72 , an example schematic diagram depicting a side view of at least a portion of a collimating component  7200  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. In various examples, the collimating component  7200  may be configured to collimate an output of a laser source (i.e., laser beams). The example collimating component  7200  may be at least partially disposed within a housing (e.g., cylindrical member, barrel, or the like). For example, the collimating component  7200  may be configured to control a resolution of a laser beam in a cross-scan dimension. At least a surface of the collimating component  7200  may be disposed adjacent at least a surface of an example laser assembly so as to collimate an output (i.e., laser beam(s)) generated by the laser assembly. The example collimating component  7200  may be configured to collimate an output of a multi-mode laser (e.g., in some examples, with a beam divergence variability between 8 and 12 degrees). In some examples, the collimating component  7200  may operate to focus the cross-scan to approximately 1000 DPI in the cross-scan dimension. As depicted in  FIG. 72 , the example collimating component  7200  comprises a first plurality of lenses  7201  and a second plurality of lenses  7203 . 
     As depicted in  FIG. 72 , the collimating component  7200  comprises a first plurality of lenses  7201 . In some examples, the first plurality of lenses  7201  may be disposed within and/or define a first end portion of the collimating component  7200  (e.g., adjacent an example laser assembly). Said differently, the first plurality of lenses  7201  may be disposed at a first distance with respect to an example laser assembly. The first plurality of lenses  7201  may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) in relation to the second plurality of lenses  7203 . For example, the first plurality of lenses  7201  may be configured to move horizontally along an example laser beam path  7202 . As depicted, the first plurality of lenses  7201  comprises a first spherical lens  7201 A, a second spherical lens  7201 B, and a third spherical lens  7201 C disposed in a parallel configuration with respect to one another. Each spherical lens  7201 A,  7201 B and  7201 C may comprise glass or a similar material. In some examples, each spherical lens  7201 A,  7201 B and  7201 C may have a diameter between 5 mm and 10 mm. As further depicted in  FIG. 72 , each spherical lens  7201 A,  7201 B and  7201 C may have different dimensions, shapes and/or be configured differently from one another. In some examples, each spherical lens  7201 A,  7201 B and  7201 C may be or comprise a Fast-Axis Collimator (FAC). The example collimating component  7200  may operate to output a laser beam within a particular divergence range (e.g., 10×10 degrees Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM)). The example each spherical lenses  7201 A,  7201 B and  7201 C may be configured to tolerate a laser chip offset of plus or minus 0.1 mm. In some examples, the first plurality of lenses  7201  may operate to control a resolution in a cross-scan dimension of a laser beam (e.g., a pre-energizing laser beam). 
     As depicted in  FIG. 72 , the collimating component  7200  comprises a second plurality of lenses  7203 . In some examples, the second plurality of lenses  7203  may be disposed within and/or define a second end portion of the collimating component  7200  (e.g., remote from an example laser assembly). As shown, the example second plurality of lenses  7203  may be disposed approximately 10-12 mm from the first plurality of lenses  7201 . In other words, the second plurality of lenses  7202  may be disposed at a second distance with respect to the example laser assembly such that the second plurality of lenses  7202  is disposed further from the laser assembly than the first plurality of lenses  7201 . Thus, an example laser beam may travel from an example laser assembly to the first plurality of lenses  7201  and subsequently reach the second plurality of lenses  7203 . As depicted, the second plurality of lenses  7203  comprises a first spherical lens  7203 A and a second spherical lens  7203 B disposed in a parallel configuration with respect to one another. Each spherical lens  7203 A and  7203 B may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) in relation to the first plurality of lenses  7201 . For example, the second plurality of lenses  7202  may be configured to move horizontally along an example laser beam path  7202 . Each spherical lens  7203 A and  7203 B may comprise glass or a similar material. In some examples, each spherical lens  7203 A and  7203 B may have a diameter between 5 mm and 10 mm. As depicted in  FIG. 72 , each spherical lens  7203 A and  7203 B may have different dimensions, shapes and/or be configured differently from one another. Each spherical lens  7203 A and  7203 B may be or comprise a Fast-Axis Collimator (FAC). The example second plurality of lenses  7203  may be configured to tolerate a laser chip offset of plus or minus 0.1 mm. Accordingly, the second plurality of lenses  7203  may also operate to control a resolution in a cross-scan dimension of a laser beam (e.g., a pre-energizing laser beam). Subsequent to reaching the second plurality of lenses  7203 , the example laser beam may then enter another component/element of the optical assembly/printing apparatus (e.g., an example focusing component). 
     While some of the embodiments herein provide an example portion of a collimating component  7200 , it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For instance, in some examples, a collimating component  7200  in accordance with the present disclosure may comprise other elements, one or more additional and/or alternative elements, and/or may be structured/positioned differently than that illustrated in  FIG. 72 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 73 , an example schematic diagram depicting a side view of at least a portion of a collimating component  7300  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. In various examples, the collimating component  7300  may be configured to collimate an output of a laser source (i.e., laser beams). The example collimating component  7300  may be at least partially disposed within a housing (e.g., cylindrical member, barrel, or the like). For example, the collimating component  7300  may be configured to control a resolution of a laser beam in a cross-scan dimension. At least a surface of the collimating component  7300  may be disposed adjacent at least a surface of an example laser assembly so as to collimate an output (i.e., laser beam(s)) generated by the laser assembly. The example collimating component  7300  may be configured to collimate an output of a multi-mode laser (e.g., in some examples, with a beam divergence variability between 8 and 12 degrees). In some examples, the collimating component  7300  may operate to focus the cross-scan to approximately 1000 DPI in the cross-scan dimension. As depicted in  FIG. 73 , the example collimating component  7300  comprises a first plurality of lenses  7301  and a second plurality of lenses  7303 . 
     As depicted in  FIG. 73 , the collimating component  7300  comprises a first plurality of lenses  7301 . In some examples, the first plurality of lenses  7301  may be disposed within and/or define a first end portion of the collimating component  7300  (e.g., adjacent an example laser assembly). Said differently, the first plurality of lenses  7301  may be disposed at a first distance with respect to an example laser assembly. The first plurality of lenses  7301  may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) in relation to the second plurality of lenses  7303 . For example, the first plurality of lenses  7301  may be configured to move horizontally along an example laser beam path  7302 . As depicted, the first plurality of lenses  7301  comprises a first spherical lens  7301 A, a second spherical lens  7301 B, and a third spherical lens  7301 C disposed in a parallel configuration with respect to one another. Each spherical lens  7301 A,  7301 B and  7301 C may comprise glass or a similar material. In some examples, each spherical lens  7301 A,  7301 B and  7301 C may have a diameter between 5 mm and 10 mm. As further depicted in  FIG. 73 , each spherical lens  7301 A,  7301 B and  7301 C may have different dimensions, shapes and/or be configured differently from one another. In some examples, each spherical lens  7301 A,  7301 B and  7301 C may be or comprise a Fast-Axis Collimator (FAC). The example collimating component  7300  may operate to output a laser beam within a particular divergence range (e.g., 10×10 degrees Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM)). The example each spherical lenses  7301 A,  7301 B and  7301 C may be configured to tolerate a laser chip offset of plus or minus 0.1 mm. In some examples, the first plurality of lenses  7301  may operate to control a resolution in a cross-scan dimension of a laser beam (e.g., a pre-energizing laser beam). 
     As depicted in  FIG. 73 , the collimating component  7300  comprises a second plurality of lenses  7303 . In some examples, the second plurality of lenses  7303  may be disposed within and/or define a second end portion of the collimating component  7300  (e.g., remote from an example laser assembly). As shown, the example second plurality of lenses  7303  may be disposed approximately 10-12 mm from the first plurality of lenses  7301 . In other words, the second plurality of lenses  7303  may be disposed at a second distance with respect to the example laser assembly such that the second plurality of lenses  7303  is disposed further from the laser assembly than the first plurality of lenses  7301 . Thus, an example laser beam may travel from an example laser assembly to the first plurality of lenses  7301  and subsequently reach the second plurality of lenses  7303 . As depicted, the second plurality of lenses  7303  comprises a first spherical lens  7303 A and a second spherical lens  7303 B disposed in a parallel configuration with respect to one another. Each spherical lens  7303 A and  7303 B may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) in relation to the first plurality of lenses  7301 . For example, the second plurality of lenses  7303  may be configured to move horizontally along an example laser beam path  7302 . Each spherical lens  7303 A and  7303 B may comprise glass or a similar material. In some examples, each spherical lens  7303 A and  7303 B may have a diameter between 5 mm and 10 mm. As depicted in  FIG. 73 , each spherical lens  7303 A and  7303 B may have different dimensions, shapes and/or be configured differently from one another. Each spherical lens  7303 A and  7303 B may be or comprise a Fast-Axis Collimator (FAC). The example second plurality of lenses  7303  may be configured to tolerate a laser chip offset of plus or minus 0.1 mm. Accordingly, the second plurality of lenses  7303  may also operate to control a resolution in a cross-scan dimension of a laser beam (e.g., a pre-energizing laser beam). Subsequent to reaching the second plurality of lenses  7303 , the example laser beam may then enter another component/element of the optical assembly/printing apparatus (e.g., an example focusing component). 
     While some of the embodiments herein provide an example portion of a collimating component  7300 , it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For instance, in some examples, a collimating component  7300  in accordance with the present disclosure may comprise other elements, one or more additional and/or alternative elements, and/or may be structured/positioned differently than that illustrated in  FIG. 73 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 74 , an example schematic diagram depicting a top section view of an optical assembly  7400  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. In various examples, the optical assembly  7400  may be configured to collimate, circularize and/or focus laser beams. As depicted in  FIG. 74 , the optical assembly  7400  comprises a collimating component  7401  and a focusing component  7413 . The example optical assembly  7400  may operate to collimate an output (i.e., laser beam(s)) generated by an example laser assembly (e.g., a multi-mode laser). In some examples, at least one surface of the collimating component  7401  may be disposed adjacent at least a surface of the example laser assembly. 
     As depicted in  FIG. 74 , the optical assembly  7400  comprises a collimating component  7401  configured to control a resolution in a cross-scan dimension of a laser beam (e.g., pre-energizing laser beam). The collimating component  7401  may be similar to the collimating component  7200  described above in connection with  FIG. 72 . As depicted, the collimating component  7401  comprises a cylindrical member/barrel. In some examples, as depicted, the collimating component  7401  is at least partially disposed within a housing  7402  of the optical assembly  7400 . In various examples, the collimating component  7401  may be or comprise one or more pluralities of lenses (e.g., one or more groups of lenses). As depicted, the collimating component  7401  comprises a first plurality of lenses  7403  and a second plurality of lenses  7405 . In some examples, as further depicted, the first plurality of lenses  7403  comprises three spherical lenses and the second plurality of lenses  7405  comprises two spherical lenses. 
     In some examples, the first plurality of lenses  7403  may be disposed within and/or define a first end portion of the collimating component  7401  (e.g., adjacent an example laser assembly). Said differently, the first plurality of lenses  7403  may be disposed at a first distance with respect to an example laser assembly. The first plurality of lenses  7403  may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) in relation to the second plurality of lenses  7405 . For example, the first plurality of lenses  7403  may be configured to move horizontally along an example laser beam path  7404 . 
     As depicted in  FIG. 74 , the collimating component  7401  comprises a second plurality of lenses  7405 . In some examples, the second plurality of lenses  7405  may be disposed within and/or define a second end portion of the collimating component  7401  (e.g., remote from an example laser assembly). Said differently, the second plurality of lenses  7405  may be disposed at a second distance with respect to the example laser assembly such that the second plurality of lenses  7405  is disposed further from the laser assembly than the first plurality of lenses  7403 . Thus, an example laser beam may travel from an example laser assembly to the first plurality of lenses  7403  and subsequently reach the second plurality of lenses  7405 . The second plurality of lenses  7405  may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) in relation to the first plurality of lenses  7403 . For example, the second plurality of lenses  7405  may be configured to move horizontally along the example laser beam path  7404 . Subsequent to reaching the second plurality of lenses  7405 , the example laser beam may then enter another component/element of the optical assembly/printing apparatus (e.g., in some examples, the focusing component  7413 ). 
     As noted above, and as depicted in  FIG. 74 , the optical assembly  7400  comprises a focusing component  7413  configured to direct an output (e.g., laser beam) of the optical assembly  7400  within an example printing apparatus (e.g., direct a laser beam to be incident on a print media). As shown, in some examples, at least a surface of the focusing component  7413  may be disposed adjacent a surface of the collimating component  7401  such that a laser beam can traverse the collimating component  7401  to reach the focusing component  7413 . In some examples, as depicted, the focusing component  7413  may comprise a focusing lens  7415 , one or more mirrors, and/or the like. 
     While some of the embodiments herein provide an example optical assembly  7400 , it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For instance, in some examples, optical assembly  7400  in accordance with the present disclosure may comprise other elements, one or more additional and/or alternative elements, and/or may be structured/positioned differently than that illustrated in  FIG. 74 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 75 , an example schematic diagram depicting a top section view of an optical assembly  7500  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. The example optical assembly  7500  may be similar or identical to the optical assembly  7400  described above in connection with  FIG. 74 . In various examples, the optical assembly  7500  may be configured to collimate, circularize and/or focus laser beams. As depicted in  FIG. 75 , the optical assembly  7500  comprises a collimating component  7501  and a focusing component  7513 . The example optical assembly  7500  may operate to collimate an output (i.e., laser beam(s)) generated by an example laser assembly (e.g., a multi-mode laser). In some examples, at least one surface of the collimating component  7501  may be disposed adjacent to at least a surface of the example laser assembly. 
     As depicted in  FIG. 75 , the optical assembly  7500  comprises a collimating component  7501  configured to control a resolution in a cross-scan dimension of a laser beam (e.g., pre-energizing laser beam). The collimating component  7501  may be similar to the collimating component  7200  described above in connection with  FIG. 72 . As depicted, the collimating component  7501  comprises a cylindrical member/barrel. In some examples, as depicted, the collimating component  7501  is at least partially disposed within a housing  7502  of the optical assembly  7500 . In various examples, the collimating component  7501  may be or comprise one or more pluralities of lenses (e.g., one or more groups of lenses). As depicted, the collimating component  7501  comprises a first plurality of lenses  7503  and a second plurality of lenses  7505 . In some examples, as further depicted, the first plurality of lenses  7503  comprises three spherical lenses and the second plurality of lenses  7505  comprises two spherical lenses. 
     In some examples, the first plurality of lenses  7503  may be disposed within and/or define a first end portion of the collimating component  7501  (e.g., adjacent an example laser assembly). Said differently, the first plurality of lenses  7503  may be disposed at a first distance with respect to an example laser assembly. The first plurality of lenses  7503  may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) in relation to the second plurality of lenses  7505 . For example, the first plurality of lenses  7503  may be configured to move horizontally along an example laser beam path  7504 . 
     As depicted in  FIG. 75 , the collimating component  7501  comprises a second plurality of lenses  7505 . In some examples, the second plurality of lenses  7505  may be disposed within and/or define a second end portion of the collimating component  7501  (e.g., remote from an example laser assembly). Said differently, the second plurality of lenses  7505  may be disposed at a second distance with respect to the example laser assembly such that the second plurality of lenses  7505  is disposed further from the laser assembly than the first plurality of lenses  7503 . Thus, an example laser beam may travel from an example laser assembly to the first plurality of lenses  7503  and subsequently reach the second plurality of lenses  7505 . The second plurality of lenses  7505  may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) in relation to the first plurality of lenses  7503 . In various examples, the collimating component  7501  may be configured to move within the housing  7502  of the optical assembly  7500  so as to vary the relative positions of the first plurality of lenses  7503  and the second plurality of lenses  7505 . As depicted in  FIG. 75 , the collimating component  7501  may be configured to retract in order to modify a distance between the first plurality of the lenses  7503  and the second plurality of lenses  7505 . Referring again to  FIG. 75 , the example collimating component  7501  is depicted in an extended state in comparison to the collimating component  7501  depicted in  FIG. 75  which is in a retracted state. Accordingly, the first plurality of lenses  7503  and/or the second plurality of lenses  7505  may be configured to move horizontally along the example laser beam path  7504 . In various examples, subsequent to reaching the second plurality of lenses  7505 , the example laser beam may then enter another component/element of the optical assembly/printing apparatus (e.g., in some examples, the focusing component  7513 ). 
     As noted above, and as depicted in  FIG. 75 , the optical assembly  7500  comprises a focusing component  7513  configured to direct an output (e.g., laser beam) of the optical assembly  7500  within an example printing apparatus (e.g., direct a laser beam to be incident on a print media). As shown, in some examples, at least a surface of the focusing component  7513  may be disposed adjacent a surface of the collimating component  7501  such that a laser beam can traverse the collimating component  7501  to reach the focusing component  7513 . In some examples, as depicted, the focusing component  7513  may comprise a focusing lens  7515 , one or more mirrors, and/or the like. 
     While some of the embodiments herein provide an example optical assembly  7500 , it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For instance, in some examples, optical assembly  7500  in accordance with the present disclosure may comprise other elements, one or more additional and/or alternative elements, and/or may be structured/positioned differently than that illustrated in  FIG. 75 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 76 , an example schematic diagram depicting a top section view of an optical assembly  7600  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. In various examples, the optical assembly  7600  may be configured to collimate, circularize and/or focus laser beams. The example optical assembly  7600  may operate to modify a laser beam which may be diverging within a particular range in order to provide a laser beam of a constant beam size. As depicted in  FIG. 76 , the optical assembly  7600  comprises a collimating component  7601 , a beam control component  7607  and a focusing component  7613 . The example optical assembly  7600  may operate to collimate an output (i.e., laser beam(s)) generated by an example laser assembly (e.g., a single-mode laser). In some examples, at least one surface of the collimating component  7601  may be disposed adjacent at least a surface of the example laser assembly. 
     As depicted in  FIG. 76 , the optical assembly  7600  comprises a collimating component  7601  configured to control a resolution in a cross-scan dimension of a laser beam (e.g., pre-energizing laser beam). The collimating component  7601  may be similar to the collimating component  7300  described above in connection with  FIG. 73 . As depicted, the collimating component  7601  comprises a cylindrical member/barrel. In some examples, as depicted, the collimating component  7601  is at least partially disposed within a housing  7602  of the optical assembly  7600 . In various examples, the collimating component  7601  may be or comprise one or more pluralities of lenses (e.g., one or more groups of lenses). As depicted, the collimating component  7601  comprises a first plurality of lenses  7603  and a second plurality of lenses  7605 . In some examples, as further depicted, the first plurality of lenses  7603  comprises three spherical lenses and the second plurality of lenses  7605  comprises two spherical lenses. 
     In some examples, the first plurality of lenses  7603  may be disposed within and/or define a first end portion of the collimating component  7601  (e.g., adjacent an example laser assembly). Said differently, the first plurality of lenses  7603  may be disposed at a first distance with respect to an example laser assembly. The first plurality of lenses  7603  may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) in relation to the second plurality of lenses  7605 . For example, the first plurality of lenses  7603  may be configured to move horizontally along an example laser beam path  7604 . 
     As depicted in  FIG. 76 , the collimating component  7601  comprises a second plurality of lenses  7605 . In some examples, the second plurality of lenses  7605  may be disposed within and/or define a second end portion of the collimating component  7601  (e.g., remote from an example laser assembly). Said differently, the second plurality of lenses  7605  may be disposed at a second distance with respect to the example laser assembly such that the second plurality of lenses  7605  is disposed further from the laser assembly than the first plurality of lenses  7603 . Thus, an example laser beam may travel from an example laser assembly to the first plurality of lenses  7603  and subsequently reach the second plurality of lenses  7605 . The second plurality of lenses  7605  may be configured to move independently (i.e., as a group) in relation to the first plurality of lenses  7603 . In various examples, subsequent to reaching the second plurality of lenses  7605 , the example laser beam may then enter another component/element of the optical assembly/printing apparatus (e.g., in some examples, the beam control component  7607 ). 
     As noted above, and as depicted in  FIG. 76 , the optical assembly  7600  comprises a beam control component  7607 . The example beam control component  7607  may operate to modify a laser beam to produce a laser beam of a particular aspect ratio (e.g., a circular aspect ratio of 1:1) while directing the laser beam in a constant direction. As shown, in some examples, at least a surface of the beam control component  7607  is disposed adjacent a surface of the collimating component  7601  such that a laser beam can traverse the collimating component  7601  to reach the beam control component  7607 . As depicted, the beam control component  7607  comprises a first prism element  7609  and a second prism element  7611  (e.g., defining an anamorphic prism pair) configured to modify a dimension of a laser beam along one axis (e.g., expand the size of a laser beam in a horizontal dimension) For example, the beam control component  7607  may operate to modify a shape of a laser beam based on an angular relative position of the example first prism element  7609  and second prism element  7611 . For example, the beam control component  7607  may operate to modify an elliptical beam shape generated by a laser source into a circular beam shape. In various examples, as depicted, the example beam control component  7607  comprises a control pin  7608  to facilitate adjusting relative positions of the first prism element  7609  and the second prism element  7611 . In some examples, the beam control component  7607  may be configured to automatically adjust the relative positions of the first prism element  7609  and the second prism element  7611  in response to detecting a divergence of a laser beam. 
     As noted above, and as depicted in  FIG. 76 , the optical assembly  7600  comprises a focusing component  7613  configured to direct an output (e.g., laser beam) of the optical assembly  7600  within an example printing apparatus (e.g., direct a laser beam to be incident on a print media). As shown, in some examples, at least a surface of the focusing component  7613  may be disposed adjacent a surface of the beam control component  7607  such that a laser beam can traverse the beam control component  7607  to reach the focusing component  7613 . In some examples, as depicted, the focusing component  7613  may comprise a focusing lens  7615 , one or more mirrors, and/or the like. 
     While some of the embodiments herein provide an example optical assembly  7600 , it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For instance, in some examples, optical assembly  7600  in accordance with the present disclosure may comprise other elements, one or more additional and/or alternative elements, and/or may be structured/positioned differently than that illustrated in  FIG. 76 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 77 , an example schematic diagram depicting a perspective view of a beam control component  7700  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. In various examples, the beam control component  7700  may operate to control a laser beam diverging within a particular range in order to provide a laser beam of a constant beam size (i.e., perform aspect ratio control). In some examples, the beam control component  7700  may be configured to control or modify an output of a single-mode laser. As depicted in  FIG. 77 , the beam control component  7700  comprises a first prism element  7701  and a second prism element  7703 . In some examples, at least one surface of the beam control component  7700  may be disposed adjacent an example collimating component. Additionally, in some examples, at least one surface of the beam control component  7700  may be disposed adjacent to an example focusing component. 
     In some examples, and as depicted in  FIG. 77 , the beam control component  7700  comprises a first prism element  7701  and a second prism element  7703  defining an anamorphic prism pair. As depicted in  FIG. 77 , the first prism element  7701  and the second prism element  7703  may be optically identical. In various examples, the first prism element  7701  and the second prism element  7703  may be at least partially disposed within a housing  7702  (e.g., a housing of an example optical assembly/printing apparatus). The first prism element  7701  and the second prism element  7703  may operate to control (e.g., expand or compress) a laser beam in order to produce a laser beam of a particular aspect ratio (e.g., a circular aspect ratio of 1:1) while directing the laser beam in a constant direction. For example, the beam control component  7700  may operate to modify a shape of a laser beam based on an angular relative position of the example first prism element  7701  and second prism element  7703 . For example, the beam control component  7700  may operate to modify an elliptical beam shape generated by a laser source into a circular beam shape. By way of example, the first prism element  7701  may deflect an example laser beam in a first direction and the second prism element  7703  may deflect the example laser beam in the reverse direction. As such each of the first prism element  7701  and the second prism element  7703  may modify a size of the example laser beam. When the beam incidence angles are set to equal and opposite directions for the first prism element  7701  and the second prism element  7703 , the resultant beam is parallel to the incident beam such that a net beam angular deviation is zero, with a residual beam offset of the optical axis. In various examples, as depicted, the example beam control component  7707  comprises a control pin  7705  configured to facilitate adjusting relative positions of the first prism element  7701  and the second prism element  7703 . In various examples, the control pin  7705  simultaneously controls the motion of the first prism element  7701  and the second prism element  7703  so that they are always in alignment and therefore provide a nearly constant beam offset at any expansion setting. As noted above, the beam control component  7707  may be configured to manually or automatically (e.g., dynamically) adjust the relative positions of the first prism element  7701  and the second prism element  7703  in response to detecting a divergence of a laser beam. The beam control component  7700  may further comprise a beam measurement element (e.g., disposed adjacent an exit aperture of the beam control component  7700 ). Accordingly, based on a detected measurement associated with a laser beam, the relative positions of the first prism element  7701  and the second prism element  7703  may be manually or automatically adjusted and tuned based on real-time feedback until a target beam size and target aspect ratio are achieved. The example control pin  7705  may operate to orient the first prism element  7701  and the second prism element  7703  with respect to one another so as to direct an example laser beam in a constant direction. As depicted in  FIG. 77 , the control pin  7705  is disposed in a first position such that the first prism element  7701  and the second prism element  7703  are at a maximum relative position with respect to one another. In various examples, the control pin  7705  may facilitate orienting the first prism element  7701  and the second prism element  7703  in a plurality of relative positions with respect to one another. 
     While some of the embodiments herein provide an example beam control component  7700 , it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For instance, in some examples, a beam control component  7700  in accordance with the present disclosure may comprise other elements, one or more additional and/or alternative elements, and/or may be structured/positioned differently than that illustrated in  FIG. 77 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 78 , an example schematic diagram depicting a perspective view of a beam control component  7800  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. The beam control component  7800  may be similar or identical to the beam control component  7700  described above in connection with  FIG. 77 . In various examples, the beam control component  7800  may operate to control a laser beam diverging within a particular range in order to provide a laser beam of a constant beam size (i.e., perform aspect ratio control). In some examples, the beam control component  7800  may be configured to control or modify an output of a single-mode laser. As depicted in  FIG. 78 , the beam control component  7800  comprises a first prism element  7801  and a second prism element  7803 . In some examples, at least one surface of the beam control component  7800  may be disposed adjacent an example collimating component. Additionally, in some examples, at least one surface of the beam control component  7800  may be disposed adjacent an example focusing component. 
     As noted above, and as depicted in  FIG. 78 , the beam control component  7800  comprises a first prism element  7801  and a second prism element  7803  defining an anamorphic prism pair. As depicted in  FIG. 78 , the first prism element  7801  and the second prism element  7803  may be optically identical. In various examples, the first prism element  7801  and the second prism element  7803  may be at least partially disposed within a housing  7802  (e.g., a housing of an example optical assembly/printing apparatus). The first prism element  7801  and the second prism element  7803  may operate to control (e.g., expand or compress) a laser beam in order to produce a laser beam of a particular aspect ratio (e.g., a circular aspect ratio of 1:1) while directing the laser beam in a constant direction. For example, the beam control component  7800  may operate to modify a shape of a laser beam based on an angular relative position of the example first prism element  7801  and second prism element  7803 . For example, the beam control component  7800  may operate to modify an elliptical beam shape generated by a laser source into a circular beam shape. By way of example, the first prism element  7801  may deflect an example laser beam in a first direction and the second prism element  7803  may deflect the example laser beam in the reverse direction. As such each of the first prism element  7801  and the second prism element  7803  may modify a size of the example laser beam. When the beam incidence angles are set to equal and opposite directions for the first prism element  7801  and the second prism element  7803 , the resultant beam is parallel to the incident beam such that a net beam angular deviation is zero, with a residual beam offset of the optical axis. In various examples, as depicted, the example beam control component  7807  comprises a control pin  7805  configured to facilitate adjusting relative positions of the first prism element  7801  and the second prism element  7803 . In various examples, the control pin  7805  simultaneously controls the motion of the first prism element  7801  and the second prism element  7803  so that they are always in alignment and therefore provide a nearly constant beam offset at any expansion setting. As noted above, the beam control component  7800  may be configured to manually or automatically (e.g., dynamically) adjust the relative positions of the first prism element  7801  and the second prism element  7803  in response to detecting a divergence of a laser beam. The beam control component  7800  may further comprise a beam measurement element (e.g., disposed adjacent an exit aperture of the beam control component  7800 ). Accordingly, based on a detected measurement associated with a laser beam, the relative positions of the first prism element  7801  and the second prism element  7803  may be manually or automatically adjusted and tuned based on real-time feedback until a target beam size and target aspect ratio are achieved. The example control pin  7805  may operate to orient the first prism element  7801  and the second prism element  7803  with respect to one another so as to direct an example laser beam in a constant direction. As depicted in  FIG. 78 , the control pin  7805  is disposed in a second position such that the first prism element  7801  and the second prism element  7803  are at a minimum relative position with respect to one another. In various examples, the control pin  7805  may facilitate orienting the first prism element  7801  and the second prism element  7803  in a plurality of relative positions with respect to one another. 
     While some of the embodiments herein provide an example beam control component  7800 , it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For instance, in some examples, a beam control component  7800  in accordance with the present disclosure may comprise other elements, one or more additional and/or alternative elements, and/or may be structured/positioned differently than that illustrated in  FIG. 78 . For example, the beam control component  7800  may comprise one prism element or more than two prism elements. 
     Increased Laser Absorption Efficiency Through Reduced Light Transmission 
     In various examples, laser markable coatings may be utilized for producing marks on a print media (e.g., bar codes) in conjunction with a laser source. An example laser markable coating may comprise at least one color former (e.g., a leuco dye), at least one color developer (e.g., a proton donor), and at least one optothermal converting agent. An example optothermal converting agent may be a material that converts electromagnetic radiation (EMFs), specifically an infrared (IR) laser, to thermal energy. Such laser markable coatings are plagued with technical difficulties and challenges. 
     In some examples, a plurality of color formers may be blended together in order to provide a target shade/color post laser-activation. In such cases, the example color formers, color developer and optothermal converting agent may need to be kept apart (e.g., in an unreacted and colorless state) as discrete particles so that they do not react with one another prematurely (e.g., until laser radiation is incident thereon). However, in some examples, by separating the color formers, the color developer, and the optothermal converting agent, it may be difficult to achieve color uniformity and fast activation. 
     In some examples, the use of higher melting temperatures may result in better color stability, but unsuitably slow laser marking speeds. Additionally, in many examples, it may not be possible to keep the example color formers, color developer and optothermal converting agent in a completely colorless state in which color is only developed in response to exposure to an IR laser. In many examples, color former(s), color developer(s) and/or optothermal converting agent(s) may comprise a natural color. By way of example, an optothermal converting agent may comprise an IR-absorbing dye which, in some examples, may be blue, green, yellow, brown or black. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 79 , an example schematic diagram depicting a side section view of a print media  7900  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. In response to receiving electromagnetic radiation (e.g., IR energy  7902 ), the example print media  7900  may react by converting the absorbed electromagnetic radiation (e.g., IR energy) to thermal energy so as to impinge a mark onto the print media  7900 . As depicted in  FIG. 79 , the print media  7900  comprises a plurality of layers/substrates defining a unitary body. In some examples, the print media  7900  may have a thickness dimension that is less than 0.2 mm. As depicted in  FIG. 79 , the example print media  7900  comprises a laser markable coating  7901  and a substrate  7903 . 
     As depicted in  FIG. 79 , the example print media  7900  comprises a laser markable coating  7901  defining a top surface of the print media  7900 . The example laser markable coating  7901  may comprise a plurality of reactive components. For example, the laser markable coating  7901  may comprise at least one color former (e.g., a leuco dye), at least one color developer (e.g., a proton donor), and at least one optothermal converting agent. In response to electromagnetic radiation, the example laser markable coating  7901  may convert the electromagnetic radiation to thermal energy so as to impinge a mark onto the print media. 
     As depicted in  FIG. 79 , the example print media  7900  comprises a substrate  7903  defining a bottom surface of the print media  7900 . In various examples, the substrate  7903  may be or comprise a layer of processed fibers such as, without limitation, wood pulp, rice, organic material (e.g., plants), and/or the like. 
     In some examples, the example print media  7900  may be exposed to electromagnetic radiation (e.g., IR energy  7902 ). By way of example, the print media  7900  may be exposed to IR energy  7902  at a wavelength of 1064 nanometers or 1.064 microns. In such examples, a first portion of energy (in some examples, approximately 25% of the IR energy  7902 ), may be back-scattered or reflected backwards, at some angle greater than 90 degrees from the laser&#39;s initial direction, and generally towards the direction of a laser source. Accordingly, this portion of the energy emitted by the laser source (i.e., 25% of the IR energy  7902 ) may not be absorbed by the print media  7900  and does not participate in the conversion of the laser markable coating  7901  (i.e., reactive components) to generate marks (e.g., an image). Additionally, a second portion of energy (in some examples, approximately 25% of the IR energy  7902 ) may be transmitted such that it bypasses the laser markable coating  7901  (for example, either directly in-line with a path of an incident IR energy  7902  or deflected at some angle less than 90 degrees from the laser source&#39;s initial direction. Thus, this second portion of energy may also not be absorbed by the print media  7900  and does not participate in the conversion of the laser markable coating  7901  (i.e., reactive components) to generate marks (e.g., an image). In addition, a third portion of energy (in some examples, approximately 50% of the IR energy  7902 ) may not be detectable. In other words, approximately 50% of the IR energy  7902  may not be detectable (e.g., identified as striking a side of the print media  7900  or exiting a bottom surface of the print media  7900 . Accordingly, only the third portion of IR energy  7902  is absorbed by the print media  7900  and available to be converted into thermal energy therefore contributing to the reaction of the laser markable coating  7901  (i.e., reactive components) of the print media  7900  required to produce a mark (e.g., image). As detailed above, the loss of approximately 50% of IR energy  7902  provided by an example laser source results in a suboptimal use of available energy. 
     The systems, methods and techniques described herein provide print media with laser markable coatings that are stable in a variety of environments irrespective of storage conditions and/or exposure to incident light and/or heat. In some examples, the laser markable coating materials may not need to be in a colorless, near colorless or color neutral state prior to activation. Additionally, activation of the example laser markable coating materials may be performed at higher, optimal speeds. Moreover, a customer&#39;s overall usage costs will be significantly lower than existing solutions. For example, the example customer may reduce costs associated with consumable materials including inks, dilution solvents, cleaning solvents, sponges and cleaning materials. Further, the customer may not be burdened with safety training, personal protective equipment and environmental reporting required with incumbent solutions. Additionally, methods and systems which result in less wastage of incident radiation (e.g., IR energy) are provided herein. In some examples, an overall amount of IR energy absorbed by a target media may be significantly increased while providing faster operations and generating marks with higher optical densities. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 80 , an example schematic diagram depicting a side section view of a print media  8000  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. In response to receiving electromagnetic radiation (e.g., IR energy), the example print media  8000  may react by converting the absorbed electromagnetic radiation (e.g., IR energy) to thermal energy so as to impinge a mark onto the print media  8000 . As depicted in  FIG. 80 , the print media  8000  comprises a plurality of layers/substrates defining a unitary body. In some examples, the print media  8000  may have a thickness dimension that is less than 0.2 mm. As depicted in  FIG. 80 , the example print media  8000  comprises a laser markable coating  8001 , a reflective layer  8003 , an absorbing layer  8005  and a substrate  8007 . 
     As depicted in  FIG. 80 , the example print media  8000  comprises a laser markable coating  8001  defining a top surface of the print media  8000 . The example laser markable coating  8001  may comprise a plurality of reactive components. For example, the laser markable coating  8001  may comprise at least one color former (e.g., a leuco dye), at least one color developer (e.g., a proton donor), and at least one optothermal converting agent. In response to receiving electromagnetic radiation (e.g., IR energy  8002 ), the example laser markable coating  8001  may convert the electromagnetic radiation to thermal energy so as to impinge a mark onto the print media  8000 . 
     As depicted in  FIG. 80 , in some examples, the print media  8000  may comprise a reflective layer  8003  defining an intermediary layer of the print media  8000 . For example, as shown, the reflective layer  8003  may be disposed adjacent a bottom surface of the laser markable coating  8001 . The reflective layer  8003  may operate to prevent transmission of IR energy  8002  through a bottom surface of the print media  8000  by reflecting the IR energy  8002  towards the laser markable coating where it can be absorbed. In various examples, the reflective layer  8003  may not be disposed directly adjacent the laser markable coating  8001 , and may be disposed adjacent any intermediary layer of the print media  8000 . In various examples, the reflective layer  8003  may be or comprise a metallic layer and/or metallic particles. In some examples, the reflective layer  8003  may comprise a vacuum-metallized aluminum metal. The reflective layer  8003  may comprise aluminum, nickel, bronze, steel, combinations thereof, and/or the like. In some examples, the reflective layer  8003  may comprise hexagonal boron nitride (h-BN). 
     As further depicted in  FIG. 80 , in some examples, the print media  8000  comprises an absorbing layer  8005  defining another intermediary layer of the print media  8000 . For example, as shown, the absorbing layer  8005  may be disposed adjacent a bottom surface of the reflective layer  8003 . However, it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. In other examples, the absorbing layer  8005  may be positioned differently than illustrated in  FIG. 80 . The absorbing layer  8005  may operate to absorb a portion of the IR energy  8002  in order to improve the reactivity of the example print media  8000 . For example, the thermal energy generated from absorbing a portion of the IR energy  8002  may improve the reactivity of the laser markable coating  8001  (e.g., a reaction speed). As such, the absorbing layer  8005  may operate to improve an optical density associated with a mark generated on the laser markable coating  8001 . In some examples, the absorbing layer  8005  may comprise metal oxides, ceramics and/or the like. In one example, the absorbing layer  8005  may comprise titanium dioxide. 
     As depicted in  FIG. 80 , the example print media  8000  comprises a substrate  8007  defining a bottom surface of the print media  8000 . In some examples, as depicted, the substrate  8007  may be disposed adjacent a bottom surface of the absorbing layer  8005 . In various examples, the substrate  8007  may be or comprise a layer of processed fibers such as, without limitation, wood pulp, rice, organic material (e.g., plants), and/or the like. 
     While some of the embodiments herein provide an example print media  8000 , it is noted that the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments. For instance, in some examples, a print media  8000  in accordance with the present disclosure may comprise other elements, one or more additional and/or alternative elements, and/or may be structured/positioned differently than that illustrated in  FIG. 80 . 
     Darkness and Contrast Adjustment 
     As described above, various embodiments of the present disclosure may utilize a laser print head to conduct laser printing on a print media. For example, various embodiments of the present disclosure may utilize laser technologies to mark dedicated print media that have a reactive coating tuned to react to the printer laser. In some embodiments, when printing on the same media type, there is a manufacturing variation in the reactive coating, which makes the print quality to be uneven even when a constant laser power is applied. Additionally, the print quality may also vary because of the media substrate, which means that the print quality would vary even for the same laser power and even if the reactive coating was perfectly the same from one print media to another print media. As such, there is a need for fine-tuning the operational parameters associated with the print head in order to address the variation of print quality within same media type as well as across different media types. In embodiments where a printing apparatus utilizes thermal printing technologies, this fine-tuning process may be done by adjusting contrast and darkness parameters that control the duration for which a thermal print head is turned ON &amp; OFF. In embodiments where a printing apparatus utilizes laser printing technologies (including, but not limited to, pulsed laser, continuous laser, etc.), the present disclosure provides example methods and algorithms to adjust contrast and darkness. 
     Various embodiments of the present disclosure may overcome technical challenges associated with adjusting contrast and darkness in a printing apparatus that utilizes laser printing technologies. For example, some embodiments of the present disclosure may adjust the darkness and contrast within a laser print head (for example, by the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) instead of through the CPU of the printing apparatus (for example, the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 ), which may reduce processing time and free up CPU resources so the printing apparatus can handle printing tasks more efficiently compared to that of a thermal printer. Some embodiments of the present disclosure may provide a set of methods to adjust the darkness and contrast, which improve the print quality to produce a grade A barcode as well as improved text and drawing printout. In some embodiments, the set of methods may include algorithms, lookup tables, or a combination of both. Some embodiments of the present disclosure may directly adjust the power level of the output power from the laser print head in order to modify the darkness or contrast in the printout, which can be applicable to a print head utilizing continuous laser or pulsed laser. Some embodiments of the present disclosure may directly adjust the ON duration (e.g. the duty cycle) of the laser print head when printing a dot in order to modify darkness or contrast, which can be applicable to a print head utilizing pulsed laser. In contrast, a printing apparatus utilizes thermal printing technologies only to adjust the ON duration when printing a full line (instead of printing a dot by a printing apparatus utilizing laser printing technologies). 
     In the present disclosure, the term “darkness setting input” refers to an input provided by a user (for example, through various user interfaces described herein such as, but not limited to, the UI  140  described above in connection with  FIG. 1 ) that indicates a desired level of darkness in a printout produced by a laser print head. In response to the darkness setting input indicates a darkness increase, the laser print head produces the entire printout darker compared to a printout prior to the darkness increase, details of which are described herein. In response to the darkness setting input indicates a darkness decrease, the laser print head produces the entire printout lighter compared to a printout prior to the darkness decrease, details of which are described herein. 
     In the present disclosure, the term “contrast setting input” refers to an input provided by a user (for example, through various user interfaces described herein such as, but not limited to, the UI  140  described above in connection with  FIG. 1 ) that indicates a desired level of contrast in a printout produced by a laser print head. In response to the contrast setting input indicates a contrast increase, the laser print head produces any dark grey area in the printout darker and any light grey area in the printout lighter/whiter, details of which are described herein. In response to the contrast setting input indicates a contrast decrease, the laser print head produces any dark grey area in the printout lighter and any light grey area in the printout darker, details of which are described herein. 
     As described above, in examples where the printing apparatus utilizes thermal printing technologies, any contrast/darkness adjustment would be made by the printer CPU either via image processing technique or by calculating the modified ON time of a full line depending on the darkness/contrast settings. In some embodiments, the printer CPU may receive print data and create a first image buffer based on the print data. Subsequently, the printer CPU may conduct adjustment by applying darkness algorithms, applying contrast algorithm, and rendering new image buffer or adjusting the ON time of the print head. For example, the printer CPU may modify the pixel value up or down when applying darkness algorithms and may determine the minimum and maximum pixel value prior to applying contrast algorithm. Once the adjustments are completed, the printer CPU may provide the print data to a laser print head, which may in turn provide print data to a laser power control system (for example, the laser power control system  2006  described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ). 
     As described above, in a printing apparatus that utilizes thermal printing technologies, the darkness and contrast of a printout depend on the previous dot, the current dot and future dot to be printed in a column, as well as the duration of the full segment (e.g. the ON time to print a line). In some embodiments, a line is made of four segments, which means that the printing apparatus prints four time over the same line before printing the next line. The calculation behind the ON time duration may be based on testing cases to identify the best match for any type of barcode/printout; however, this method does not work for all type of printout and barcode. In addition, using image processing technique can be time consuming and process intensive for the printer CPU to handle efficiently while performing printing operations and others task, hence such techniques may not be suitable for many printing apparatuses. Further, thermal management algorithms used in thermal printing apparatus cannot be used for laser printing apparatus because the printing technology is different. For example, thermal management algorithm used in thermal printing apparatus may be dedicated to print line by line, while laser printing apparatus prints dot by dot, as described above. 
     Example embodiments of the present disclosure may overcome technical challenges associated with adjusting contrast and darkness in a printing apparatus that utilizes laser printing technologies. Referring now to  FIG. 81 , an example method  8100  is illustrated. In particular, the example method  8100  illustrates example steps/operations of adjusting power levels in response to darkness setting input and/or contrast setting input. In some embodiments, the contrast and darkness setting modifications are conducted by a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ), which may improve the printing operation efficiency as the main printer CPU does not handle any of the intensive darkness/contrast adjustments. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 81 , the example method  8100  starts at block  8101  and then proceeds to step/operation  8103 . At step/operation  8103 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may receive print data. 
     In some embodiments, the print data may be in the form of an image buffer. In some embodiments, a processor of the printing apparatus (for example, the main CPU of the printing apparatus) may receive raw printing data, which comprises data representing barcode, text, image, and/or the like that are to be printed on a print media. The processor of the printing apparatus (for example, the main CPU of the printing apparatus) may generate an image buffer based at least in part on the raw print data and provide a temporary storage for the raw print data. Prior to the print head beginning to print the barcode, text, image, and/or the like represented by the raw print data, the processor of the printing apparatus may provide the image buffer to a controller of a print head (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ). 
     In some embodiments, the print data may indicate at least a first power level. In the present disclosure, the term “power level” refers to the amount of power that is provided to the laser source when conducting printing operations. In some embodiments, a power level may be expressed as a percentage of the maximum power that can be provided to the laser source. For example, when the power level is 100%, the maximum power is provided to the laser source, which in turn produces a fully black dot. When the power level is 0%, the minimum power or no power is provided to the laser source, which in turn produces a fully white dot. 
     In some embodiments, the first power level is associated with a first dot to be printed by the print head on a print media. In examples where no darkness or contrast adjustments are made, the power level provided to the laser source in the print head equals to the first power level. For example, if the first power level equals to 40%, then the power level provided to the laser source equals to 40% when no darkness or contrast adjustments are made, and the laser source prints the first dot at 40% of the maximum power. If the first power level equals to 72%, then the power level provided to the laser source equals to 72% when no darkness or contrast adjustments are made, and the laser source prints the first dot at 72% of the maximum power. This relationship between the first power level and the power level provided to the laser source when no darkness or contrast adjustments are made is illustrated by curve  8202  in the example diagram  8200  shown in  FIG. 82 . In the example diagram  8200  shown in  FIG. 82 , when 0% power level is provided to the laser source, the laser source prints a fully white dot; when 100% is provided to the laser source, the laser source prints a fully black dot. This relationship between the first power level and the power level provided to the laser source when no darkness or contrast adjustments are made is also illustrated in the following example algorithm: 
       Power ( y )= x    
     In the above example algorithm, Power (y) is the power level provided to the laser source, and x is the first power level. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 81 , subsequent to step/operation  8103 , the example method  8100  proceeds to step/operation  8105 . At step/operation  8105 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may receive darkness setting input. 
     In some embodiments, the darkness setting input may be received by a controller of a print head. As described above, the darkness setting input may indicate a desired level of darkness in a printout. In some embodiments, the darkness setting input may be expressed as a percentage between −100% to +100%. For example, a −100% darkness setting input indicates a reduction of darkness in the printout to the minimum, and a +100% darkness setting input indicates an increase of darkness in the printout to the maximum. In some embodiments, a positive darkness setting input indicates a darkness increase, while a negative darkness setting input indicates a darkness decrease. In some embodiments, when the darkness setting input equals to zero, there is no change in the darkness. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 81 , subsequent to step/operation  8105 , the example method  8100  proceeds to step/operation  8107 . At step/operation  8107 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may adjust power level. 
     In some embodiments, the controller of the print head may adjust the power level when the print head is in a continuous laser print mode (e.g. the laser source continuously emits laser beams). In some embodiments, the controller of the print head may adjust the power level when the print head is in a pulsed laser print mode (e.g. the laser source starts and stops emitting laser beams based on a regular rhythm). 
     In some embodiments, the controller of the print head may adjust the first power level to a second power level based at least in part on the darkness setting input. For example, the controller may adjust the power level based on the following example algorithm: 
     
       
         
           
             
               P 
               ⁡ 
               
                 ( 
                 y 
                 ) 
               
             
             = 
             
               max 
               ⁡ 
               
                 ( 
                 
                   
                     min 
                     ⁡ 
                     
                       ( 
                       
                         
                           x 
                           + 
                           
                             
                               
                                 Ratio 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 
                                     
                                 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 % 
                               
                               
                                 100 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 % 
                               
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             Darkness 
                           
                         
                         , 
                         100 
                       
                       ) 
                     
                   
                   , 
                   0 
                 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
     In the above algorithm, x is the first power level, which is between 0% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Darkness is the darkness setting input adjustable by the user, which is between −100% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Ratio % is darkness step size ratio that is predetermined and fixed by the printing apparatus based on the step size between two darkness levels. In other words, adjusting the first power level to the second power level is further based on the darkness step size ratio. In some embodiments, the darkness step size ratio is 25%. In some embodiments, the darkness step size ratio is less than 25%. In some embodiments, the darkness step size ratio is more than 25%. 
     In the above algorithm, the min calculations and max calculations are utilized to clip/normalize the second power level P(y) between 0% or 100% in case the calculated value is below 0% or above 100%. The following is an example calculation of the second power level P(y) in a hypothetical use case where the first power level x equals 60%, the darkness step size ratio Ratio % equals 25%, the darkness setting input Darkness equals +15%: 
     
       
         
           
             
               P 
               ⁡ 
               
                 ( 
                 y 
                 ) 
               
             
             = 
             
               
                 
                   60 
                   ⁢ 
                   % 
                 
                 + 
                 
                   
                     ( 
                     
                       
                         25 
                         ⁢ 
                         % 
                       
                       
                         100 
                         ⁢ 
                         % 
                       
                     
                     ) 
                   
                   × 
                   
                     ( 
                     
                       
                         + 
                         15 
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       % 
                     
                     ) 
                   
                 
               
               = 
               
                 
                   63.75 
                   ⁢ 
                   % 
                 
                 ≈ 
                 
                   64 
                   ⁢ 
                   % 
                 
               
             
           
         
       
     
       FIG. 83  is an example diagram  8300  that illustrates example relationships between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a plurality of darkness setting inputs. 
     In particular, curve  8301  illustrates an example relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating +100%. Curve  8303  illustrates an example relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating +75%. Curve  8305  illustrates an example relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating +50%. Curve  8307  illustrates an example relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating +25%. Curve  8309  illustrates an example relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating 0%. Curve  8311  illustrates an example relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating −25%. Curve  8313  illustrates an example relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating −50%. Curve  8315  illustrates an example relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating −75%. Curve  8317  illustrates an example relationship between the first power level and the second power level in response to receiving a darkness setting input indicating −100%. 
       FIG. 84  illustrates an example image of an example printout.  FIG. 85  illustrates an example image of the example printout in  FIG. 83  after the darkness is increased.  FIG. 86  illustrates an example image of the example printout in  FIG. 83  after the darkness is decreased. 
     As shown in the examples of  FIG. 83  to  FIG. 86 , in response to receiving a darkness increase (e.g. a positive darkness setting input) associated with the darkness setting input, the controller of the print head increases the first power level to the second power level. In other words, the second power level is higher than the first power level, making the entire printout darker. In response to receiving a darkness decrease (e.g. a negative darkness setting input) associated with the darkness setting input, the controller of the print head decreases the first power level to the second power level. In other words, the second power level is lower than the first power level, making the entire printout lighter. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 81 , subsequent to step/operation  8107 , the example method  8100  proceeds to step/operation  8109 . At step/operation  8109 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may receive contrast setting input. 
     In some embodiments, the contrast setting input may be received by a controller of a print head. As described above, the contrast setting input may indicate a desired level of contrast in a printout. In some embodiments, the contrast setting input may be expressed as a percentage between −100% to +100%. For example, a −100% contrast setting input indicates a reduction of contrast in the printout to the minimum, and a +100% contrast setting input indicates an increase of contrast in the printout to the maximum. In some embodiments, a positive contrast setting input indicates a contrast increase, while a negative contrast setting input indicates a contrast decrease. In some embodiments, when the contrast setting input equals to zero, there is no change in the contrast. In some embodiments, the contrast setting input may modify the slope and/or curve between white to black, thus either making the printout greyer (contrast decrease) or more black-and-white (contrast increase). 
     Referring back to  FIG. 81 , subsequent to step/operation  8109 , the example method  8100  proceeds to step/operation  8111 . At step/operation  8111 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may adjust power level. 
     In some embodiments, the controller of the print head may adjust the power level when the print head is in a continuous laser print mode (e.g. the laser source continuously emits laser beams). In some embodiments, the controller of the print head may adjust the power level when the print head is in a pulsed laser print mode (e.g. the laser source starts and stops emitting laser beams based on a regular rhythm). 
     In some embodiments, the controller of the print head may adjust the second power level to a third power level based at least in part on the contrast setting input. For example, the controller may adjust the power level based on the following example algorithm: 
     
       
         
           
             
               y 
               ⁢ 
               
                   
               
               ⁢ 
               1 
             
             = 
             
               A 
               × 
               
                 sin 
                 ⁡ 
                 
                   ( 
                   
                     2 
                     ⁢ 
                     π 
                     × 
                     
                       x 
                       f 
                     
                   
                   ) 
                 
               
             
           
         
       
       
         
           
             
               P 
               ⁡ 
               
                 ( 
                 y 
                 ) 
               
             
             = 
             
               max 
               ⁡ 
               
                 ( 
                 
                   
                     min 
                     ⁡ 
                     
                       ( 
                       
                         
                           x 
                           - 
                           
                             Contrast 
                             × 
                             y 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             1 
                             × 
                             
                               
                                 Ratio 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 
                                     
                                 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 % 
                               
                               
                                 100 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 % 
                               
                             
                           
                         
                         , 
                         100 
                       
                       ) 
                     
                   
                   , 
                   0 
                 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
     In the above algorithm, x is the second power level, which is between 0% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Contrast is the contrast setting input adjustable by the user, which is between −100% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Ratio % is contrast step size ratio that is predetermined and fixed by the printing apparatus based on the slope steepness between two contrast levels. In other words, adjusting the second power level to the third power level is further based on the contrast step size ratio. In some embodiments, the contrast step size ratio is 25%. In some embodiments, the contrast step size ratio is less than 25%. In some embodiments, the contrast step size ratio is more than 25%. A is a predetermined, fixed amplitude value for the curvature. In some embodiments, A is set to 1. In some embodiments, A is set to other values. 
     In the above algorithm, the min calculations and max calculations are utilized to clip/normalize the third power level P(y) between 0% or 100% in case the calculated value is below 0% or above 100%. f is the frequency value based on whether the power levels are normalized. In the above algorithm, the power levels are normalized, hence f is set to 100. In an example where the power level is not normalized, f is set to the max power level value. 
     The following is an example calculation of the third power level P(y) in a hypothetical use case where the second power level x equals 60%, the contrast step size ratio Ratio % equals 25%, the contrast setting input Contrast equals +55%, the amplitude A equals to 1, and the frequency f equals to 100%: 
     
       
         
           
             
               y 
               ⁢ 
               
                   
               
               ⁢ 
               1 
             
             = 
             
               
                 1 
                 × 
                 
                   sin 
                   ⁡ 
                   
                     ( 
                     
                       2 
                       ⁢ 
                       π 
                       × 
                       
                         
                           60 
                           ⁢ 
                           % 
                         
                         
                           100 
                           ⁢ 
                           % 
                         
                       
                     
                     ) 
                   
                 
               
               = 
               
                 - 
                 0.5877 
               
             
           
         
       
       
         
           
             
               P 
               ⁡ 
               
                 ( 
                 y 
                 ) 
               
             
             = 
             
               
                 
                   60 
                   ⁢ 
                   % 
                 
                 - 
                 
                   25 
                   ⁢ 
                   % 
                   × 
                   
                     ( 
                     
                       - 
                       0.5877 
                     
                     ) 
                   
                   × 
                   
                     
                       25 
                       ⁢ 
                       % 
                     
                     
                       100 
                       ⁢ 
                       % 
                     
                   
                 
               
               = 
               
                 62.2041947 
                 ≈ 
                 
                   62 
                   ⁢ 
                   % 
                 
               
             
           
         
       
     
       FIG. 87  illustrates an example diagram  8700  that includes a curve  8703  indicating a relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input. In particular, the contrast setting input indicates a contrast increase of +100%. The curve  8701  indicates a relationship between the second power level and the third power level when no contrast setting input is received. 
     In  FIG. 87 , the line  8705  indicates an example power level threshold. In the example shown in  FIG. 87 , the example power level threshold is set at 50%. In some embodiments, the example power level threshold may be less than 50%. In some embodiments, the example power level threshold may be more than 50%. 
     As illustrated in  FIG. 87 , in response to receiving a contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level satisfies a power level threshold (for example, more than 50%), the controller of the print head increases the second power level to the third power level (e.g. the third power level is higher than the second power level). In other words, when contrast is increased, the output power for the darker dot (for example, above 50%) is increased, making the dot even darker. 
     In response to receiving a contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level does not satisfy a power level threshold (for example, less than 50%), the controller of the print head decreases the second power level to the third power level (e.g. the third power level is lower than the second power level). In other words, when contrast is increased, the output power for the lighter dot (for example, below 50%) is decreased, making the dot even lighter. 
       FIG. 88  illustrates an example diagram  8800  that includes a curve  8804  indicating a relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input. In particular, the contrast setting input indicates a contrast decrease of −100%. The curve  8802  indicates a relationship between the second power level and the third power level when no contrast setting input is received. 
     In  FIG. 88 , the line  8806  indicates an example power level threshold. In the example shown in  FIG. 88 , the example power level threshold is set at 50%. In some embodiments, the example power level threshold may be less than 50%. In some embodiments, the example power level threshold may be more than 50%. 
     As illustrated in  FIG. 88 , in response to receiving a contrast decrease associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level satisfies a power level threshold (for example, more than 50%), the controller of the print head decreases the second power level to the third power level (e.g. the third power level is lower than the second power level). In other words, when contrast is decreased, the output power for the darker dot (for example, above 50%) is decreased, making the dot lighter. 
     In response to receiving a contrast decrease associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level does not satisfy a power level threshold (for example, less than 50%), the controller of the print head increases the second power level to the third power level (e.g. the third power level is higher than the second power level). In other words, when contrast is decreased, the output power for the lighter dot (for example, below 50%) is increased, making the dot darker. 
       FIG. 89  is an example diagram  8900  that illustrates example relationships between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a plurality of contrast setting inputs. 
     In particular, line  8919  indicates an example power level threshold at 50%. Curve  8901  illustrates an example relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating +100%. Curve  8903  illustrates an example relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating +75%. Curve  8905  illustrates an example relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating +50%. Curve  8907  illustrates an example relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating +25%. Curve  8909  illustrates an example relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating 0%. Curve  8911  illustrates an example relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating −25%. Curve  8913  illustrates an example relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating −50%. Curve  8915  illustrates an example relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating −75%. Curve  8917  illustrates an example relationship between the second power level and the third power level in response to receiving a contrast setting input indicating −100%. 
       FIG. 90  illustrates an example image of an example printout.  FIG. 91  illustrates an example image of the example printout in  FIG. 90  after the contrast is increased.  FIG. 92  illustrates an example image of the example printout in  FIG. 90  after the contrast is decreased. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 81 , subsequent to step/operation  8111 , the example method  8100  proceeds to step/operation  8115 . At step/operation  8115 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may provide input power. 
     In some embodiments, the controller of the print head may provide the third power level to a laser power control system of the print head. As described above, the third power level has been adjusted based on the darkness setting input and the contrast setting input. The laser power control system of the print head is configured to cause a laser subsystem of the print head to print the first dot at the third power level. As such, the printing apparatus prints the first dot at the desired level of darkness and the desired level of contrast as provided by the user through the darkness setting input and the contrast setting input, respectively. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 81 , subsequent to step/operation  8115 , the example method  8100  proceeds to step/operation  8117  and ends. 
     In some embodiments, subsequent to step/operation  8111  and prior to step/operation  8115 , the example method  8100  may proceed to step/operation  8113 . At step/operation  8117 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may apply smoothing/sharpening algorithm. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 93 , an example method  9300  is illustrated. In particular, the example method  9300  illustrates example steps/operations of adjusting power levels in response to smoothness setting input and/or sharpness setting input. 
     In various embodiments of the present disclosure, by modifying the darkness and contrast, it is possible to see artifact in the edges separating a black-and-white area of the print, which would usually be seen between bars of a barcode. Thus, subsequent to adjusting the power levels based on the darkness setting input and/or contrast setting input, example methods of the present disclosure may further adjust the power level to increase smoothness or sharpness of the edges. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 93 , the example method  9300  starts at block  9301  and then proceeds to step/operation  9303 . At step/operation  9303 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may determine a plurality of dots. 
     For example, a controller of a print head of a printing apparats may determine a first dot, a second dot, and a third dot from an image buffer or from print data. Each of the first dot, the second dot, and the third dot are to be printed by the printing apparatus on a print media. In some embodiments, the second dot is positioned between the first dot and the third dot. For example, the first dot may be on the left, the second dot may be in the middle, and the third dot may be on the right. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 93 , subsequent to step/operation  9303 , the example method  9300  proceeds to step/operation  9305 . At step/operation  9305 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may determine a plurality of power levels associated with the plurality of dots. 
     Continuing from the example above, the controller may determine a first power level associated with the first dot, a second power level associated with the second dot, and a third power level associated with the third dot. As described above, each of the first power level, the second power level, and the third power level has been adjusted based on the darkness setting input and/or contrast setting input (for example, based on the example methods described in at least  FIG. 81 ). 
     Referring back to  FIG. 93 , subsequent to step/operation  9305 , the example method  9300  proceeds to step/operation  9307 . At step/operation  9307 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may receive a smoothness setting input or a sharpness setting input. 
     In the present disclosure, the term “smoothness setting input” refers to an input provided by a user (for example, through various user interfaces described herein such as, but not limited to, the UI  140  described above in connection with  FIG. 1 ) that indicates a user request to increase smoothness of the edges in the printout. In other words, the smoothness setting input indicates a user request to decrease the separation between black and white in the printout and provide a gentler gradient between a white-to-black area. 
     The term “sharpness setting input” refers to an input provided by a user (for example, through various user interfaces described herein such as, but not limited to, the UI  140  described above in connection with  FIG. 1 ) that indicates a user request to increase sharpness of the edges in the printout. In other words, the sharpness setting input indicates a user request to increase the separation between black and white in the printout and reduce the gradient between a white-to-black area. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 93 , subsequent to step/operation  9307 , the example method  9300  proceeds to step/operation  9309 . At step/operation  9309 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may adjust at least one power level. 
     In some embodiments, the controller may adjust the second power level based at least in part on the first power level and the third power level in response to receiving a smoothness setting input or a sharpness setting input. For example, the controller may calculate a convolution over the three dots (e.g. a left dot, a current/middle dot, and a right dot), and apply an array multiplication. 
     For example, in response to receiving a smoothness setting input, the controller may adjust the power level based on the following example algorithm: 
       dot′ second =dot second ×⅓×[(1×dot first )(1×dot second )(1×dot third )]
 
     In the above example, dot first  is the power level associated with the first dot, dot second  is the power level associated with the second dot prior to receiving a smoothness setting input, dot′ second  is the power level associated with the second dot subsequent to receiving a smoothness setting input, and dot third  is the power level associated with the third dot. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the smoothness setting input, the printing apparatus may print the second dot based on the power level dot′ second . In some embodiments, the kernel matrix above can be different than the example algorithm above. In some embodiments, the kernel matrix could be extended to be 3×3 instead of 1×3. 
     As another example, in response to receiving a sharpness setting input, the controller may adjust the power level based on the following example algorithm: 
       dot′ second =dot second ×⅓×[(−1×dot first )(2×dot second )(−1×dot third )]
 
     In the above example, dot first  is the power level associated with the first dot, dot second  is the power level associated with the second dot prior to receiving a sharpness setting input, dot′ second  is the power level associated with the second dot subsequent to receiving a sharpness setting input, and dot third  is the power level associated with the third dot. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the sharpness setting input, the printing apparatus may print the second dot based on the power level dot′ second . In some embodiments, the kernel matrix above can be different than the example algorithm above. In some embodiments, the kernel matrix could be extended to be 3×3 instead of 1×3. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 93 , subsequent to step/operation  9309 , the example method  9300  proceeds to step/operation  9311  and ends. 
     While the description above provides example methods and algorithms of adjusting the power level based on the darkness setting input, the contrast setting input, the smoothness setting input, and/or the sharpness setting input, it is noted that the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the description above. In some examples, in response to the darkness setting input, the contrast setting input, the smoothness setting input, and/or the sharpness setting input, a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus may adjust the duty cycle of the print head. 
     In contrast with a printing apparatus utilizing thermal printing technologies (which adjusts the print duration of a full line), an example printing apparatus utilizing laser printing technologies may operate in a pulsed mode and may adjust the duty cycle of the pulse per dot. As such, an example printing apparatus utilizing laser printing technologies enables proper print quality and greyscale control, while a printing apparatus utilizing thermal printing technologies may only be able to conduct a gross adjustment, making some part of the label with better print quality while other would be worse (due to dot history control, which cannot be optimized for all type of combination). 
     In the present disclosure, the term “duty cycle” refers to the amount of time that the laser source is turned ON when printing a dot as compared to the total amount of time of printing the dot. Referring now to  FIG. 94  to  FIG. 96 , three example duty cycles are illustrated. 
       FIG. 94  illustrates an example 50% duty cycle, where the laser source is turn ON 50% of the time when printing a dot and turned OFF 50% of the time when printing the dot. In some example, the resulting average power making the printed dot be equivalent to a 50% grey.  FIG. 95  illustrates an example 100% duty cycle, where the laser source is turn ON 100% of the time when printing a dot and turned OFF 0% of the time when printing the dot. In some example, the resulting average power would make the printed dot be equivalent to a full black.  FIG. 96  illustrates an example 0% duty cycle, where the laser source is turn ON 0% of the time when printing a dot and turned OFF 100% of the time when printing the dot. In some example, the resulting average power would make the printed dot be equivalent to a full white. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 97 , an example method  9700  is illustrated. In particular, the example method  9700  illustrates example steps/operations of adjusting duty cycles in response to darkness setting input and/or contrast setting input. In some embodiments, the contrast and darkness setting modification conducted by a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ), which may improve the printing operation efficiency as the main printer CPU does not handle any of the intensive darkness/contrast adjustments. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 97 , the example method  9700  starts at block  9701  and then proceeds to step/operation  9703 . At step/operation  9703 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may receive print data. 
     As described above, the print data may be in the form of an image buffer. In some embodiments, a processor of the printing apparatus (for example, the main CPU of the printing apparatus) may receive raw printing data, which comprises data representing barcode, text, image, and/or the like that are to be printed on a print media. The processor of the printing apparatus (for example, the main CPU of the printing apparatus) may generate an image buffer based at least in part on the raw print data and provides a temporary storage for the raw print data. Prior to the print head beginning to print the barcode, text, image, and/or the like represented by the raw print data, the processor of the printing apparatus may provide the image buffer to a controller of a print head (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ). 
     In some embodiments, the print data may indicate at least a first duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first duty cycle is associated with a first dot to be printed by the print head on a print media. In examples where no darkness or contrast adjustments are made, the duty cycle provided to the laser source in the print head equals to the first duty cycle. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 97 , subsequent to step/operation  9703 , the example method  9700  proceeds to step/operation  9705 . At step/operation  9705 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may receive darkness setting input. 
     In some embodiments, the darkness setting input may be received by a controller of a print head. As described above, the darkness setting input may indicate a desired level of darkness in a printout. In some embodiments, the darkness setting input may be expressed as a percentage between −100% to +100%. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 97 , subsequent to step/operation  9705 , the example method  9700  proceeds to step/operation  9707 . At step/operation  9707 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may adjust duty cycle. 
     In some embodiments, the controller of the print head may adjust the first duty cycle to a second duty cycle based at least in part on the darkness setting input. For example, the controller may adjust the duty cycle based on the following example algorithm: 
     
       
         
           
             
               P 
               ⁡ 
               
                 ( 
                 y 
                 ) 
               
             
             = 
             
               max 
               ⁡ 
               
                 ( 
                 
                   
                     min 
                     ⁡ 
                     
                       ( 
                       
                         
                           x 
                           + 
                           
                             
                               
                                 Ratio 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 
                                     
                                 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 % 
                               
                               
                                 100 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 % 
                               
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             Darkness 
                           
                         
                         , 
                         100 
                       
                       ) 
                     
                   
                   , 
                   0 
                 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
     In the above algorithm, x is the first duty cycle, which is between 0% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Darkness is the darkness setting input adjustable by the user, which is between −100% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Ratio % is the darkness step size ratio that is predetermined and fixed by the printing apparatus based on the step size between two darkness levels. In other words, adjusting the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle is further based on the darkness step size ratio. In some embodiments, the darkness step size ratio is 25%. In some embodiments, the darkness step size ratio is less than 25%. In some embodiments, the darkness step size ratio is more than 25%. 
     In the above algorithm, the min calculations and max calculations are utilized to clip/normalize the second duty cycle P(y) between 0% or 100% in case the calculated value is below 0% or above 100%. The following is an example calculation of the second duty cycle P(y) in a hypothetical use case where the first duty cycle x equals 60%, the darkness step size ratio Ratio % equals 25%, the darkness setting input Darkness equals +15%: 
     
       
         
           
             
               P 
               ⁡ 
               
                 ( 
                 y 
                 ) 
               
             
             = 
             
               
                 
                   60 
                   ⁢ 
                   % 
                 
                 + 
                 
                   
                     ( 
                     
                       
                         25 
                         ⁢ 
                         % 
                       
                       
                         100 
                         ⁢ 
                         % 
                       
                     
                     ) 
                   
                   × 
                   
                     ( 
                     
                       
                         + 
                         15 
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       % 
                     
                     ) 
                   
                 
               
               = 
               
                 
                   63.75 
                   ⁢ 
                   % 
                 
                 ≈ 
                 
                   64 
                   ⁢ 
                   % 
                 
               
             
           
         
       
     
     As illustrated in the above example calculation, in response to receiving a darkness increase (e.g. a positive darkness setting input) associated with the darkness setting input, the controller of the print head increases the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle. In other words, the second duty cycle is higher than the first duty cycle, making the entire printout darker. In response to receiving a darkness decrease (e.g. a negative darkness setting input) associated with the darkness setting input, the controller of the print head decreases the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle. In other words, the second duty cycle is lower than the first duty cycle, making the entire printout lighter. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 97 , subsequent to step/operation  9707 , the example method  9700  proceeds to step/operation  9709 . At step/operation  9709 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may receive contrast setting input. 
     In some embodiments, the contrast setting input may be received by a controller of a print head. As described above, the contrast setting input may indicate a desired level of contrast in a printout. In some embodiments, the contrast setting input may be expressed as a percentage between −100% to +100%. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 97 , subsequent to step/operation  9709 , the example method  9700  proceeds to step/operation  9711 . At step/operation  9711 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may adjust duty cycle 
     In some embodiments, the controller of the print head may adjust the second duty cycle to a third duty cycle based at least in part on the contrast setting input. For example, the controller may adjust the duty cycle based on the following example algorithm: 
     
       
         
           
             
               y 
               ⁢ 
               
                   
               
               ⁢ 
               1 
             
             = 
             
               A 
               × 
               
                 sin 
                 ⁡ 
                 
                   ( 
                   
                     2 
                     ⁢ 
                     π 
                     × 
                     
                       x 
                       f 
                     
                   
                   ) 
                 
               
             
           
         
       
       
         
           
             
               P 
               ⁡ 
               
                 ( 
                 y 
                 ) 
               
             
             = 
             
               max 
               ⁡ 
               
                 ( 
                 
                   
                     min 
                     ⁡ 
                     
                       ( 
                       
                         
                           x 
                           - 
                           
                             Contrast 
                             × 
                             y 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             1 
                             × 
                             
                               
                                 Ratio 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 
                                     
                                 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 % 
                               
                               
                                 100 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 % 
                               
                             
                           
                         
                         , 
                         100 
                       
                       ) 
                     
                   
                   , 
                   0 
                 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
     In the above algorithm, x is the second duty cycle, which is between 0% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Contrast is the contrast setting input adjustable by the user, which is between −100% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). Ratio % is the contrast step size ratio that is predetermined and fixed by the printing apparatus based on the slope steepness between two contrast levels. In other words, adjusting the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle is further based on the contrast step size ratio. In some embodiments, the contrast step size ratio is 25%. In some embodiments, the contrast step size ratio is less than 25%. In some embodiments, the contrast step size ratio is more than 25%. A is a predetermined, fixed amplitude value for the curvature. In some embodiments, A is set to 1. In some embodiments, A is set to other values. 
     In the above algorithm, the min calculations and max calculations are utilized to clip/normalize the third duty cycle P(y) between 0% or 100% in case the calculated value is below 0% or above 100%. f is the frequency value based on whether the duty cycles are normalized. In the above algorithm, the duty cycles are normalized, hence f is set to 100. In an example where the duty cycle is not normalized, f is set to the max duty cycle value. 
     The following is an example calculation of the third duty cycle P(y) in a hypothetical use case where the second duty cycle x equals 60%, the contrast step size ratio Ratio % equals 25%, the contrast setting input Contrast equals +55%, the amplitude A equals to 1, and the frequency f equals to 100%: 
     
       
         
           
             
               y 
               ⁢ 
               
                   
               
               ⁢ 
               1 
             
             = 
             
               
                 1 
                 × 
                 
                   sin 
                   ⁡ 
                   
                     ( 
                     
                       2 
                       ⁢ 
                       π 
                       × 
                       
                         
                           60 
                           ⁢ 
                           % 
                         
                         
                           100 
                           ⁢ 
                           % 
                         
                       
                     
                     ) 
                   
                 
               
               = 
               
                 - 
                 0.5877 
               
             
           
         
       
       
         
           
             
               P 
               ⁡ 
               
                 ( 
                 y 
                 ) 
               
             
             = 
             
               
                 
                   60 
                   ⁢ 
                   % 
                 
                 - 
                 
                   25 
                   ⁢ 
                   % 
                   × 
                   
                     ( 
                     
                       - 
                       0.5877 
                     
                     ) 
                   
                   × 
                   
                     
                       25 
                       ⁢ 
                       % 
                     
                     
                       100 
                       ⁢ 
                       % 
                     
                   
                 
               
               = 
               
                 62.2041947 
                 ≈ 
                 
                   62 
                   ⁢ 
                   % 
                 
               
             
           
         
       
     
     Similar to those described above, in response to receiving a contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle satisfies a duty cycle threshold (for example, more than 50%), the controller of the print head increases the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle (e.g. the third duty cycle is higher than the second duty cycle). In other words, when contrast is increased, the duty cycle for the darker dot (for example, above 50%) is increased, making the dot even darker. In response to receiving a contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle does not satisfy a duty cycle threshold (for example, less than 50%), the controller of the print head decreases the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle (e.g. the third duty cycle is lower than the second duty cycle). In other words, when contrast is increased, the duty cycle for the lighter dot (for example, below 50%) is decreased, making the dot even lighter. 
     Similar to those described above, in response to receiving a contrast decrease associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle satisfies a duty cycle threshold (for example, more than 50%), the controller of the print head decreases the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle (e.g. the third duty cycle is lower than the second duty cycle). In other words, when contrast is decreased, the duty cycle for the darker dot (for example, above 50%) is decreased, making the dot lighter. In response to receiving a contrast decrease associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle does not satisfy a duty cycle threshold (for example, less than 50%), the controller of the print head increases the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle (e.g. the third duty cycle is higher than the second duty cycle). In other words, when contrast is decreased, the duty cycle for the lighter dot (for example, below 50%) is increased, making the dot darker. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 97 , subsequent to step/operation  9711 , the example method  9700  proceeds to step/operation  9713 . At step/operation  9713 , a processing circuitry (e.g. a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  of the print head  302  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 ) may provide duty cycle. 
     In some embodiments, the controller of the print head may provide the third duty cycle to a laser power control system of the print head. As described above, the third duty cycle has been adjusted based on the darkness setting input and the contrast setting input. The laser power control system of the print head is configured to cause a laser subsystem of the print head to print the first dot at the third duty cycle. As such, the printing apparatus prints the first dot at the desired level of darkness and the desired level of contrast as provided by the user through the darkness setting input and the contrast setting input, respectively. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 97 , subsequent to step/operation  9713 , the example method  9700  proceeds to step/operation  9715  and ends. 
     While the description above provides example algorithms for adjusting darkness and/or contrast, it is noted that the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the description above. For example, example embodiments may implement one or more lookup tables in addition to, or in alternative of, the example algorithms. 
     As described above, when implementing example algorithms, power level associated with each dot will be input to the darkness algorithm and then to the contrast algorithm to calculate the resulting output power, with little to no need for prior calculation. The last calculated power level is sent to the laser power control subsystem for printing the current dot. 
     In embodiments where one or more lookup tables are implemented, the entire lookup table for darkness adjustments and/or for contrast adjustments will be calculated in advance for each of the possible power levels and/or duty cycles. In other others, a processor may calculate the entire input range from 0 to 100% for each of the lookup tables. When an input (e.g. the first power level or the first duty cycle) is provided to the controller of the print head, the controller can directly fetch the resulting output without doing any calculation. 
     In some embodiments, a processor may calculate a lookup table for the darkness adjustment with respect to power levels based on the examples described above including, but not limited to, those described in connection with at least  FIG. 81 . In some embodiments, a processor may calculate a lookup table for the contrast adjustment with respect to power levels based on the examples described above including, but not limited to, those described in connection with at least  FIG. 81 . In some embodiments, a processor may calculate a lookup table for the darkness adjustment and the contrast adjustment with respect to power levels based on the examples described above including, but not limited to, those described in connection with at least  FIG. 81 . 
     In some embodiments, a processor may calculate a lookup table for the darkness adjustment with respect to duty cycles based on the examples described above including, but not limited to, those described in connection with at least  FIG. 97 . In some embodiments, a processor may calculate a lookup table for the contrast adjustment with respect to duty cycles based on the examples described above including, but not limited to, those described in connection with at least  FIG. 97 . In some embodiments, a processor may calculate a lookup table for the darkness adjustment and the contrast adjustment with respect to duty cycles based on the examples described above including, but not limited to. those described in connection with at least  FIG. 97 . 
     As an example, an example simplified lookup table for a darkness setting input indicating +50% is provided below. The lookup table can work for both power level and duty cycle. For example, if the first power level or duty cycle is 30%, the second power level or duty cycle is 42.5%. As another example, if the first power level or duty cycle is 60%, the second power level or duty cycle is 72.5%. In both examples, the total power would be increased to make the dot darker. 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Example Darkness Setting Lookup Table 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 First Power Level or 
                 Second Power Level or duty Cycle 
               
               
                   
                 Duty Cycle 
                 (Darkness Setting Input = 50%) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                  0% 
                 12.5% 
               
               
                   
                 10% 
                 22.5% 
               
               
                   
                 20% 
                 32.5% 
               
               
                   
                 30% 
                 42.5% 
               
               
                   
                 40% 
                 52.5% 
               
               
                   
                 50% 
                 62.5% 
               
               
                   
                 60% 
                 72.5% 
               
               
                   
                 70% 
                 82.5% 
               
               
                   
                 80% 
                 92.5% 
               
               
                   
                 90% 
                  100% 
               
               
                   
                 100%  
                  100% 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     As such, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, the controller of the print head may adjust the first power level to the second power level based on a darkness setting lookup table. Additionally, or alternatively, the controller of the print head may adjust the second power level to the third power level further based on a contrast setting lookup table. 
     In some embodiments, a combination of both example algorithms and lookup tables may be used. For example, the controller of the print head may adjust the first power level to the second power level based on a darkness setting lookup table, and may adjust the second power level to the third power level based on the example algorithm described above in connection with at least  FIG. 81 . As another example, the controller of the print head may adjust the first power level to the second power level based on the example algorithm described above in connection with at least  FIG. 81 , and may adjust the second power level to the third power level based on a contrast setting lookup table. As another example, the controller of the print head may adjust the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle based on a darkness setting lookup table, and may adjust the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle based on the example algorithm described above in connection with at least  FIG. 97 . As another example, the controller of the print head may adjust the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle based on the example algorithm described above in connection with at least  FIG. 97 , and may adjust the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle based on a contrast setting lookup table. 
     As such, various embodiments of the present disclosure provide improvements in darkness and contrast setting adjustments in a print apparatus utilizing laser printing technologies. For example, calculations and operations associated with darkness and contrast setting adjustments are handled by the laser print head itself for faster processing and in order to free the main printer CPU from calculation. Various examples of darkness and contrast algorithms are provided to adjust either or both the output power level and/or duty cycle for each dot to be printed, thus bringing an improved print quality on the print media by controlling accurately the greyscale level for each individual dot. Various example embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to not only a laser printer in a continuous laser mode, but also in a pulsed laser mode. Various example methods of the present disclosure can be done through mathematic algorithm, via one or more lookup tables, or a combination of both. 
     LPH Smart Print Head 
     In many examples, thermal print heads may be passive components with no in-built intelligence. An example thermal print head may be configured to react only to a control signal/data signal sent by an example printer. In addition, many thermal print heads may be incompatible with ILIT media. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, systems, methods and apparatuses with intelligence to provide a variety of advantageous features are provided. In some examples, print raster, vector, support to reprint, error handling, printer synchronization and active printer communication capabilities are provided. 
     In some embodiments, the print head may comprise a plurality of components/element. For example, the print head may comprise a microcontroller unit, an FPGA, Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic Random-Access Memory (DDR SDRAM) memory, a bi-directional communication bus and/or the like. 
     In some examples, a print head for support of raster/vector printing, complete synchronization with printer and media feed with laser scanning functions may be provided. The example print head may provide bi-directional communication with an example printer via a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus and control signals. Using the SPI bus, in some examples, the printer may provide firmware updates for the example microcontroller unit and/or FPGA. In one example, the firmware updates may be implemented when the print head boots up. A checksum feature may be implemented to ensure that firmware is not corrupted and to provide means to revert to the previous firmware in the event of upgrade failure. In some examples, bi-directional communication may facilitate print head setup, print head alerting (e.g., alerting a printer of an error/interrupt functionality), firmware upgrades, motor and laser synchronization, and/or the like. In contrast with many existing solutions, the example print head may be configured to store additional data (e.g., multiple lines of data). Accordingly, the example print head may utilize RAM memory to provide auto-reprint capabilities (e.g., an entire label) without needing to obtain/fetch data from an example printer. Additionally, the example print head may provide real-time error monitoring and error reporting conditions to the example printer (e.g., temperature changes, power rail out of range, critical laser error, verify genuine ILIT media is inserted, perform self-diagnostics, and/or the like). The example print head may enable in the field firmware upgrades for continuous print head improvement. In some examples, the print head may integrate safety interlock features in order to shut off a laser when unsafe conditions are detected. Additionally, the print head may be configured to detect when a non-ILIT media is inserted into the printer, support color and greyscale printer, or the like. 
     In some examples, the microcontroller unit may be configured as the main controller in order to program various PLL (which are used for polygon motor speed control and laser dot clock), setup/configure the print head for any print label, and/or provide active monitoring for error conditions. 
     In some examples, the FPGA may be configured to receive print data and convert each dot into a power value in order to facilitate black/white printing or greyscale printing. Additionally, the example FPGA may coordinate synchronization between the polygon motor, laser scan clock and printer motor stepping in order to ensure that all parts are optimally synchronized without any latency which may result, in some examples, in a slanted printout. Additionally, the FPGA may bridge communication between the printer CPU and print head microcontroller unit, provide additional safety interlock handling, or the like. The example system may support both raster printing and vector printing, as well as an ability to reprint a full label without fetching data from the printer side. As noted above, in some examples, the print head may be equipped with a DDR SDRAM memory. 
     As discussed herein, vector printing may follow a calculated path instead of printing line by line. As such, the ability to store print image data in internal memory further supports vector printing functionality. Additionally, in an instance in which an error occurs on a current label and a reprint is requested (in vector or raster mode), the print head can directly fetch the data from memory to reprint the most recently printed label and/or a number of recently printed labels. 
     Identify and Calculate the Media Starting Offset Position for Laser Enabled Barcode Printers Using ML 
     In some examples, the starting position of a media for a laser enabled printing apparatus may be incorrectly positioned such that a printed label may be substandard and/or unusable. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, systems, methods and techniques for automatically determining a media starting offset position for a printing apparatus are provided. 
     Firstly, a manually adjusted start position offset may be provided. For example, values associated with a position of an example media, motor and/or hexagon mirror may be provided. Then, data associated with the vibration and movement of the printing apparatus due to an external environment (e.g., factory vibrations, belt movement, sound vibration, and/or the like) and an internal environment (e.g., motor, media characteristics including weight, and/or the like) in addition to the manually adjusted start position offset may be captured. By way of example, vibration of the example printing apparatus may increase if the motor is trying to pull more weighted media, which may result in displacement of the laser offset. Based on the captured data/measured parameters, training data may be generated. In various examples, the training data may be utilized to train a Machine Learning algorithm. The Machine Learning algorithm may be configured to automatically adjust the start position offset, which in turn may internally adjust the example hexagon mirror and media position. In some examples, the Machine Learning algorithm may identify patterns. For example, the Machine Learning algorithm may be trained to identify a ratio of the incident vibrations in relation to the start position offset and generate a predictive output corresponding with a target start position offset from which printing may commence. The Machine Learning algorithm may be or comprise a hierarchical clustering algorithm configured to identify similarities and patterns associated with captured data/measured parameters (e.g., detected vibrations) and automatically adjust the start position offset accordingly. 
     Energizing Drum Roll for Enabling the Low Power Laser Usage in Laser Based Barcode Printing 
     As described herein, in some examples, a high power laser beam may be utilized to pre-energize/heat an example media prior to a lower power laser beam (e.g., writing laser beam) impinging a mark on the example media. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, an energizing drum roll may be provided. The energizing drum roll may be configured to heat the media up to a threshold level such that less power is required to pre-energize/heat the media. Thus, a lower power laser beam may be utilized as the pre-energizing beam thereby reducing overall power consumption by the printing apparatus. 
     Auto Laser Power Adjustment Based on the Media Type for Laser Barcode Printer for Avoiding Hazards 
     In some examples, a power output of an example laser source may need to be constant. Damage may result (e.g., a fire) if a non-standard media is used with an example printing apparatus. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, a light beam based sensor is provided. The example light beam based sensor may be utilized to determine a media type and may operate to control a power output of a laser source that is focused on the example media based at least in part on the detected media type. In so doing, potential damage to the media and its surroundings may be averted. 
     Laser Print Head Focus Test Methodology 
     In order to obtain a target DPI and provide a good print quality, the laser focal point may need to be precisely set and within a target range when mounted on a printing apparatus. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, an automated process for determining the laser focal point of a print head is provided. In some examples, the automated process may measure and verify that a focal point setting is within a target range. In some examples, a printed pattern may be used to determine a corresponding reflectance value for a specified laser focal point. In some examples, an example printed pattern may facilitate measurement of DPI and a size deviation from a target value or range. In various examples, a verifier scanner, reflective sensor, one or RGB sensors, one or more single-color light sources, or an ambient light source may be utilized to determine a laser focal point. 
     In some examples, a beam generated by an example laser source may converge at a focal point in order to print a small dot. The power of the laser print head may be defined at this location for a specific laser reactive media. The dot size may progressively increase as printing occurs outside the focal point. This may also decrease the dot reflectance value as the power is spread to a larger area. The term reflectance may refer to an amount of light reflected and may be represented/measured as a percentage. 
     In some examples, a first printed pattern comprising a plurality of dots arranged in a matrix format may be used to measure a laser focal point. The dot size may be defined by the smallest resolution of the laser print head and the distance between dots (e.g., between two center points of two respective dots) and may be determined based on a reflectance value of a group of printed dots. In various examples, dots may be distinct when printed at focal point and may appear larger when printed outside the focal point. Thus, a dot size may increase when printing occurs further away from a particular focal point. A reflectance value of a plurality of printed dots may vary as the dot sizes change. For example, a reflectance value printed at a focal point will result at a maximum due to wide white spaces in between the dots. As the dot sizes becomes larger, the area of the white gap may shrink thus reducing the reflectance. A correlation graph may be determined based on reflectance values that is printed at different locations with respect to a focal point. In turn, this may be used to determine the location of the focal point or determine whether the focal point is within a target range. 
     In some examples, an example printing apparatus may utilize an RGB sensor with ambient light in order to detect laser reactive media. The example RGB sensor may detect reflected light and generate one or more signals corresponding with the reflected light. The one or more signals may be mapped at different reflectance values. In another example, a CMOS sensor with a red light source may be utilized to capture the grayscale level of the printed image. In another example, a second printed pattern may be used to ensure accurate adjustment of a focal point (e.g., by using a series of alternating bars and spaces of equal widths). In some examples, the second printed pattern may be printed vertically, horizontally or in both directions. Additionally and/or alternatively, a chess pattern comprising black and white squares of equal sizes may be used. If the focal point is out of a target range, the printed area will be wider than the space area. The acquisition of the printed pattern reflectance may be performed by a sensing device/element (e.g., a verifier scanner, a reflective sensor or an RGB sensor) placed in front of the printer and after the printing line. The sensing device/element may generate a corresponding reflectance waveform. The signal provided by the sensing device/element may analyzed to determine the size of each element using an algorithm. Based on the delta difference between the space width and the bar width, the system may determine whether the focal point is set correctly. In some examples, the delta difference may be determined according to the following equation: 
       Delta=average(bars)−average(space)
 
     The focal point may be set when delta is below a particular threshold (e.g., 0.2 dot size). The focal point may be adjusted using a mechanical fixture to modify a position of the print head based on the determined delta difference. Using the techniques described herein, a laser focal point may be measured and set to provide optimum print resolution and print quality. 
     Print Head Scanning Beam Alignment to Moving Media 
     In many examples, the complexity of an optical assembly in a high-power laser print head may cause variability in scanning laser beam positioning and orientation. Compensation for this variability may be required to efficiently maintain performance, ease manufacturability, and ensure repeatability/consistency of print quality. 
     Using the systems, methods and techniques disclosed herein, easier manufacturability, performance repeatability, higher yields on manufacturing lines and increased consistency of product performance unit-to-unit may be achieved. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, techniques for controlling focus, line position, and line skew in the print head are provided such that fine-tuning operations can be eliminated and/or substantially reduced. As described herein, an example optical assembly may comprise a focusing component comprising one or more mirrors (e.g., fixed fold mirrors disposed downstream with respect to collimation optics, a rotating polygon and a scan lens). In some examples, at least one of the example mirrors may be adjusted in multiple degrees of freedom to achieve the required alignment. In some examples, a fold mirror having a reflection angle closest to normal may be utilized. For instance, a mirror with an incidence angle of approximately 10 degrees may be utilized. 
     In various embodiments, the example mirror may comprise an elongated, narrow rectangle that is configured to relay a single scanning line from a prior mirror to a subsequent mirror. In some examples, a mount may be placed behind the example mirror to secure it (e.g., using a glue or other adhesive). In some examples, the mount may be a rectangular-shaped metallic member. The example mount may comprise socket joints in a plurality of corners (e.g., three of the four corners of the example rectangular mount). Additionally, a plurality of screws with ball heads may be inserted into the socket joints and threaded into the print head housing. In order to adjust the example mirror, the position of the plurality of screws (e.g., three screws) may be adjusted to change the position of the example mirror by shortening or lengthening the path length to an example print media. In some examples, one of the plurality of screws may be vertically aligned and one of the plurality of screws may be horizontally aligned to serve as a pivot point. The vertically aligned screw may be adjusted to shift the targeting of a scan line up and down, aiming for a subsequent mirror and an exit window aperture. In some examples, the horizontally aligned screw may be adjusted to cause a slight tilt of the line. At the same time the line may be shifted to the left or right, but the laser on-off timing can be shifted to compensate so that the print line remains horizontally oriented. In various examples, adjustments may be monitored in real time by a line width profiler to verify that a target is hit. Accordingly, the unit may be integrated into a printing apparatus without further adjustments. 
     Media Jam Detection 
     In many examples, in order to avoid laser direct firing on the print platen, it may be necessary to stop laser power when a media jam occurs. In some examples, the media may feed incorrectly (i.e., wrap around) an example platen roller when misaligned. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, systems, methods and techniques for preventing direct exposure of a print platen to laser beams (e.g., in the event of a media jam) are provided. 
     In some examples, a media jam sensor may be provided to detect a media jam event during printing operations. The example media jam sensor may be or comprise a transmissive optical sensor and encoder disk. The example encoder disk may link to the example platen roller within which the encoder disk will be rotated by the platen roller during media movement. The transmissive sensor may detect and record movement of the example media and provide feedback to an example processor. If a media jam event is detected (e.g., if the media is feeding into the platen roller incorrectly), a slow down or sudden stop of an encoder count may be detected. In some examples, the encoder delta may be computed according to the formula below: 
       EncoderDelta=EncoderCount i+n −EncoderCount i  
 
     In various examples, a media jam event may be identified if the EncoderDelta value falls below a media jam threshold. In one example if the EncoderDelta value falls below half of the averaged EncoderDelta, a media jam event may be identified. In some examples, the media jam threshold may be defined in accordance with the formula below: 
     
       
         
           
             MediaJamThreshold 
             = 
             
               
                 
                   ∑ 
                   
                     i 
                     = 
                     1 
                   
                   n 
                 
                 ⁢ 
                 
                     
                 
                 ⁢ 
                 
                   ( 
                   
                     EncoderDelta 
                     n 
                   
                   ) 
                 
               
               
                 2 
                 ⁢ 
                 n 
               
             
           
         
       
     
     Low Inductance, High Frequency, High Power Laser Drive Circuit 
     As described herein, an example printing apparatus may utilize high power laser sources to activate reactive media at a target print speed rate. In various examples, high frequency lasers operating at 1 MHz or higher may be utilized to print high resolution images/text at high speeds. This poses a challenge in achieving high laser on/off speeds as high power laser sources may be physically larger and typically used in lower speed applications, such as welding, where high frequency is not required. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, systems and techniques for facilitating high speed operations are provided. In some examples, circuitry, component selection, placement, and PCB routing may be optimized to minimize inductance in a high current laser drive loop. The following formula describes Ohms Law in relation to an inductor: 
     
       
         
           
             V 
             = 
             
               L 
               ⁢ 
               
                 di 
                 dt 
               
             
           
         
       
     
     In the above formula, V is the instantaneous voltage across an inductor; L is a measure of inductance (henries); and 
     
       
         
           
             di 
             dt 
           
         
       
     
     is the instantaneous rate of current change (Amps/second). 
     Accordingly, in one example, a change in current (di) of 14 A nominally and a fixed voltage of approximately 2V may turn an example laser source on at full power. The inductance (L) must be low (e.g., in the order of nano-henries) in order to permit a low rise/fall time (dt) and high frequency. This high switching current path or “loop” begins with the laser power supply and continues through the PCB to the laser source/diode. In some examples, the loop may continue through a GaN transistor, a sense resistor and finally to a ground reference plane back to a power supply ground. The example GaN transistor may be used based at least in part on its low package inductance characteristics. In various examples, component placement may be optimized for low inductance. Additionally, PCB routing may utilize wide, short, thick copper planes for connectivity. Multiple vias organized in arrays may be utilized for connectivity between layers where required. 
     Internal Timeout Timer for Laser Enable Control 
     As noted herein, in many examples failure detection may be required to prevent laser operation when abnormal conditions are detected. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus (e.g., printer side comprising a processor and/or FPGA) may be configured to detect abnormal conditions, and a print head (e.g., a print head processor and/or print head FPGA) may be configured to detect abnormal conditions simultaneously. In an instance in which any component of the example printing apparatus fails, laser operations may be automatically suspended until the issues are rectified. 
     In some examples, hanging detection may be provided by utilizing a heartbeat signal exchanged amongst the various elements (e.g., by the printer side processor and/or FPGA and the print head processor and/or FPGA). When the heartbeat signal is absent (e.g., not detected by any one of the processors and/or FPGAs), laser control may be automatically disabled to ensure a safe state at all times. Additionally, a user may be alerted. For example, a message may be displayed on a printer user interface. In other examples, signaling means such as an audio signal or LED may be used to alert the user. 
     Auto Detection of Defects in Laser Printing Optics 
     In various examples, as noted above, a laser beam may traverse an optical assembly (e.g., set of optics, lenses, and/or mirrors) before reaching a print media. If there are any defects, scratches or aberrations in the optical assembly (e.g., optics, lenses or mirrors) due to manufacturing issues or due to rough handling in the field (e.g., due to falls or vibrations), the printout generated by an example printing apparatus may have visible defects, which in some cases may be apparent to an end-user. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, a line-scanner may be incorporated in an output path of an example printing apparatus. In some examples, the line-scanner may scan an image of a printed label. When coupled with image processing algorithms, the printer firmware may analyze the image of the printed label to detect aberrations or defects in the optical assembly. The detection of such conditions may be flagged to the end-user via a user interface message or prompt. Accordingly, servicing and/or replacement of the optical assembly can be arranged as required minimizing potential downtime and loss of productivity. 
     Y-Axis Adjustment (Calibration) Mechanism for Laser Printer Print Head 
     In various examples, directing a laser beam to a target location from an aperture of a print head may pose many technical challenges. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, systems, methods and techniques for directing a laser beam to be incident on a target location are provided. In some examples, an upper print head mechanism/housing and a lower print head mechanism/housing may have an offset position on a y-axis orientation. Accordingly, mechanisms for y-axis adjustment for calibration purposes are provided. In some embodiments, an adjustment feature may be disposed between upper and lower print mechanisms/housings. The example adjustment feature may comprise a slot opening panel which may be adjusted by a set of lead screw/nut assemblies. The example slot opening panel may be adjusted up to +/−2.5 mm along the y-axis in order to accurately align a laser beam exiting an aperture of the print head. 
     Horizontal Swivel Tear Bar 
     In some examples, a printing apparatus may employ auto-feed techniques to feed a media therethrough. Over time, excessive dirt may accumulate in an internal area of a tear bar and may cause media jams. In many examples, an end-user may be unable to access a narrow path between the print head and tear bar in order to manually route a media therethrough. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, methods, systems and techniques for minimizing media jams occurring in a media path are provided. In some examples, a removeable (e.g., swivel) tear bar may be provided. The user may remove a media (e.g., label) from a print mechanism and return the removeable tear bar to its original position once the media is in place. As such, an end-user may manually route an example media accurately and quickly. The angle of the aperture along a bottom portion of the example media path may be expanded further and may facilitate cleaning of a tear bar. 
     Polaris Preheater Temperature and Power Compensation Algorithm 
     In various examples, as noted above, in order for a printing apparatus to reach a high target print speed, a preheating laser may be utilized to preheat (i.e., warm up) a media to a target temperature. In some examples, due to heat transfer capability, the faster a media traverses a portion of a printing apparatus during printing operations, the higher the temperature the example preheating laser will need to be. Accordingly, for each print speed, an associated target preheating temperature must be reached and maintained in order to meet print quality standards and avoid over-burning or under-burning of the media. In some examples, warming-up or cooling-down the media to a target temperature may require additional time. Therefore, additional means may be required to accelerate the process and ensure that an end-user does not have to wait long for a printing apparatus to begin printing operations. In various examples, maintaining a target temperature with respect to a media, preheating laser or other components of a printing apparatus may pose many technical challenges. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, systems, methods and techniques for bringing a preheating laser to a target temperature and subsequently bringing a media and/or surrounding print mechanism to a target temperature, depending on input variables such as media print speed and existing media temperature, are provided. In some embodiments, an example media temperature and an example preheating laser temperature may be maintained at a constant value throughout printing operations. In some embodiments, power compensation techniques may be utilized to speed up the printing process when the current media/preheating laser temperature is not yet at a target value. In some embodiments, a method for preventing burn marks by retracting at least a portion of an unprinted media to a safe position when a printing apparatus is not in use is provided. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 98 , an example method  9800  is illustrated. In particular, the example method  9800  illustrates example steps/operations for bringing a media/preheating laser temperature to a target temperature value/range in order to optimize print quality at a particular print speed. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 98 , the example method  9800  starts at step/operation  9801 . At step/operation  9801 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, the controller  2008  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 20 , the processor  2702  illustrated and described above in connection with  FIG. 27 , a control unit  138  illustrated and described in connection with  FIG. 29 , and/or a processor electrically coupled to the example printing apparatus) may receive print data. In various examples, the print data may comprise instructions for printing content onto at least a portion of a media (e.g., print a label) of an example printing apparatus  100 . 
     Subsequent to receiving print job data at step/operation  9801 , at step/operation  9803 , the processing circuitry determines a target print speed at which the example printing apparatus  100  is to print content onto a media (e.g., print a label). In some examples, the target print speed may be determined based at least in part on, or received in conjunction with, the print data. 
     Subsequent to determining the print speed at step/operation  9803 , at step/operation  9805 , the processing circuitry determines a target media temperature and/or a target preheating laser temperature associated with the target print speed. It should be understood that the target media temperature and the target preheating laser temperature are related parameters that may vary in accordance with a known offset and are further associated with a target print speed. Said differently, if the preheating laser temperature is known, then by adding a known offset value, other temperatures associated with other system elements/components can be determined. Accordingly, in various examples, the processing circuitry can monitor either the media temperature, the preheating laser temperature and/or another temperature associated with the example printing apparatus  100  (e.g., print mechanism temperature). Accordingly, the terms preheating laser temperature, media temperature and print mechanism temperature are used interchangeably herein. 
     In some examples, the processing circuitry determines the target media temperature and/or target preheating laser temperature based at least in part by referencing a stored look-up table that describes a mapping between a print speed/media traversal speed, a target media temperature and/or a target preheating laser temperature. In various embodiments, the target media temperature and/or the target preheating laser temperature may each comprise a value or a range (e.g., 40 degrees Celsius, between 40-45 degrees Celsius, combinations thereof, or the like). The following table illustrates an example look-up table for determining the target media temperature by the processing circuitry. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 6 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Look-up table illustrating a mapping between a speed at which the printing apparatus 100 
               
               
                 is to be operated, a target media temperature and a target preheating laser temperature. 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Print Speed 
                 Target media temperature 
                 Target preheating laser temperature 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 1 ips 
                 Media_temp_1 
                 Pre-heat_temp_1 
               
               
                 2 ips 
                 Media_temp_2 
                 Pre-heat_temp_2 
               
               
                 3 ips 
                 Media_temp_3 
                 Pre-heat_temp_3 
               
               
                 . . . 
                 . . . 
                 . . . 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Subsequent to step/operation  9805 , at step/operation  9807 , the processing circuitry determines a current media temperature. In some examples, the processing circuitry determines the media temperature via one or more sensing elements/sensors that are operatively coupled to and/or positioned adjacent the media (e.g., an array of sensors). In some examples, the one or more sensors may be or comprise infrared sensors, resistor-based sensors and/or the like that are configured to determine a surface temperature of at least a portion of a media. Additionally and/or alternatively, in some examples, the processing circuitry determines a temperature of a heating element (e.g., one or more lasers) of the printing apparatus via one or more sensors such as a resistance temperature detector (RTD) positioned adjacent a surface of the example heating element and operatively coupled thereto. In some examples, at step/operation  9809 , if the media temperature is already within a certain predetermined range of the target temperature value, then the processing circuitry determines that the system/example printing apparatus  100  is ready to begin printing operations. In such examples, the method  9800  proceeds to step/operation  9821  and the printing apparatus  100  prints the content onto the media immediately. By way of example, the target temperature range may be within a predetermined threshold range from a target temperature value (e.g., +/−3 degrees Celsius). By way of example, if the target temperature value is 40 degrees Celsius, the predetermined threshold range is +/−3 degrees Celsius and the current media temperature is 39 degrees Celsius, then the processing circuitry determines that the current media temperature is within the predetermined threshold range and proceeds to step/operation  9821 . 
     However, if at step/operation  9809 , the media temperature is not within the predetermined threshold range of the target temperature value, then the processing circuitry may proceed to step/operation  9811 . By way of example, if the target temperature value is 40 degrees Celsius, the predetermined threshold range is +/−3 degrees Celsius and the current media temperature is 35 degrees Celsius, then the processing circuitry determines that the current media temperature is not within the predetermined threshold and proceeds to step/operation  9811 . 
     At step/operation  9811 , the processing circuitry determines whether laser compensation can be achieved by varying the power of the writing laser. In some examples, the processing circuitry determines whether laser compensation can be achieved based at least in part on a current media temperature being within a predetermined range of a target temperature value or target temperature range (e.g., close to the target temperature value/range, for instance −5 degrees Celsius). In another example, with reference to  FIG. 99  discussed below, the processing circuitry may determine that laser compensation can be achieved in an instance in which the current media temperature is +/−10% of a higher threshold temperature value  9902  or a lower threshold temperature value  9904 . 
     For example, the processing circuitry may determine whether the writing laser needs to be overdriven in an instance in which the media temperature is too cold (e.g., below a threshold temperature value/range) or underdriven in an instance in which the media temperature is too warm/hot. In an instance in which the processing circuitry determines that laser compensation can be achieved by varying the power of the writing laser, the method  9800  proceeds to step/operation  9813 . At step/operation  9813 , subsequent to determining that laser compensation can be achieved, the processing circuitry determines (via the one or more sensing elements/sensors operatively coupled to the media) whether the media is too cold (e.g., below a threshold temperature value/range). In an instance in which the processing circuitry determines that the media is too cold (e.g., below a threshold temperature value/range), the method  9800  proceeds to step/operation  9823 . At step/operation  9823 , the processing circuitry provides (e.g., generates, sends) a control indication to increase/overdrive the power of the writing laser. Then subsequent to increasing the power of the preheating laser, the method proceeds to step/operation  9821  and the processing circuitry provides a control indication to cause the printing apparatus  100  to print content onto the media. 
     In some examples, at step/operation  9827  the processing circuitry determines whether or not to continue printing operations (e.g., to print a new label). In an instance in which the processing circuitry determines that no further printing operations are required, and a portion of a media (e.g., a previous label) has just been printed, the heater element may still be warm as it may not yet have reached a safe cool-down temperature. In such examples, an example media (e.g., a roll) may be parked/positioned at a tear bar and adjacent (e.g., right above/below) an example heating element. This may result in unwanted burn marks being incident on at least a portion of the unprinted media. In order to prevent this, while no media is being printed, at step/operation  9829 , the example processing circuitry may provide a control indication to cause the at least a portion of the unprinted media to retract into a feed roller thereby ensuring that the media is not directly exposed to the higher temperature and thus preventing any burn marks being incident thereon. 
     Returning to step/operation  9813 , in an instance in which the media temperature is not too cold (e.g. is above a threshold temperature value/range), the processing circuitry provides a control indication to decrease/underdrive the power of the writing laser. Subsequent to decreasing the power of the writing laser at step/operation  9825 , the method proceeds to step/operation  9821  and the processing circuitry provides a control indication to cause the printing apparatus  100  to print content onto the media. 
     Returning to step/operation  9811 , in an instance in which the processing circuitry determines that laser compensation (e.g., in relation to one or more writing lasers) cannot be utilized, the method  9800  proceeds to step/operation  9815 . At step/operation  9815 , the processing circuitry determines whether the media temperature is below a target temperature range. In an instance in which the media temperature is below the target temperature range, the method  9800  proceed to step/operation  9817 , and the processing circuitry provides (e.g., generates, sends) a control indication to cause an increase in the operating temperature of the preheating laser. In some embodiments, subsequent to causing an increase in the operating temperature of the preheating laser at step/operation  9817 , the method proceeds to step/operation  9809 , and the processing circuitry further determines whether the media temperature is within the target temperature range. Subsequently, processing circuitry provides a control indication to cause the printing apparatus  100  to print content onto the media. 
     Returning to step/operation  9815 , in an instance in which the processing circuitry determines that the media temperature is above the target temperature range, the processing circuitry provides (e.g., generates, sends) a control indication to cause the printing apparatus  100  to wait for a predetermined amount of time in order to allow the media to cool down. Subsequent to waiting for a predetermined amount of time, the method proceeds to step/operation  9809  and the processing circuitry further determines whether or not the media temperature is within the target temperature range. Subsequently, the processing circuitry provides a control indication to cause the printing apparatus  100  to print content onto the media. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 99 , an example graph  9900  depicting an example target temperature range in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. As noted above, in various embodiments, the example target temperature range may be associated with a media, a preheating and/or any other print mechanism of an example printing apparatus  100 . 
     As depicted in  FIG. 99 , the x-axis represents a plurality of instances in time. As depicted, the y-axis represents a plurality of temperature values. In various embodiments, the processing circuitry may operate to regulate a media temperature in order to ensure optimal printing operations by the example printing apparatus  100 . For example, in order to print new content (e.g., a label), the processing circuitry may start by increasing the preheating laser temperature which translates into increasing a media temperature. As depicted in  FIG. 99 , the target temperature may comprise a target temperature value  9901  at which optimal printing operations can be achieved at a particular print speed. As further depicted in  FIG. 99 , the target temperature may further comprise a range defined by a lower threshold temperature value  9904  and a higher threshold temperature value  9902 . 
     Subsequent to reaching a target media temperature (e.g., a target temperature value  9901  or target temperature range defined by the lower threshold temperature value  9904  and the higher threshold temperature value  9902 ), the processing circuitry may operate to maintain a constant target media temperature. For example, in an instance in which a media temperature reaches or exceeds the higher threshold temperature value  9902 , the processing circuitry may provide a control indication in order to deactivate a preheating laser for a short/predetermined amount of time until the target media temperature falls below the higher threshold temperature value  9902 . In another example, in an instance in which the media temperature reaches or falls below the lower threshold temperature value  9904 , the processing circuitry may provide a control indication in order to activate the preheating laser for a short/predetermined amount of time until the target media temperature is above the lower threshold temperature value  9904 . This oscillating cycle may continue until no new print data is received or until a print speed or target temperature associated with print data/a print job is modified. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 100A , an example graph  10000 A depicting example measurements associated with a first preheating laser (represented by line  10001 A) and a second preheating laser (represented by line  10003 A) based on operations of an example processing circuitry is provided. 
     As illustrated in  FIG. 100A , the x-axis represents a plurality of instances in time. As depicted, the y-axis represents a plurality of detected temperature values associated with a first preheating laser (represented by line  10001 A) and a second preheating laser (represented by line  10003 A). As illustrated in  FIG. 100A , responsive to receiving a control indication by an example processing circuitry, the preheating laser temperature for each of the first preheating laser represented by line  10001 A) and the second preheating laser (represented by line  10003 A) rises quickly to a given level (as depicted, between 0 and approximately 270 along the x-axis). Then, the preheating laser temperature for each of the first preheating laser (represented by line  10001 A) and the second preheating laser (represented by line  10003 A) enters a steady state mode (as depicted, between approximately 270 and 480 along the x-axis) during which the preheating laser temperature oscillates in order to maintain a near constant value within a predetermined range. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 100B , an example graph  10000 B depicting example measurements associated with a first media (represented by line  10001 B) and a second media (represented by line  10003 B) based on operations of an example processing circuitry is provided. 
     As illustrated in  FIG. 100B , the x-axis represents a plurality of instances in time. As depicted, the y-axis represents a plurality of detected temperature values associated with the first media (represented by line  10001 B) and the second media (represented by line  10003 B). As illustrated in  FIG. 100B , responsive to receiving a control indication by an example processing circuitry, the media temperature for each of the first media (represented by line  10001 B) and the second media (represented by line  10003 B) rises quickly to a given level (as depicted, between 0 and approximately 345 along the x-axis). Then, the media temperature for each of the first media (represented by line  10001 B) and the second media (represented by line  10003 B) reaches a steady state temperature (as depicted, between approximately 345 and 480 along the x-axis). 
     Referring now to  FIG. 100C , an example graph  10000 C depicting example measurements associated with a first preheating laser (represented by line  10001 C) and a second preheating laser (represented by line  10003 C) based on operations of an example processing circuitry is provided. 
     As illustrated in  FIG. 100C , the x-axis represents a plurality of instances in time. As depicted, the y-axis represents a plurality of detected temperature values associated with the first preheating laser (represented by line  10001 C) and the second preheating laser (represented by line  10003 C). As illustrated in  FIG. 100C , during a steady state mode, the preheating laser temperature for each of the first preheating laser (represented by line  10001 C) and the second preheating laser (represented by line  10003 C) oscillates periodically (for example, as depicted, from a first peak at approximately 1250 to a second peak at approximately 1400 along the x-axis) as the example processing circuitry operates to maintain a temperature value within a predetermined temperature range. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 100D , an example graph  10000 D depicting example measurements associated with a first media (represented by line  10001 D) and a second media (represented by line  10003 D) based on operations of an example processing circuitry is provided. As illustrated in  FIG. 100D , the x-axis represents a plurality of instances in time. As depicted, the y-axis represents a plurality of detected temperature values associated with the first media (represented by line  10001 D) and the second media (represented by line  10003 D). As illustrated in  FIG. 100D , during a steady state mode, the media temperature for each of the first media (represented by line  10001 D) and the second media (represented by line  10003 D) oscillates periodically (for example, as depicted, from a first peak at approximately 1340 to a second peak at approximately 1500 along the x-axis) as the example processing circuitry operates to maintain a temperature value within a predetermined temperature range. 
     Accordingly,  FIG. 100A ,  FIG. 100B ,  FIG. 100C  and  FIG. 100D  demonstrate that the example processing circuitry will operate to maintain a constant temperature with respect to a media and/or preheating laser that is within a predetermined temperature range defined by a lower threshold temperature value and the higher threshold temperature value. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 101 , a first example graph  10101  depicting example measurements associated with an example media and a second example graph  10103  depicting measurements associated with an example writing laser during power compensation operations of an example processing circuitry/printing apparatus  100  are provided. 
     As illustrated in  FIG. 101 , the x-axis represents a plurality of instances in time. As depicted, the y-axis of the first graph  10101  represents a plurality of detected temperature values associated with the media and the y-axis of the second graph  10103  represents a plurality of detected temperature values associated with a writing laser. 
     In some examples, as discussed above in connection with  FIG. 98 , in order to speed up media printing, it is not always necessary to wait for the media to reach the target temperature. In some embodiments, when the media temperature is somewhat below/close to the target temperature (e.g., a lower threshold temperature value), it may be possible to increase the writing laser output power and overdrive it in order to optimize printing operations and target print parameters (e.g., quality, a darkness level). Similarly, when the media temperature is somewhat above the target temperature (e.g., a higher threshold temperature value), it may be possible to decrease the writing laser output power and underdrive it in order to optimize printing operations and target print parameters. 
     As depicted in  FIG. 101 , during a first phase  10102  of printing operations, the media temperature rises quickly while no printing operations occur by the writing laser. As further depicted in  FIG. 101 , during a second phase  10104  of printing operations the actual media temperature is slightly lower than a target temperature (e.g., a lower threshold temperature value). Accordingly, as depicted, at the end of the first phase, in an instance in which the media temperature is still below the target temperature, the writing laser will enter an overdrive mode. Subsequently, as the media temperature approaches the target temperature during the second phase  10104 , the overdrive writing laser power will reduce and return to a normal output writing laser power level at the end of the second phase  10104  and through the third phase  10106 . Correspondingly, during the third phase  10106 , the media reaches the target temperature. 
     Similarly, as noted above, when the media temperature is above a target temperature (e.g., above a higher threshold temperature value) and therefore too hot for optimal operations, it is possible to reduce the output writing laser power in order to prevent overburn and achieve proper print quality. Correspondingly, as the media cools down, the writing laser output power will slowly increase back to a normal output power level. 
     Regulating Media Temperature in Preheating Chamber Using Heat Spreader Movement 
     As discussed herein, in some examples, a printing apparatus (e.g., a laser industrial printer) may utilize a preheater/preheating beam to warm up a print media (e.g., label) prior to printing operations/generating a mark on the print media. In some embodiments, at least a portion of an example media may be at least partially disposed within a heating chamber prior to commencing printing operations. In some embodiments, the heating chamber may comprise at least one heat spreader element that is configured to warm up the print media as it traverses at least a portion of the printing apparatus/heating chamber. 
     In some examples, a first portion of an example media (e.g., defining a portion of a print media roll) may be disposed/positioned within a heating chamber for preheating prior to printing operations. Subsequently, the first portion of the example print media may exit/traverse the heating chamber and a second portion of the example print media may be disposed/positioned within the heating chamber. In such examples, the heating chamber may become warm/hot in order to preheat the print media. Additionally, in some examples, when preheating operations cease/stop (e.g., when a current source to a heating element is turned off), the heating chamber may remain warm/hot for a period of time. Thus, in an instance in which the first portion of the example print media has exited the heating chamber, and the second portion of the example print media is disposed/positioned within the heating chamber, the second portion of the example print media may begin to warm up/react to the residual warmth/heat in the heating chamber prior to reactivation of the heating chamber for subsequent preheating operations. This may result in unwanted burn marks being incident on the second portion of the print media. In some examples, as a result of the unwanted burn marks, the affected portion of the print media (e.g., adjacent a printed label) may need to be rejected/replaced prior to commencing printing operations which may result in print media wastage. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, example apparatuses, methods and techniques for controlling preheating operations (e.g., a temperature within an example heating chamber of an example printing apparatus) are provided. In some embodiments, the example printing apparatus comprises at least one moveable heat spreader element that is configured to control a predetermined gap associated with a print media path in order to prevent the example print media from becoming unnecessarily heated up/warm when disposed in a heating chamber (e.g., prior to commencing preheating and/or printing operations). 
     Referring now to  FIG. 102 , an example functional block diagram depicting at least a portion of an example printing apparatus  10200  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. As depicted in  FIG. 102 , the example printing apparatus  10200  comprises at least a printer control unit  10201 , a printing control component  10203 , a preheating control unit  10205 , a heater control unit  10207 , at least one writing laser  10209 , a temperature sensor  10211 , a roller  10213 , a preheating chamber  10215 , a first moveable heat spreader element  10204 , and a second moveable heat spreader element  10206 . In various embodiments, the example printing apparatus  10200  is configured to warm/preheat a print media prior to performing printing operations. In various embodiments the example roller  10213  operates to move, drive, and/or direct a print media from a first location to a second location (e.g., along a print path) within the printing apparatus  10200  (e.g., from a preheating chamber  10215  to a laser writing location  10217 , and then to exit the printing apparatus  10200  subsequent to printing operations). 
     As depicted in  FIG. 102 , the printer control unit  10201  may generate one or more control indications/signals in order to cause the preheating control unit  10205  to preheat at least a portion of a print media (e.g., print media  10202 A,  10202 B, and/or  10202 C). As noted above, the example printing apparatus  10200  comprises a preheating chamber  10215 . As further depicted, a first moveable heat spreader element  10204  and a second moveable heat spreader element  10206  are at least partially positioned, disposed and/or contained within the preheating chamber  10215 . In various examples, the first moveable heat spreader element  10204  and the second moveable heat spreader element  10206  may each be or comprise a heating element, heating coil, heating plate, light source, and/or the like that is configured to emit radiant energy/heat in response to a control indication/signal provided by the preheating control unit  10205  operating in conjunction with the printer control unit  10201 . The first moveable heat spreader element  10204  and the second moveable heat spreader element  10206  may be driven by one or more actuators and/or operatively coupled to one or more moveable arms/moveable components. As illustrated, the first moveable heat spreader element  10204  is positioned/disposed adjacent a top surface of the example print media (e.g., print media  10202 A,  10202 B and  10202 C), at a first distance, such that there is a predetermined gap between the top surface of the example print media and the first moveable heat spreader element  10204 . As further depicted, the second moveable heat spreader element  10206  is positioned/disposed adjacent a bottom surface of the example print media (e.g., print media  10202 A,  10202 B and  10202 C), at a first distance, such that there is a predetermined gap between the top surface of the example print media and the second moveable heat spreader element  10206 . In various embodiments, each of the first moveable heat spreader element  10204  and the second moveable heat spreader element  10206  may be driven by one or more actuators/power sources (e.g., one or more current sources). In various examples, the preheating control unit  10205  (operating in conjunction with the printer control unit  10201 ) is configured to transmit one or more control indications/signals in order to cause the first moveable heat spreader element  10204  and the second moveable heat spreader element  10206  to preheat/warm at least a portion of the print media (e.g., print media  10202 A,  10202 B and  10202 C) as it traverses a location associated with the first moveable heat spreader element  10204  and the second moveable heat spreader element  10206  (e.g., the preheating chamber  10215 ) and moves in the direction of the laser writing location  10217 . 
     In some embodiments, subsequent to preheating at least a portion of the print media (e.g., to a target temperature, as detected by the temperature sensor  10211  feedback loop), the printer control unit  10201  and/or printing control component  10203  (e.g., one or more actuators) performs printing operations. For example, the printer control unit  10201  transmits a control indication/signal to cause at least one writing laser  10209  to write/impinge one or more marks on at least a portion of the preheated print media (e.g., print media  10202 A,  10202 B and  10202 C). 
     As depicted in  FIG. 102 , the printer control unit  10201  and printing control component  10203  (e.g., one or more actuators) are operatively coupled to one another and to the roller  10213 . In some embodiments, the printer control unit  10201  may transmit a control indication/signal to the printing control component  10203  (e.g., one or more actuators) to cause the roller  10213  to drive (e.g., roll, pull, stretch, or the like) the print media along a print path. In other words, the roller  10213  may drive the print media to move from the preheating chamber  10215  (adjacent the first moveable heat spreader element  10204  and the second moveable heat spreader element  10206 ) to the laser writing location  10217  (adjacent the at least one writing laser  10209 ). Subsequently, the printer control unit  10201  may transmit a control indication/signal to the printing control component  10203  (e.g., one or more actuators) to cause the roller  10213  to drive (e.g., roll, pull, stretch, or the like) the print media (e.g., printed label) along the print path to exit the printing apparatus  10200 . By way of example, a first portion of a print media  10202 A may enter the preheating chamber  10215 , the laser writing location  10217 , and then exit the printing apparatus  10200 . Similarly, a second portion of a print media  10202 B may enter the preheating chamber  10215 , the laser writing location  10217 , and then exit the printing apparatus  10200 . Finally, a third portion of a print media  10202 C may enter the preheating chamber  10215 , the laser writing location  10217 , and then exit the printing apparatus  10200 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 10300 , another example functional block diagram depicting at least a portion of an example printing apparatus  10300  in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure is provided. The printing apparatus  10300  may be similar or identical to the printing apparatus  10200  described above in connection with  FIG. 102 . 
     As depicted in  FIG. 103 , the example printing apparatus  10300  comprises at least a printer control unit  10301 , a printing control component  10303  a preheating control unit  10305 , a heater control unit  10307 , at least one writing laser  10309 , a temperature sensor  10311 , a roller  10313 , a preheating chamber  10315 , a first moveable heat spreader element  10304 , and a second moveable heat spreader element  10306 . In various embodiments, the example printing apparatus  10300  is configured to warm/preheat a print media prior to performing printing operations. In various embodiments the example roller  10313  operates to move, drive, and/or direct a print media from a first location to a second location (e.g., along a print path) within the printing apparatus  10300  (e.g., from a preheating chamber  10315  to a laser writing location  10317 , and then to exit the printing apparatus  10300  subsequent to printing operations). 
     As depicted in  FIG. 103 , the printer control unit  10301  may generate one or more control indications/signals in order to cause the preheating control unit  10305  to preheat at least a portion of a print media (e.g., print media  10302 A,  10302 B and  10302 C). As noted above, the example printing apparatus  10300  comprises a preheating chamber  10315 . As further depicted, a first moveable heat spreader element  10304  and a second moveable heat spreader element  10306  are at least partially positioned, disposed and/or contained within the preheating chamber  10315 . In various examples, the first moveable heat spreader element  10304  and the second moveable heat spreader element  10306  may each be or comprise a heating element, heating coil, heating plate, light source, and/or the like that is configured to emit radiant energy/heat in response to a control indication/signal provided by the preheating control unit  10305  operating in conjunction with the printer control unit  10301 . The first moveable heat spreader element  10304  and the second moveable heat spreader element  10306  may be driven by one or more actuators and/or operatively coupled to one or more moveable arms/moveable components. 
     As noted above, subsequent to preheating at least a portion of the print media (e.g., to a target temperature, as detected by the temperature sensor  10311  feedback loop), the printer control unit  10301  and/or printing control component  10303  (e.g., one or more actuators) performs printing operations. For example, the printer control unit  10301  transmits a control indication/signal to cause at least one writing laser  10309  to write/impinge one or more marks on at least a portion of the preheated print media (e.g., print media  10302 A,  10302 B and  10302 C). 
     As illustrated, the first moveable heat spreader element  10304  is positioned/disposed adjacent a top surface of the example print media (e.g., print media  10302 A,  10302 B and  10302 C), at a first/particular distance, such that there is a predetermined gap between the top surface of the example print media and the first moveable heat spreader element  10304 . As further depicted, the second moveable heat spreader element  10306  is positioned/disposed adjacent a bottom surface of the example print media (e.g., print media  10302 A,  10302 B and  10302 C), at a second distance (relative to the first distance depicted in  FIG. 102 ), such that there is a predetermined gap between the top surface of the example print media and the second moveable heat spreader element  10306  (that is different from the gap depicted in  FIG. 102 ). In various embodiments, each of the first moveable heat spreader element  10304  and the second moveable heat spreader element  10306  may be driven by an actuator control unit  10307 B comprising one or more actuators/power sources (e.g., one or more current sources). 
     In various embodiments, in response to detecting that printing operation with respect to at least a portion of the print media (e.g., a first portion of the print media  10302 A) have ceased, the printer control unit  10301  may generate one or more control indications/signals in order to cause the first moveable heat spreader element  10304  and the second moveable heat spreader element  10306  to move from a first position to a second position (e.g., away from the portion of print media that is disposed within the preheating chamber  10315 ). For example, the first moveable heat spreader element  10304  and/or second moveable heat spreader element  10306  may each comprise one or more arms (e.g., driven by an actuator control unit  10307 B) that are configured to move vertically with respect to the print media in order to attenuate the effects of residual heat on subsequent portions of the print media within the preheating chamber  10315  (e.g., to prevent burn marks). In other words, the first moveable heat spreader element  10304  and/or second moveable heat spreader element  10306  may each move from a first position to a second position in order to increase a respective gap/distance between the first moveable heat spreader element  10304  and/or second moveable heat spreader element  10306  and a location of the print media. Accordingly, the printer control unit  10301 , together with the actuator control unit  10307 B, may operate to control a preheating temperature within the preheating chamber  10315  and prevent unwanted burn marks from appearing on the print media. 
     As depicted in  FIG. 103 , the printer control unit  10301  and printing control component  10303  (e.g., one or more actuators) are operatively coupled to one another and to the roller  10313 . In some embodiments, the printer control unit  10301  may transmit a control indication/signal to the printing control component  10303  (e.g., one or more actuators) to cause the roller  10313  to drive (e.g., roll, pull, stretch, or the like) the print media along a print path. In other words, the roller  10313  may drive the print media to move from the preheating chamber  10315  (adjacent the first moveable heat spreader element  10304  and the second moveable heat spreader element  10306 ) to the laser writing location  10317  (adjacent the at least one writing laser  10309 ). Accordingly, in response to detecting that the portion of a print media is in a print stop position and/or has exited the laser writing location  10217 , the printer control unit  10301  may transmit a control indication/signal to the printing control component  10303  (e.g., one or more actuators) to cause the first moveable heat spreader element  10304  and/or second moveable heat spreader element  10306  to move away from the print media disposed within the preheating chamber  10315 . 
     In various examples, the above-noted techniques may facilitate faster cooling when printing operations stop and/or in an instance in which the print media is static. Additionally, another control parameter is provided for regulating a temperature of a print media. For example, as discussed herein, at least one moveable heat spreader element can be moved (e.g., up and down) to control a predetermined gap in a media path as a print media traverses a heating chamber. The solution can be easily implemented and addresses the issue of unwanted burn marks. 
     Laser Writing Pre-Emphasis for Improved Print Contrast 
     As discussed herein, in some examples, an example printing apparatus may comprise at least one laser source/diode to generate a laser beam that continuously scans/sweeps across a print media. In some examples, the movement of the laser beam may result in the laser beam traversing across a target print dot location when the laser is ON. In some examples, as the laser and associated laser beam move, a first portion (beginning) of a print media may no longer be exposed to the laser which can result in a partial printing or a lower contrast edge at the beginning/start of printing operations. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, example apparatuses, methods and techniques for preventing partial printing and improving print contrast during printing operations are provided. In some embodiments, an example method comprises pre-emphasizing (e.g., scaling, varying, modulating, increasing, or the like) an amount of current going through an example laser source/diode at a start of marking of a laser beam unto the print media in order to improve signal integrity and print quality. In other words, an example method may comprise increasing an amount of power/current at the beginning of each print dot for a time period that is less that the overall dot time (i.e., the time period required to impinge/generate a dot) at the beginning of the print dot. In some examples, the amount of power or current drawn by the laser source/diode may be 10% more or 50% higher at the beginning of each print dot. This additional current may enable faster turn on of the laser source/diode and provide additional optical power at the beginning of the print dot which can improve the overall print contrast at the beginning of a print dot/line when the previous dot is not printed. Additionally, this current amplification can also be used at the end of a print line/dot to improve edge contrast when printing is stopped. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 104 , an example graph  10400  depicting example measurements based on operations of an example laser source/diode are provided. As depicted in  FIG. 104 , the x-axis represents a plurality of instances in time (measured in seconds). As illustrated, the y-axis represents a voltage output associated with an original square-wave signal (represented by line  10401 ). As further illustrated, the y-axis also represents a voltage output associated with a pre-emphasis driving signal (represented by line  10403 ). In some examples, as shown, the pre-emphasis driving signal generates a first voltage peak at approximately 0.4 along the x-axis, corresponding with the start of a first print dot. Additionally, the pre-emphasis driving signal generates a second voltage peak at approximately 3.1 along the x-axis, corresponding with the start of a second print dot. 
     Accordingly,  FIG. 104  demonstrates a technique for pre-emphasizing an amount of power/current drawn by an example laser source/diode at a start of each print dot. The noted technique may also enhance print edge contrast when an example laser source/diode is initially turned ON for printing operations. 
     Photodiode Detector-Based Laser Failsafe System 
     In some examples, a printing apparatus/LPH system may comprise one or more class  4  lasers for printing content onto laser sensitive print media. Accordingly, preventing unintentional laser emission is of utmost importance for safety. In many examples, these lasers may pose significant safety risks, including potential eye and burn hazards. Additionally, in some examples, an unintentional turn (e.g., caused by a short circuit on a control circuit board) may cause a laser to turn on unintentionally which may result in a fire incident. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, example apparatuses, methods and techniques for detecting an unintended laser turn on and immediately disabling a laser drive circuit and power supply is provided. In some embodiments, an example laser failsafe system may be implemented entirely as a hardware and/or firmware solution to prevent inadvertent laser firing. In some examples, at least one dedicated photodiode may be positioned near at least one laser such that the at least one laser turns on when any of the lasers are lasing, and even at low power. In some embodiments, a comparator with a suitably low “on” threshold completes the light detection circuit. A laser light detector output signal may be compared to a digital logic output from an FPGA that goes active high only when the at least one laser is intended to be on, for printing or SOL detection purposes. A mismatch, indicating that the at least one laser is on when it should not be, may trigger digital logic devices to drive the positive inputs of drive operational amplifiers low, and also disable the laser power supply, thereby turning off the lasers. The techniques disclosed herein protect against errors that may occur in firmware or hardware, including short circuits, that can result in at least one laser being on unintentionally. For example, a short circuit Gallium nitride (GaN) Gate to Drain may result in laser firing or oscillating on/off, but would be detected by the example photodiode. Accordingly, the laser power supply disable logic may operate to turn off the at least one laser. In some embodiments, a latch circuit may be utilized to keep a fault indication latched on, where the latch is only resettable with a power cycle. In some embodiments, a counter may be implemented to track these events and store counts in non-volatile memory. In some embodiments, once a repeat failure count threshold is reached, the printing apparatus/LPH may be disabled permanently. In some examples, signal timing tuning may permit a certain amount of slack in order to avoid false triggers, but may still turn off very quickly in the event of a legitimate failure. 
     Method to Automatically Tune Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Compensation Values in Laser Printer System 
     In some embodiments, an example printing apparatus or laser printing system may comprise a digital-to-analog converter (DAC) that is used to control timing/power delivery to one or more lasers. For example, the DAC may be used to scale the output voltage. By way of example, an example DAC may comprise a plurality of channels where each channel of the DAC is used to control a particular laser. In this manner, a printing apparatus may be configured to print in greyscale by scaling the maximum output power as required depending on various parameters including print speed, media reactivity, temperature of the media, and/or the like. 
     In some examples, the example DAC may be a portion of a current control system for driving at least one laser. For example, an output of the example DAC may be provided first to a differential amplifier and then a drive operational amplifier in order to drive a laser. However, in some examples, the DAC may utilize an inaccurate internal reference resulting in a power output that is below an intended/target setpoint (in some examples, up to 16% below a target setpoint). Additionally, in some examples, components of a current control system (e.g., a differential amplifier and a drive operational amplifier) may add errors to the laser drive output that require calibration. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, example apparatuses, methods and techniques for automatically tuning DAC compensation values in a laser printing system are provided. In contrast with known methods, the techniques described herein may quickly and automatically tune a laser printing apparatus using a single measurement point (e.g., a full scale output of a dedicated DAC that is used to drive a laser). This single measurement may then be used to compensate the gain of the DAC output to ensure that the DAC output can be driven across its full output scale. In some embodiments, DAC calibration may be performed by tuning the DAC GAIN and RSET values. Accordingly, the techniques disclosed herein relate to automatic tuning of DAC GAIN and RSET values at system startup by measuring an analog voltage downstream of the DAC output, and compensating for the internal accuracy of the DAC every time the system is powered on, addressing the need for initial calibration and subsequent calibration operations to address any drift over time. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 105 , an example flow diagram illustrating an example method  10500  in accordance with examples of the present disclosure is provided. 
     In some examples, the method  10500  may be performed by processing circuitry (for example, but not limited to, a microcontroller unit (MCU), an ASIC, or a CPU. In some examples, the processing circuitry may be electrically coupled to and/or in electronic communication with other circuitries of an example printing apparatus, a memory (such as, for example, random access memory (RAM) for storing computer program instructions), and/or the like. 
     In some examples, one or more of the procedures described in  FIG. 105  may be embodied by computer program instructions, which may be stored by a memory (such as a non-transitory memory) of a system employing an embodiment of the present disclosure and executed by a processing circuitry (such as a processor) of the system. These computer program instructions may direct the system to function in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the memory circuitry produce an article of manufacture, the execution of which implements the function specified in the flow diagram step/operation(s). Further, the system may comprise one or more other circuitries. Various circuitries of the system may be electronically coupled between and/or among each other to transmit and/or receive energy, data and/or information. 
     In some examples, embodiments may take the form of a computer program product on a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing computer-readable program instruction (e.g., computer software). Any suitable computer-readable storage medium may be utilized, including non-transitory hard disks, CD-ROMs, flash memory, optical storage devices, or magnetic storage devices. 
     The example method  10500  begins at step/operation  10501 . At step/operation  10501 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, an MCU) provides (e.g., generates, transmits) a control indication to disable one or more lasers of the example printing apparatus. Since the noted method  10500  does not require any lasing, step/operation  10501  may be performed in order to ensure that the one or more lasers do not turn on while the method  10500  is being performed. In some examples, laser offset values (e.g., for auxiliary DAC (AUXDAC) outputs) may be adjusted and stored in non-volatile memory prior to or in conjunction with step/operation  10501 . 
     Subsequent to step/operation  10501 , the method  10500  proceeds to step/operation  10503 . At step/operation  10503 , the processing circuitry/MCU may adjust the DAC register (e.g., DAC register 07 (QRSET)) to a full scale output value (in some examples, near or as close as possible to a full scale output value), for example 700 mV, at an output from the differential amplifier, without exceeding the full scale value. In some examples, this is measured by the processing circuitry/MCU&#39;s Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) (Bit  7  of QRSET must remain ‘1’. QRSET is at location 5:0 and is two&#39;s complement). 
     Subsequent to step/operation  10503 , the method  10500  proceeds to step/operation  10505 . At step/operation  10505 , the processing circuitry/MCU proceeds to adjust DAC register 06 (QDACGAIN bits) to increase or decrease the gain value as required to increase or decrease the output from the differential amplifier (e.g., to 200.0 mV). In some embodiments, the differential amplifier output may be measured by the example MCU&#39;s ADC. Accordingly, in various embodiments, the processing circuitry/MCU may drive an output value of a DAC to full scale/close to full scale, measure the output and perform compensation operations using internal gain and resistor registers within the DAC. In various examples, the DAC output may pass through a differential amplifier circuit and then to a laser drive circuit. The processing circuitry/MCU may measure a voltage output from an example differential amplifier circuit and compare the output to the DAC output voltage when the commanded output is at the intended system full scale output voltage. Then, the processing circuitry/MCU may use an algorithm to tune DAC compensation values until the differential amplifier circuit outputs are as close as possible to the target value given the available incremental compensation values. 
     Subsequent to step/operation  10505 , the method  10500  proceeds to step/operation  10507 . At step/operation  10507 , the processing circuitry/MCU stores the gain values (e.g., in non-volatile memory). In various embodiments, the processing circuitry/MCU may repeat step/operation  10501 , step/operation  10503 , and step/operation  10505  for all system DAC outputs. By way of example, an example DAC may be associated with one of a plurality of lasers and two corresponding outputs. 
     Subsequent to step/operation  10507 , the method  10500  proceeds to step/operation  10509 . At step/operation  10509 , the processing circuitry/MCU (optionally) periodically re-compensates, for example, if a long/threshold time period has passed since the printing apparatus has been power cycled, or if processing circuitry detects an ambient temperature outside a predetermined range (e.g., unusually hot or cold ambient temperature) which could affect the DAC and/or differential amplifier outputs. 
     Subsequent to step/operation  10509 , the method  10500  proceeds to step/operation  10511 . At step/operation  10511 , processing circuitry/MCU provides a control indication to start up the printing apparatus/one or more lasers and operates optimally. Accordingly, any drift in the DAC output and/or differential amplifier output can be compensated for while eliminating the need for manually tuning these values at time of manufacturing. 
     Multimode Laser in a Printer with Cross-Scan Beam Magnification 
     As detailed herein, an example printing apparatus may comprise a plurality of multi-mode lasers and/or single-mode lasers that generate laser beams which are used to print/impinge content onto a print media. In some embodiments, as described herein, the lasers/scanning lens optics of a printing apparatus may be divided into groups. By way of example a first group may be a scan dimension group or f-theta lens group, and a second group may be a cross-scan dimension group or magnifying lens group. In some embodiments, optical power may be removed from the f-theta lens group in the cross-scan dimension. For example, an example printing apparatus may comprise a plurality of multi-mode lasers (e.g., four multi-mode lasers). 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, example apparatuses, methods and techniques for providing a multi-mode laser printing apparatus are provided. In various embodiments, the example printing apparatus is optimally configured to simultaneously write multiple lines on a print media and implement wobble correction operations. The term “wobble” may refer to a measure of angular deviation variance in a cross-scan dimension of a laser beam (e.g., as it leaves a polygon mirror). Correcting wobble allows the beam angle to deviate without moving the spot at the print media. Advantageously, the example printing apparatus may also be associated with a reduction in beam alignment complexity and operational sensitivity. Additionally, in some examples, the use of an integrated laser component may simplify manufacturing as well as repair and replacement of faulty components. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 106 , a schematic diagram depicting an example view of a portion of a printing apparatus  10600  in accordance with examples of the present disclosure is provided. The printing apparatus  10600  may be at least partially disposed, contained and/or arranged within a housing (e.g., body, structure). In particular, as depicted, the example printing apparatus  10600  comprises an integrated laser component  10601 , a controller component  10602  (e.g., laser drive board), a first thermoelectric cooler element  10605 A, a second thermoelectric cooler element  10605 B, and at least one laser  10607  (e.g., multi-mode laser). In various embodiments, the integrated laser component  10601 , the controller component  10602  (e.g., laser drive board), the first thermoelectric cooler element  10605 A, the second thermoelectric cooler element  10605 B, and the at least one laser  10607  are in electronic communication with one another such that data and/or information may be transmitted to and/or received between the various components/elements. 
     As noted above, the example printing apparatus  10600  comprises an integrated laser component  10601 . In some examples, as depicted, the integrated laser component  10601  defines/comprises a housing. In various embodiments, the integrated laser component  10601  comprises a collimating assembly operatively coupled to at least one laser. The example housing may be or comprise any suitable metal (e.g., such as aluminum or brass) and may be configured to at least partially contain/house one or more lasers (e.g., the at least one laser  10607 ) and beam shaping optics. As illustrated in  FIG. 106 , the example integrated laser component  10601  is operatively coupled to the controller component  10602  (e.g., laser drive board and/or printed circuit board assembly (PCBA)). Additionally, at least a surface of the integrated laser component  10601  is positioned adjacent the controller component  10602  (e.g., laser drive board). The example integrated laser component  10601  may be or comprise a collimating assembly comprising a plurality of lens. In particular, as shown, the integrated laser component  10601  comprises a first lens  10603 A, a second lens  10603 B, a third lens  10603 C, and a fourth lens  10603 D arranged in a 2×2 array. Additionally, in various embodiments, the example integrated laser component  10601  is disposed adjacent the at least one laser  10607  (e.g., multi-mode laser). Additionally, as depicted in  FIG. 106 , the at least one laser  10607  comprises a plurality of lasers, in particular, four multi-mode lasers arranged/configured in a 2×2 array. In some examples, the integrated laser component  10601  and the at least one laser  10607  define a unitary body/single assembly. In some examples, each lens  10603 A,  10603 B,  10603 C and  10603 D of the integrated lens component  10601  may be operatively coupled to a respective laser (e.g., a first multi-mode laser, a second multi-mode laser, a third multi-mode laser and fourth multi-mode laser). In some examples, at least a portion of the at least one laser  10607  may be at least partially disposed within the housing of the integrated laser component  10601 . 
     In some embodiments, the at least one laser  10607  (e.g., a first multi-mode laser, a second multi-mode laser, a third multi-mode laser and fourth multi-mode laser) is oriented so that the multi-mode dimension of the at least one laser  10607  laser (e.g., first multi-mode laser, second multi-mode laser, third multi-mode laser and fourth multi-mode laser) is in a cross-scan dimension. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 107 , a schematic diagram depicting an example view of a portion of a printing apparatus  10700  in accordance with examples of the present disclosure is provided. The example printing apparatus  10700  may be similar or identical to the printing apparatus  10600  discussed above in connection with  FIG. 106 . As illustrated, the printing apparatus  10700  may be at least partially disposed, contained, and/or arranged within a body/housing. In particular, as depicted, the example printing apparatus  10700  comprises an integrated laser component  10701 , a controller component  10702  (e.g., laser drive board), a first thermoelectric cooler element  10705 A, a second thermoelectric cooler element  10705 B, at least one laser  10707 , a mirror  10708 , and a lens element  10704  (e.g., cross-scan magnifying lens element). In various embodiments, each of the components/elements of the printing apparatus  10700  are in electronic communication with one another such that data and/or information may be transmitted to and/or received between the various components/elements. 
     As noted above, the example printing apparatus  10700  comprises an integrated laser component  10701 . In some examples, as depicted, the integrated laser component  10701  comprises a housing. The example housing may be or comprise any suitable metal and may be configured to at least partially contain/house one or more lasers and beam shaping optics. As illustrated in  FIG. 107 , the example integrated laser component  10701  is operatively coupled to the controller component  10702  (e.g., laser drive board or PCBA). In particular, as depicted, the example integrated laser component  10701  may be a collimating assembly comprising a first lens  10703 A, a second lens  10703 B, a third lens  10703 C and a fourth lens  10703 D arranged in a 2×2 array. As further depicted, in various examples, the integrated laser component  10701  comprises/is operatively coupled to at least one laser  10707  (e.g., four multi-mode lasers that are each associated with a respective lens  10703 A,  10703 B,  10703 C, and  10703 D). As depicted, the at least one laser  10707  is at least partially disposed/positioned between the first thermoelectric cooler element  10705 A and the second thermoelectric cooler element  10705 B. In some embodiments, the at least one laser  10707  (e.g., four multi-mode lasers) is oriented such that the multi-mode dimension is in a cross-scan dimension (e.g., 90 degrees relative to the scan dimension). As further depicted in  FIG. 107 , the example printing apparatus  10700  comprises one or more optical components. In particular, the example printing apparatus  10700  comprises a polygon mirror  10706 , a mirror  10708  (e.g., post-collimation pre-polygon (PCPP) mirror), and a lens element  10704  (e.g., cross-scan magnifying cylinder lens). In some embodiments, the lens element  10704  (e.g., cross-scan magnifying cylinder lens) is disposed adjacent a location of a print media (e.g., an inch away from a surface of the print media) in order to provide a magnification factor that is less than 1 or on the order of 0.1. This may serve to shrink the focused spot size down to a target resolution (e.g., 200 DPI). 
     In some embodiments, each of the lasers of the integrated laser component  10701  are focused on the mirror  10708  (e.g., single PCPP mirror). The mirror  10708  may reflect the incoming beams onto the polygon mirror  10706  coincident in a cross-scan dimension, thereby forming the object to be imaged. Additionally, the lens element  10704  (e.g., cross-scan magnifying cylinder lens) may image a laser spot from a surface of the polygon mirror  10706 , and then onto a surface of the print media in order to provide sufficient magnification to shrink the spot size down at the print media and achieve wobble correction. In various examples, placing the object on a surface of the polygon mirror  10706  prior to providing the image to the print media also addresses wobble correction. For example, at an exit aperture of the print head, due to the relative positions of the polygon mirror  10706  and the print media, a large beam is magnified down to a smaller size at a media (for example, at a magnification factor of ×0.1). 
     As further illustrated in  FIG. 107 , the example printing apparatus  10700  comprises a first thermoelectric cooler element  10705 A and a second thermoelectric cooler element  10705 B which operate to regulate the temperature of the integrated laser component  10701 . In some examples, at least a portion of the integrated laser component  10701 /at least one laser  10707  is disposed adjacent/at least partially between the first thermoelectric cooler element  10705 A and the second thermoelectric cooler element  10705 B. 
     As noted above, in some embodiments, in order to print content using a printing apparatus comprising a plurality of multi-mode lasers, laser beams (e.g., emitted by an integrated laser component) may need to be compressed to achieve a target print resolution. This may require significant magnification in a cross-scan dimension to reduce the image size and may be accomplished using a lens element (e.g., magnifying cylinder lens) positioned adjacent/close to a print media. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 108 , a schematic diagram depicting an example view of a portion of a printing apparatus  10800  in accordance with examples of the present disclosure is provided. 
     As illustrated, the printing apparatus  10800  may be at least partially disposed, contained and/or arranged within a body/housing. In particular, as depicted, the example printing apparatus  10800  comprises an integrated laser component/at least one laser source  10801 , a controller component  10802  (e.g., laser drive board). As depicted in  FIG. 108 , the example printing apparatus  10800  comprises one or more optical components. In particular, the example printing apparatus  10800  comprises a polygon mirror  10806 , a mirror  10808  (e.g., PCPP mirror), and a lens element  10804  (e.g., magnifying dual-cylinder lens). In various embodiments, each of the components/elements of the printing apparatus  10800  are in electronic communication with one another such that data and/or information may be transmitted to and/or received between the various components/elements. 
     As noted above, the example printing apparatus  10800  comprises an integrated laser component/at least one laser source  10801  (comprising at least one multi-mode laser). In some examples, as depicted, the integrated laser component/at least one laser source  10801  comprises/defines a housing. The example housing may be or comprise any suitable metal and may be configured to at least partially contain/house one or more lasers (e.g., a plurality of multi-mode lasers). As illustrated in  FIG. 108 , the example integrated laser component/at least one laser source  10801  (e.g., at least one multi-mode laser) is operatively coupled to the controller component  10802  (e.g., laser drive board or PCBA). In some embodiments, the example printing apparatus  10800  comprises a lens element  10804  (e.g., magnifying dual-cylinder lens) is disposed adjacent a location of a print media (e.g., an inch away from a surface of the print media) in order to provide a magnification factor that is less than 1. 
     In some embodiments, the integrated laser component/at least one laser source  10801  (e.g., at least one multi-mode laser) is configured to focus an output beam onto the mirror  10808  (e.g., single PCPP mirror). Then, the mirror  10808  may reflect the incoming beams onto the polygon mirror  10806  in a cross-scan dimension, thereby forming the object to be imaged. In some embodiments, two of the laser beams (e.g., generated by a first pair/set of multi-mode lasers) may be configured on a high path, while another two of the laser beams (e.g., generated by a second pair/set of multi-mode lasers) may be configured on a low path in order to minimize optical size. Referring again to  FIG. 108 , an example one of two possible symmetric paths (originating from integrated laser component/at least one laser source  10801 , mirrored about a line of symmetry  10811 , and terminating at the lens element  10804  leading to the print mechanism aperture  10813 ) is depicted. In various embodiments, the example printing apparatus  10800  may be configured such that laser beam(s) are incident on a partial height, full height or center point of the lens element  10804 . 
     In some embodiments, the lens element  10804  (e.g., cross-scan magnifying cylinder lens) may image a laser spot from a surface of the polygon mirror  10806 , and then onto a surface of the print media in order to provide sufficient magnification/a target magnification to shrink the spot size down at the print media while also implementing wobble correction. In various examples, placing the object on a surface of the polygon mirror  10806  prior to providing the image to the print media also addresses wobble correction. For example, at an exit aperture of the print head, due to the relative positions of the polygon mirror  10806  and the print media, a large beam is magnified down to a smaller size at a print media (for example, at a magnification factor of ×0.1) 
     In some embodiments, an example printing apparatus may be configured to use a folded beam path. Referring now to  FIG. 109 , a schematic diagram depicting an example view of a portion of a printing apparatus  10900  in accordance with examples of the present disclosure is provided. 
     As illustrated in  FIG. 109 , the example printing apparatus  10900  may be at least partially disposed, contained and/or arranged within a body/housing. In particular, as depicted, the example printing apparatus  10900  comprises, a controller component  10902  (e.g., laser drive board), and one or more optical components. In particular, the example printing apparatus  10900  comprises a polygon mirror  10906 , a lens element  10904  (e.g., magnifying cylinder lens), and a plurality of mirrors (as depicted, a first mirror  10912 A, a second mirror  10912 B, a third mirror  10912 C, and a fourth mirror  10912 D). In some examples, the plurality of mirrors  10912 A,  10912 B,  10912 C and  10912 D may steer (e.g., direct, channel) the laser beams to a common alignment target. In various embodiments, each of the components/elements of the printing apparatus  10900  are in electronic communication with one another such that data and/or information may be transmitted to and/or received between the various components/elements. 
     In some embodiments, an output beam of a laser source (e.g., integrated laser component/at least one laser source  10801  discussed above in connection with  FIG. 108 ) may be incident on the polygon mirror  10906  and then sequentially focused on/directed to each of the plurality of mirrors  10912 A,  10912 B,  10912 C and  10912 D in turn. Then, an output of the plurality of mirror  10912 A,  10912 B,  10912 C and  10912 D may be directed onto the lens element  10904  prior to terminating at a print mechanism aperture  10913 . In some examples, a size of the print mechanism aperture  10913  may be 2 mm. In some embodiments the lens element  10904  (e.g., dual cylinder magnifying lens) may be positioned between an f-theta lens and the print media, in some examples, adjacent/close to the print media. 
     As noted above, an example lens element  10904  (e.g., magnifying cylinder lens) may be disposed adjacent a location of a print media (e.g., an inch away from a surface of the print media) in order to shrink a focused spot size down to a target resolution (e.g., 200 DPI). 
     Referring now to  FIG. 110 , an example graph  11000  depicting example measurements based on operations of example apparatuses are provided. As depicted in  FIG. 110 , the x-axis represents relative distance from a laser source to a print media measured in millimeters. 
     As illustrated, the y-axis represents a beam width (measured in microns) associated with a first multi-mode laser beam at a print media (represented by line  11001  and line  11005 ). As depicted, the beam width generated by the first multi-mode laser is able to reach a target resolution of 120 microns at the print media (located at approximately 12.5 mm on the graph). 
     As further illustrated, the y-axis also represents a beam width (measured in microns) associated with a single-mode dimension of the laser beam at a print media (represented by line  11003 ). As depicted, the beam width generated by the first multi-mode laser is able to reach and maintain a target resolution around 120 microns at a relative distance between 10 and 15 mm from the print media in the single-mode dimension (e.g. the scan dimension). 
     Accordingly,  FIG. 110  demonstrates that both single-mode and multi-mode dimensions of a multi-mode laser may be utilized to print content at a target resolution (e.g., 120 microns or 200 DPI). 
     Multi-Laser Beam Delivery Module with Common Beam Sub-System 
     In some examples, high power may be necessary in order to directly write/impinge content onto a sensitive print media. In some examples, it may be difficult to provide a sufficient amount of power using a single laser at a reasonable cost and size. As discussed herein, in some applications, a plurality of lasers may be utilized. The use of multiples lasers may require precise methods of alignment and assembly in order for the plurality of lasers to function optimally in concert with one another. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, example apparatuses, methods and techniques for providing a multi-laser beam delivery module with a common beam sub-system are provided. 
     Referring again to  FIG. 107 , as discussed above, an example printing apparatus  10600  may comprise an integrated laser component  10701 . The example printing apparatus  10600  may be similar or identical to the example printing apparatus  10700  described above in connection with  FIG. 107 . 
     As noted above, the example integrated laser component  10701  comprises a collimating assembly with a 2×2 array of lens (as depicted, lens  10703 A,  10703 B,  10703 C and  10703 D) operatively coupled to at least one laser  10707  (e.g., multi-mode laser). In some examples, the integrated laser component  10701  defines a unified laser bank which may be aligned outside the example laser printhead. In various examples, the at least one multi-mode laser  10707  may be associated with a respective collimating lens (lens  10703 A,  10703 B,  10703 C and  10703 D) and can be be independently focused/collimated therewith (in some examples, in conjunction with the other lasers). 
     In some embodiments, a lens element  10704  (e.g., cross-scan magnifying cylinder lens element) may operate to focus the cross-scan dimension of the at least one laser  10707  (e.g., at least one multi-mode laser) to the same distance, and a configuration of mirrors may steer the beams to a common alignment target. In various examples, using a common target may facilitate writing content on multiple/different print lines, or writing content to a single line concurrently. In some embodiments, as depicted in  FIG. 107 , the integrated laser component  10701 /at least one laser  10707  (e.g., laser bank) may be mounted within an example print head as a unit, requiring a single mirror/optical path directing the beams to an example polygon mirror (e.g., polygon mirror  10706 ). 
     In various embodiments, the example integrated laser component  10701 /at least one laser  10707  may comprise/be embedded with multiple instances of the same beam shaping and steering system (one per laser). In some examples, each instance may comprise a collimating lens with a focal length set to control the beam size in the scan dimension. In some examples, each instance may comprise a cylinder lens that is configured to focus the cross-scan dimension to the surface of the polygon mirror (e.g., polygon mirror  10706 ). In some examples, each instance may comprise a wedge prism (or multiple prisms) adjusted to angularly deflect the beam to an alignment target. In some examples, each instance may comprise a leveling prism to realign an incident beam to a nearly coplanar condition with the other lasers of the system. In some examples, each collimating lens, cylinder lens, and/or wedge prism may require adjustment in order to achieve a target alignment. Accordingly, in various examples, each collimating lens and/or cylinder lens may be translated in the direction of beam propagation to achieve proper focus. Additionally, each wedge prism may (e.g., deflecting prism(s)) may be rotated to achieve a target/proper beam height (or x/y position) on the polygon mirror (e.g., polygon mirror  10706 ) after passing through the leveling prism (i.e., alignment of the different laser lines to one another). Once the module is fully aligned (e.g., during manufacturing), it may be positioned within an example print head/printing apparatus and a simple alignment process (e.g., adjustment of a single mirror) may bring all lasers into alignment with a scanning optical component (e.g., spinning polygon mirror). 
     Active Media Laser Printer with Symmetric Optical Layout and Segmented Scan Lines 
     As noted above, an example printing apparatus may comprise an integrated laser component (e.g., consisting of four multi-mode laser diodes and corresponding lens each in a 2×2 array arrangement). In such examples, each laser beam generated by the plurality of multi-mode lasers may be inherently non-coplanar as they sweep through the optical system. In some examples, a lack of coplanarity may require larger optics, reduced depth of focus at a print media, reduced laser spot quality (e.g., due to aberrations), and/or difficulty forcing the four beams to print the same coincident line. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, example apparatuses, methods and techniques for providing a multi-laser beam arrangement with a symmetric optical layout and segmented scan lines is provided. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 111 , a schematic diagram depicting an example portion of a printing apparatus  11100  in accordance with examples of the present disclosure is provided. The example portion of a printing apparatus  11100  may be at least partially disposed, contained and/or arranged within a housing (e.g., body, structure, container). In some examples, the example printing apparatus  11100  may comprise two separate/distinct a 1×2 arrays. As shown, the example printing apparatus  11100  comprises a first laser array  11101  (e.g., a 1×2 laser array) and a second laser array  11103  (e.g., a 1×2 laser array). As illustrated, each of the first laser array  11101  and the second laser array  11103  may be configured to direct laser beams through a configuration of optical elements/lens(es). 
     As further depicted in  FIG. 111 , the example printing apparatus  11100  comprises a polygon mirror  11102  disposed downstream with respect to the first laser array  11101  and the second laser array  11103 . As further illustrated, a first set of optical elements  11105  (e.g., scan lenses) and a second set of optical elements  11107  (e.g., scan lenses) are positioned downstream with respect to the polygon mirror  11102  such that the one or more laser beams are directed/channeled therethrough. As depicted, the first set of optical elements  11105  are associated with the first laser array  11101 , and the second set of optical elements  11107  are associated with the second laser array  11103 . Additionally, as shown, each of the first laser array  11101  and the second laser array  11103  is positioned symmetrically around/with respect to the scanning polygon mirror  11102 . As further illustrated in  FIG. 111 , the example printing apparatus  11100  further comprises a common lens element  11109  (e.g., magnifying dual-cylinder lens) that is configured to focus the cross-scan dimension of each laser beam provided by the first laser array  11101  and the second laser array  11103 . 
     In some examples, a scan line generated by the example printing apparatus  11100  may be divided/split into two segments, each covering half a print media/label. In some examples, the separate segments may necessitate data stitching. In some examples, it may be necessary to compress the sweep optically (e.g., from a full label size down to half a label). In some embodiments, digital compensation may be used to avoid distortion of a print image in an instance in which the lasers within each laser array  11101  and  11103  are scanning at a slightly different speeds. 
     In some examples, the example printing apparatus  11100  may provide improvements in depth of focus, laser spot quality, system compactness, and/or print efficiency (i.e., power vs. speed). Additionally, the example printing apparatus  11100  may provide advantages relating to heat migration and the electrical layout within the print head. 
     Method to Print with Laser Printer Utilizing Preheating System 
     In some embodiments, as discussed herein, a laser printer system may utilize a preheater in order to heat/warm a print media to a target temperature prior to lasing. In some examples, an example preheater/preheating system may require a period of time (in some examples, between 10 minutes and 15 minutes) to bring the print media to a target temperature. 
     In accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure, example apparatuses, methods and techniques for rapidly heating a print media prior to lasing are provided. The noted techniques may allow an end user to print immediately after powering up an example printing apparatus. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 112 , an example flow diagram illustrating an example method  11200  in accordance with examples of the present disclosure is provided. 
     In some examples, the method  11200  may be performed by processing circuitry, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a CPU, or the like. In some examples, the processing circuitry may be electrically coupled to and/or in electronic communication with other circuitries of an example printing apparatus, a memory (such as, for example, random access memory (RAM) for storing computer program instructions), and/or the like. 
     In some examples, one or more of the procedures described in  FIG. 112  may be embodied by computer program instructions, which may be stored by a memory (such as a non-transitory memory) of a system employing an embodiment of the present disclosure and executed by a processing circuitry (such as a processor) of the system. These computer program instructions may direct the system to function in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the memory circuitry produce an article of manufacture, the execution of which implements the function specified in the flow diagram step/operation(s). Further, the system may comprise one or more other circuitries. Various circuitries of the system may be electronically coupled between and/or among each other to transmit and/or receive energy, data and/or information. 
     In some examples, embodiments may take the form of a computer program product on a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing computer-readable program instruction (e.g., computer software). Any suitable computer-readable storage medium may be utilized, including non-transitory hard disks, CD-ROMs, flash memory, optical storage devices, or magnetic storage devices. 
     The example method  11200  begins at step/operation  11201 . At step/operation  11201 , a processing circuitry (such as, but not limited to, a CPU) determines a preheat status associated with an example printing apparatus. 
     Subsequent to determining the preheat status at step/operation  11201 , the method  11200  proceeds to step/operation  11203 . At step/operation  11203 , processing circuitry automatically scales a print speed available based on the preheat status. For example, initially, a printing apparatus may print at a lower speed (e.g., 1.5 IPS to 2 IPS) than the speed that is typically required to fulfil a particular print operation. Accordingly, in some examples, where possible, printing operations may be performed successfully at a lower speed (e.g., using one laser instead of a plurality of lasers). In another example, at power up if a print job is requested at 4 IPS, the printing apparatus/processing circuitry may proceed to print at 1.5 IPS to 2 IPS, depending on final performance capability of the system design/target print parameters. As the preheater heats up the media, the maximum print speed is increased to match the capability, for example 4 IPS when fully preheated. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a method is provided. The method may comprise: actuating, by a processor, a first roller and a second roller to cause traversal of print media along a first direction, wherein the first roller is positioned upstream of the second roller along the first direction; causing, by the processor, the first roller to stop rotating at a first time instant; and causing, by the processor, the second roller to stop rotating at a second time instant, wherein the second time instant is chronologically later than the first time instant. 
     In some examples, the method may comprise causing a print head to print content on the print media in response to stopping the rotation of the second roller. 
     In some examples, the first roller is positioned upstream of the print head, and the second roller is positioned downstream of the print head. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises causing a traversal of the first roller and the second roller along a second direction, wherein the traversal of the first roller and the second roller along the second direction causes the first roller and the second roller to be spaced apart from the print media. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises causing a traversal of the first roller and the second roller along a third direction, wherein the traversal of the first roller and the second roller along the third direction causes the first roller and the second roller to abut the print media, and wherein the third direction is opposite to the second direction. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises determining a time period between the first time instant and the second time instant based on one or more print media characteristics, wherein the one or more print media characteristics comprises at least one of a type of the print media, or a thickness of the print media. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises determining a time period between the first time instant and the second time instant based on a media traversal speed. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises receiving an input from an operator pertaining to an expected print quality, and determining the media traversal speed based on the expected print quality. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. The printing apparatus may comprise: a first roller; a second roller positioned downstream of the first roller along a first direction, wherein the first roller and the second roller facilitate traversal of print media in the first direction; a processor communicatively coupled to the first roller and the second roller; wherein the processor is configured to: actuate the first roller and the second roller to cause traversal of the print media in the first direction, cause the first roller to stop rotating at a first time instant; and cause the second roller to stop rotating at a second time instant, wherein the second time instant is chronologically later than the first time instant. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus further comprises a print head communicatively coupled with the processor, wherein the processor is configured to cause the print head to print content after the second time instant. 
     In some examples, the first roller is positioned upstream of the print head, and wherein the second roller is positioned downstream of the print head. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus further comprises a first actuation unit and a second actuation unit, wherein the first actuation unit and the second actuation unit are coupled to the processor, wherein the processor is configured to activate the first actuation unit and the second actuation unit to cause the first roller and the second roller to rotate, respectively. 
     In some examples, each of the first roller and the second roller comprises a biasing member and a roller, wherein the biasing member is coupled to the roller, wherein the biasing member is configured to apply a biasing force on the roller, along a second direction, causing the roller to abut the print media. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus further comprises a third actuation unit communicatively coupled to the processor, wherein the third actuation unit is further coupled to the roller in the first roller and the second roller, wherein the processor is configured to cause the third actuation unit to move the roller in a third direction causing the first roller and the second roller to be spaced apart from the print media. 
     In some examples, each of the first roller and the second roller further comprises a shaft that is coupled to the biasing member, wherein the shaft allows rotation of the first roller and the second roller about the shaft. 
     In some examples, the first roller and the second roller are rotatable, about the shaft, between a first position and a second position. 
     In some examples, at the first position, the first roller and the second roller abut the print media. 
     In some examples, at the second position, the first roller and the second roller are positioned away from the print media. 
     In some examples, the first roller and the second roller are coupled to a print head. 
     In some examples, the rotation of the first roller and the second roller, about the shaft, causes the print head to traverse along the second direction. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. The printing apparatus may comprise: a print head assembly comprising at least a bottom chassis portion configured to receive a print media, and a frame movably positioned above the bottom chassis portion along a vertical axis of the printing apparatus, wherein the frame is movable between a first position and a second position, wherein the frame, in the first position, is spaced apart from the bottom chassis portion and wherein the frame, in the second position, presses the print media against the bottom chassis portion. 
     In some examples, the print head assembly further comprises a top chassis portion removably coupled to the bottom chassis portion, wherein a bottom surface of the top chassis portion is positioned at a predetermined distance from a top surface of the bottom chassis portion. 
     In some examples, the frame is coupled to the top chassis portion such that the frame is extendible from the bottom surface of the top chassis portion. 
     In some examples, the frame is positioned between the bottom surface of the top chassis portion and the top surface of the bottom chassis portion. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus further comprises a housing, wherein the housing comprises a base and a back-spine section, wherein the back-spine section is orthogonally coupled to the base, and wherein the back-spine section extends along the vertical axis of the printing apparatus. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus further comprises at least one first rail coupled to the back-spine section, wherein the frame is slidably coupled to the at least one first rail. 
     In some examples, a shape of the frame corresponds to a concentric rectangle, and wherein the frame is configured to press against at least one edge of the print media. 
     In some examples, the bottom chassis portion comprises a top end portion and a bottom end portion, and wherein a top surface of the bottom chassis portion defines the top end portion of the bottom chassis portion, and wherein a bottom surface of the bottom chassis portion defines the bottom end portion of the bottom chassis portion. 
     In some examples, the bottom surface of the bottom chassis portion defines a plurality of orifices that extends from the bottom end portion of the bottom chassis portion to the top end portion of the bottom chassis portion. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus further comprises a fan configured to be received at the bottom end portion of the bottom chassis portion, wherein the fan is configured to generate a negative pressure at the top end portion of the bottom chassis portion through the plurality of orifices, wherein the print media gets pulled towards the top surface of the bottom chassis portion based on the negative pressure generated by the fan through the plurality of orifices. 
     In some examples, the frame is configured to further press the print media against the top surface of the bottom chassis portion while the fan generates the negative pressure generated by the fan through the plurality of orifices. 
     In some examples, the bottom surface of the bottom chassis portion defines a cavity that extends from the bottom end portion of the bottom chassis portion to the top end portion of the bottom chassis portion, wherein the cavity defines an inner surface of the bottom chassis portion, and wherein the inner surface of the bottom chassis portion defines a plurality of protruding grooves that extend along a lateral axis of the printing apparatus. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus further comprises a modular platform configured to be removably received on the top end portion of the bottom chassis portion through the plurality of protruding grooves, wherein the modular platform has a bottom surface and a top surface, and wherein the bottom surface of the modular platform faces the cavity and the top surface of the modular platform is positioned opposite to the cavity. 
     In some examples, the bottom surface defines a plurality of orifices that extend from the bottom surface of the modular platform to the top surface of the modular platform. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus further comprises a fan configured to be received at the bottom end portion of the bottom chassis portion, wherein the fan is configured to generate a negative pressure at the top end portion of the bottom chassis portion through the plurality of orifices and the cavity, wherein the print media gets pulled towards the top surface of the modular platform based on the negative pressure generated by the fan through the plurality of orifices and the cavity. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a method is provided. The method may comprise: causing, by a processor in the printing apparatus, a frame, movably positioned above a bottom chassis portion along a vertical axis of the printing apparatus, to move to a first position, wherein the frame, in the first position, is spaced apart from the bottom chassis portion; causing, by the processor, a traversal of print media along a print path to position a print media on a top surface of the bottom chassis portion; and causing, by the processor, the frame to move to a second position, wherein the frame, in the second position, presses the print media against the bottom chassis portion during printing of content on the print media. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises activating an actuation unit that causes an application of an external force on the frame, wherein the frame moves to the second position in response to the application of the external force. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises activating a vacuum generating unit, positioned at a bottom surface of the bottom chassis portion, wherein the activation of the vacuum generating unit causes the print media to stick to the top surface of the bottom chassis portion. 
     In some examples, the combination of the frame being positioned at the second position and the activation of the vacuum generating unit causes flattening of the print media. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a computing device configured to operate a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the computing device comprises: a memory device comprising one or more instructions; a processor configured to execute the one or more instructions to: cause a frame, movably positioned above a bottom chassis portion along a vertical axis of the printing apparatus, to move to a first position, wherein the frame, in the first position, is spaced apart from the bottom chassis portion; cause a traversal of a print media along a print path to position the print media on a top surface of the bottom chassis portion; and cause the frame to move to a second position, wherein the frame, in the second position, presses the print media against the bottom chassis portion during printing of content on the print media. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a method is provided. The method may comprise: receiving, by a processor, one or more configuration parameters associated with the printing apparatus, wherein the one or more configuration parameters include at least a resolution at which content is to be printed on a print media; determining, by the processor, one or more print head parameters based on the one or more configuration parameters associated with a print head in the printing apparatus, wherein the one or more print head parameters include a rotation speed of a polygon mirror in the print head; receiving, by the processor, one or more updated configuration parameters, wherein the one or more updated configuration parameters comprise at least an updated resolution at which the content is to be printed on the print media; and updating, by the processor, the one or more print head parameters, wherein updating the one or more print head parameters includes at least updating the rotation speed of the polygon mirror. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises determining, by the processor, a count of laser beams to be used to print content. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises modifying the count of laser beams to be used to print content based on the updated resolution. 
     In some examples, the polygon mirror comprises a plurality of faces. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises determining a count of faces of the plurality of faces to be used to print content based on the updated resolution. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a method is provided. The method may comprise: receiving, by a processor, one or more configuration parameters associated with the printing apparatus, wherein the one or more configuration parameters include at least a resolution at which content is to be printed on a print media and a media traversal speed; determining, by the processor, a measure of skew at which the one or more laser beams are configured to sweep a width of the print media based on the one or more configuration parameters; 
     In some examples, the method further comprises: receiving, by the processor, content to be printed on the print media; and modifying, by the processor, the content to introduce a second measure of skew in the content, wherein printing of the modified content generates a printed content with zero degrees skew. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises determining a dot size based on the resolution at which the content is to be printed. 
     In some examples, the measure of skew is determined based on the dot size. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises determining by the processor a count of laser beams being used write content. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises determining an amount of content to be printed by each of the laser beams in the count of laser beams. 
     In some examples, the measure of skew is determined for each laser beam in the count of laser beams, and wherein the measure of skew for each laser beam is determined based on the amount of content printed by each laser beam in the count of laser beams. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a print head engine apparatus is provided. The print head engine apparatus may comprise: a top chassis portion; and a bottom chassis portion pivotally coupled to the bottom chassis portion, wherein the bottom chassis portion is movable between a first position and a second position, and wherein in the first position, the bottom chassis portion is coupled to the top chassis portion through a latch, and wherein in the second position the bottom chassis portion is positioned away from the top chassis portion. 
     In some examples, the top chassis portion comprises a first top chassis portion and a second top chassis portion, and wherein the bottom chassis portion comprises a first bottom chassis portion and a second bottom chassis portion. 
     In some examples, the first top chassis portion is fixedly coupled to the back-spine section of a printing apparatus, wherein the second top chassis portion is pivotally coupled to the second bottom chassis portion. 
     In some examples, the second bottom chassis portion is fixedly coupled to the back-spine section of a printing apparatus, wherein the first bottom chassis portion is pivotally coupled to the second bottom chassis portion. 
     In some examples, the first bottom chassis portion is pivotally coupled to the first top chassis portion. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a method for synchronization between a printing apparatus and a print head is provided. The method may comprise: receiving a print head ready signal and a laser position signal from the print head; and in response to the reception of the print head ready signal and the laser position signal, causing the traversal of a print media in the printing apparatus by a predetermined distance; and transmitting a ready-to-print signal to the print head. 
     In some examples, the predetermined distance is deterministic based on a resolution at which the content is to be printed on the print media. 
     In some examples, the print head ready signal is indicative of a polygon mirror in the print head reaching a determined rotation speed. 
     In some examples, the laser position signal is indicative of a determined position of a writing laser on the polygon mirror. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a method for synchronization between a printing apparatus and a print head is provided. The method may comprise: causing a polygon mirror in the print head to rotate at a predetermined rotation speed; in response to the polygon mirror rotating at the predetermined rotation speed, generating a print head ready signal; receiving an SOL signal from an SOL detector; generating a laser position signal in response to reception of the SOL signal; transmitting the laser position signal and the print head ready signal to a control unit of the printing apparatus; and receiving a ready to print signal from the control unit of the printing apparatus in response to the transmission of the laser position signal and the print head ready signal. 
     In some examples, the ready to print signal is indicative of the traversal of the print media by a predetermined distance. 
     In some examples, the predetermined distance is deterministic based on a resolution at which the content is to be printed on the print media. 
     In some examples, the laser position signal is a start of a blanking period, wherein the blanking period corresponds to a timer period in which the writing laser is directed to a location other than the print media. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a method is provided. The method may comprise: receiving, by a processor, one or more configuration parameters associated with the printing apparatus, wherein the one or more configuration parameters include at least a resolution at which content is to be printed on a print media and a media traversal speed; determining, by the processor, a measure of skew at which the one or more laser beams are configured to sweep a width of the print media based on the one or more configuration parameters; receiving, by the processor, content to be printed on the print media; and modifying, by the processor, the content to introduce a second measure of skew in the content, wherein printing of the modified content generates a printed content with zero degrees skew. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may comprise: triggering an ultraviolet (UV) light emission from a UV light source onto a print media associated with a printing apparatus; detecting a reflected light from the print media; generating a light intensity indication based on the reflected light; and determining whether the print media is supported by the printing apparatus based on whether the light intensity indication satisfies a light intensity threshold. 
     In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: determining that the light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold; and in response to determining that the light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold, determining that the print media is supported by the printing apparatus. 
     In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises determining that the light intensity indication does not satisfy the light intensity threshold; and in response to determining that the light intensity indication does not satisfy the light intensity threshold, determining that the print media is not supported by the printing apparatus. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may comprise: triggering an ultraviolet (UV) light emission from a UV light source onto a print media associated with a printing apparatus; detecting a reflected light from the print media; generating a red light intensity indication based on the reflected light; generating a green light intensity indication based on the reflected light; 
     generating a blue light intensity indication based on the reflected light; and determining whether the print media is supported by the printing apparatus based on whether at least one of the red light intensity indication, the green light intensity indication, and the blue light intensity indication satisfies a light intensity threshold. 
     In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: determining that at least one of the red light intensity indication, the green light intensity indication, and the blue light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold; and in response to determining that at least one of the red light intensity indication, the green light intensity indication, and the blue light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold, determining that the print media is supported by the printing apparatus. 
     In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: determining that none of the red light intensity indication, the green light intensity indication, and the blue light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold; and in response to determining that none of the red light intensity indication, the green light intensity indication, and the blue light intensity indication satisfies the light intensity threshold, determining that the print media is not supported by the printing apparatus. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may comprise: triggering an ultraviolet (UV) light emission from a UV light source onto a print media associated with a printing apparatus; detecting a reflected light from the print media; generating a red light intensity indication based on the reflected light; generating a green light intensity indication based on the reflected light; generating a blue light intensity indication based on the reflected light; and determining a print media signature associated with the print media based on the red light intensity indication, the green light intensity indication, and the blue light intensity indication. 
     In some examples, determining the print media signature associated with the print media further comprises: comparing the red light intensity indication with a light intensity threshold; comparing the green light intensity indication with the light intensity threshold; and comparing the blue light intensity indication with the light intensity threshold. 
     In some examples, determining the print media signature associated with the print media further comprises: comparing the red light intensity indication with a first light intensity threshold and a second light intensity threshold; comparing the green light intensity indication with the first light intensity threshold and the second light intensity threshold; and comparing the blue light intensity indication with the first light intensity threshold and the second light intensity threshold. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may comprise: triggering an ultraviolet (UV) light emission from a UV light source onto a print media associated with a printing apparatus; detecting a reflected light from the print media; generating a light intensity indication based on the reflected light; and determining a print media signature associated with the print media based on the light intensity indication. 
     In some examples, determining the print media signature associated with the print media further comprises: comparing the light intensity indication with a first light intensity threshold and a second light intensity threshold. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus may comprise: a first media guard bar and a second media guard bar disposed on a top surface of a bottom chassis portion, wherein a print media travels between the first media guard bar and the second media guard bar; a first media sensor holding bar disposed on a first side surface of the first media guard bar; a first media sensor slidably disposed on a first bottom surface of the first media guard bar and configured to emit a first ultraviolet (UV) light on the print media; a second media sensor holding bar disposed on a second side surface of the second media guard bar; a second media sensor slidably disposed on a second bottom surface of the second media guard bar and configured to emit a second ultraviolet (UV) light on the print media. 
     In some examples, the first media sensor is configured to detect a first media edge of the print media, wherein the first media sensor is configured to detect a second media edge of the print media. 
     In some examples, when detecting the first media edge of the print media, the first media sensor is configured to detecting a first reflected light from the print media, wherein, when detecting the second media edge of the print media, the second media sensor is configured to detecting a second reflected light from the print media. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may comprise: detecting a first media edge of a print media associated with a printing apparatus; determining a first media edge position based on the first media edge; detecting a second media edge of the print media associated with the printing apparatus; determining a second media edge position based on the second media edge; determining whether a laser travel path associated with a laser subsystem of the printing apparatus overlaps with at least one of the first media edge positions or the second media edge positions; and in response to determining that the laser travel path overlaps with the first media edge position or the second media edge position, causing the laser subsystem to be turned off. 
     In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to determining that the laser travel path overlaps with the first media edge position or the second media edge position, causing adjusting the laser travel path. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus may comprise: a bottom chassis portion comprising a height limiter panel, wherein at least one bottom rib element protrudes from a top surface of the height limiter panel; and a top chassis portion comprising a height limiter groove, wherein at least one top rib element protrudes from a bottom surface of the height limiter groove. 
     In some examples, a distance between a top surface of one of the at least one bottom rib element and a bottom surface of one of the at least one top rib elements is 0.4 millimeters. 
     In some examples, a first bottom rib element and a second bottom rib element protrude from the top surface of the height limiter panel, wherein a print media travels between the first bottom rib element and the second bottom rib element. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus further comprises: a biasing mechanism disposed on a bottom surface of the height limiter panel, wherein the biasing mechanism comprises: a supporting beam disposed on the bottom surface of the height limiter panel, and a spring element, wherein a first end of the spring element is secured to the supporting beam and a second end of the spring element is secured to the bottom surface of the height limiter panel. 
     In some examples, the bottom chassis portion further comprises a fixed panel, wherein a plurality of locking rib elements protrude from a side surface of the height limiter panel, wherein a plurality of locking groove elements are disposed on a side surface of the fixed panel, wherein the height limiter panel is secured to the fixed panel through the plurality of locking rib elements and the plurality of locking groove elements. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the printing apparatus may comprise: a laser print head; and at least a first laser source and a second laser source in electronic communication with the laser print head. 
     In some examples, the laser print head is configured to generate at least one laser control signal in order to: cause the first laser source to generate a first laser beam incident on a target location of a print media, and cause the second laser source to generate a second laser beam incident on the target location of the print media such that content is impinged on the print media. 
     In some examples, the target location comprises a width of the print media, and wherein laser print head is configured to cause the first laser beam and the second laser beam to sweep the width of the print media concurrently. 
     In some examples, the output of the first laser beam and the output of the second laser beam are superimposed onto one another in order to impinge the content onto the print media. 
     In some examples, the content comprises one or more dots. 
     In some examples, the first laser source and the second laser source are oriented in a perpendicular arrangement with respect to one another. 
     In some examples, the first laser source and the second laser source each comprise multi-mode lasers. 
     In some examples, the laser print head is configured to: cause the first laser source to generate the first laser beam at a first power output, and cause the second laser source to generate the second laser beam at a second power output that is different from the first power output. 
     In some examples, the first power output and the second power output comprise configurable parameters. 
     In some examples, the configurable parameters correspond with a print resolution. 
     In some examples, the laser print head is configured to generate a first laser control signal in order to: cause the first laser source to generate a pre-energizing beam incident on a target location of a print media; and subsequent to causing the first laser source to generate the pre-energizing beam, cause the second laser source to generate a writing beam incident on the target location of the print media. 
     In some examples, the laser print head is configured to cause the second laser source to generate the writing beam in response to determining that a condition of the print media satisfies an activation threshold. 
     In some examples: the first laser source comprises a single-mode laser, and the second laser source comprises a multi-mode laser. 
     In some examples, the pre-energizing beam impinges a dash onto the print media, and the writing beam impinges a dot superimposed thereon. 
     In some examples, the laser print head is configured to cause the second laser source to generate the writing beam within a millisecond of causing the first laser source to generate the pre-energizing beam. 
     In some examples, the first laser source is configured to generate the pre-energizing beam at a first frequency, and the second laser source is configured to generate a writing beam at a second frequency. 
     In some examples, the first frequency is lower than the second frequency. 
     In some examples, the first laser source is configured to be in an off state when traversing a portion of the print media where no content is to be printed. 
     In some examples, a high-quality dimension of the pre-energizing beam is oriented to a line width of the print media. 
     In some examples, a resolution band of the pre-energizing beam matches a resolution band of the writing beam. 
     In some examples, one or more of the first laser source and the second laser source are in a deactivated state when not aimed at the target area of the print media. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the printing apparatus may comprise: a laser print head; and a laser print head controller in electronic communication with the laser print head, wherein the laser print head controller is configured to: in response to receiving data associated with a printed media of the printing apparatus, determine, based at least in part on analysis of the data, one or more operational parameters of the printing apparatus. 
     In some examples, the laser print head controller is further configured to determine the one or more operational parameters based at least in part on a stored correction lookup table. 
     In some examples, the laser print head controller is further configured to: transmit a control signal to cause the laser print head to adjust one or more operational parameters of the printing apparatus. 
     In some examples, adjusting the one or more operational parameters comprises adjusting one or more of a timing or a power output associated with at least one of the laser sources. 
     In some examples, the operational parameters are associated with print resolution parameters. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus further comprises a sensor in electronic communication with the laser print head controller. 
     In some examples, the sensor is located downstream in relation to the print media. 
     In some examples, the sensor is configured to: obtain image data associated with the print media having content printed thereon. 
     In some examples, the sensor comprises a linear sensor or an image sensor. 
     In some examples, the sensor is configured to provide real-time feedback during printing operations of the printing apparatus. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the printing apparatus may comprise: a print media assembly; an optical assembly comprising one or more laser sources; and a laser print head controller in electronic communication with the print media assembly and the optical assembly. 
     In some examples, the laser print head controller is configured to determine a required number of write cycles. 
     In some examples, the required number of write cycles is based at least in part on a print media type, a sweep rate, and a required print speed. 
     In some examples, the laser print head controller is configured to cause the one or more laser sources to perform a plurality of write cycles in order to impinge content onto a print media. 
     In some examples, the laser print head controller is further configured to: cause the print media assembly to stop traversal of the print media; and cause the one or more laser sources to perform the plurality of write cycles by generating one or more laser beam incident on the print media. 
     In some examples, the laser print head controller is configured to: subsequent to causing the one or more laser sources to perform the plurality of write cycles, cause the print media assembly to start traversal of the print media. 
     In some examples, performing the plurality of write cycles comprises causing the one or more laser sources to generate one or more laser beams incident on the print media while the print media traverses the printing apparatus. 
     In some examples, the laser print head controller is further configured to cause the optical assembly to implement wobble-correction optics. 
     In some examples, performing the plurality of write cycles comprises: sequentially sweeping a first portion of a first print media width. 
     In some examples, performing the plurality of write cycles further comprises: subsequent to sweeping the first portion of the first print media width, sequentially sweeping a second portion of a second print media width. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, an optical assembly is provided. In some examples, the optical assembly may comprise: a collimating component comprising at least a first plurality of lenses and a second plurality of lenses, wherein the collimating component is configured to collimate a laser beam generated by a laser source. 
     In some examples, the first plurality of lenses and the second plurality of lenses are configured to move independently with respect to one another. 
     In some examples, the laser source comprises a multi-mode laser. 
     In some examples, the laser source comprises a single-mode laser. 
     In some examples, the optical assembly further comprises a focusing component configured to focus an output of the collimating component. 
     In some examples, the optical assembly further comprises a beam control component configured to condition an output of the collimating component. 
     In some examples, the beam control component comprises one or more prism elements. 
     In some examples, the one or more prism elements comprises an anamorphic prism pair. 
     In some examples, the beam control component is further configured to condition the output of the collimating component by adjusting a relative position of the anamorphic prism pair. 
     In some examples, the optical assembly further comprises a beam measurement element configured to detect one or more parameters of the laser beam, wherein the beam control component is configured to condition the output of the collimating component based at least in part on the one or more parameters of the laser beam. 
     In some examples, the one or more parameters comprises a detected divergence of the laser beam. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a print media is provided. 
     In some examples, the print media may comprise: a laser markable coating defining a top layer of the print media; and a reflective layer defining an intermediary layer of the print media. 
     In some examples, the print media further comprises an absorbing layer defining a second intermediary layer of the print media. 
     In some examples, the laser markable coating comprises at least one color former, at least one color developer, and at least one optothermal converting agent. 
     In some examples, the at least one color former comprises a leuco dye. 
     In some examples, the at least one color developer comprises a proton donor. 
     In some examples, the reflective layer comprises a metallic layer or metallic particles. 
     In some examples, the metallic layer or metallic particles comprise one or more of aluminum, nickel, bronze, and steel. 
     In some examples, the reflective layer comprises hexagonal boron nitride. 
     In some examples, the absorbing layer comprises titanium dioxide. 
     In some examples, the absorbing layer comprises a ceramic material or metallic oxide. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may comprise: receiving, by a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus, print data indicating at least a first power level; receiving, by the controller, a darkness setting input; adjusting, by the controller, the first power level to a second power level based at least in part on the darkness setting input; receiving, by the controller, a contrast setting input; adjusting, by the controller, the second power level to a third power level based at least in part on the contrast setting input; and providing, by the controller, the third power level to a laser power control system of the print head. 
     In some examples, the first power level is associated with a first dot to be printed by the print head on a print media. 
     In some examples, the laser power control system of the print head is configured to cause a laser subsystem of the print head to print the first dot at the third power level. 
     In some examples, the computer-implement method further comprises: receiving, by a processor of the printing apparatus, raw print data; generating, by the processor, an image buffer based at least in part on the raw print data; and providing, by the processor, the image buffer to the controller of the print head. 
     In some examples, when adjusting the first power level to the second power level, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving a darkness increase associated with the darkness setting input, increasing the first power level to the second power level. 
     In some examples, when adjusting the first power level to the second power level, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving a darkness decrease associated with the darkness setting input, decreasing the first power level to the second power level. 
     In some examples, the first power level is between 0% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). 
     In some examples, the darkness setting input is between −100% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). 
     In some examples, adjusting the first power level to the second power level is further based on a darkness step size ratio. 
     In some examples, the darkness step size ratio is 25%. 
     In some examples, adjusting the first power level to the second power level is further based on a darkness setting lookup table. 
     In some examples, when adjusting the first power level to the second power level, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving a contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level satisfies a power level threshold, increasing the second power level to the third power level. 
     In some examples, when adjusting the first power level to the second power level, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving a contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level does not satisfy a power level threshold, decreasing the second power level to the third power level. 
     In some examples, when adjusting the first power level to the second power level, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving a contrast decrease associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level satisfies a power level threshold, decreasing the second power level to the third power level. 
     In some examples, when adjusting the first power level to the second power level, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving a contrast decrease associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second power level does not satisfy a power level threshold, increasing the second power level to the third power level. 
     In some examples, adjusting the second power level to the third power level is further based on a contrast step size ratio. 
     In some examples, the contrast step size ratio is 25%. 
     In some examples, adjusting the second power level to the third power level is further based on a contrast setting lookup table. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may comprise: receiving, by a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus, print data indicating at least a first duty cycle; receiving, by the controller, a darkness setting input; adjusting, by the controller, the first duty cycle to a second duty cycle based at least in part on the darkness setting input; receiving, by the controller, a contrast setting input; adjusting, by the controller, the second duty cycle to a third duty cycle based at least in part on the contrast setting input; and providing, by the controller, the third duty cycle to a laser power control system of the print head. 
     In some examples, the first duty cycle is associated with a first dot to be printed by the print head on a print media. 
     In some examples, the laser power control system of the print head is configured to cause a laser subsystem of the print head to print the first dot at the third duty cycle. 
     In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: receiving, by a processor of the printing apparatus, raw print data; generating, by the processor, an image buffer based at least in part on the raw print data; and providing, by the processor, the image buffer to the controller of the print head. 
     In some examples, when adjusting the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving a darkness increase associated with the darkness setting input, increasing the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle. 
     In some examples, when adjusting the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving a darkness decrease associated with the darkness setting input, decreasing the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle. 
     In some examples, the first duty cycle is between 0% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). 
     In some examples, the darkness setting input is between −100% (inclusive) and 100% (inclusive). 
     In some examples, adjusting the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle is further based on a darkness step size ratio. 
     In some examples, the darkness step size ratio is 25%. 
     In some examples, adjusting the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle is further based on a darkness setting lookup table. 
     In some examples, when adjusting the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving a contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle satisfies a duty cycle threshold, increasing the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle. 
     In some examples, when adjusting the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving a contrast increase associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle does not satisfy a power level threshold, decreasing the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle. 
     In some examples, when adjusting the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving a contrast decrease associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle satisfies a power level threshold, decreasing the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle. 
     In some examples, when adjusting the first duty cycle to the second duty cycle, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to receiving a contrast decrease associated with the contrast setting input and determining that the second duty cycle does not satisfy a power level threshold, increasing the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle. 
     In some examples, adjusting the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle is further based on a contrast step size ratio. 
     In some examples, the contrast step size ratio is 25%. 
     In some examples, adjusting the second duty cycle to the third duty cycle is further based on a contrast setting lookup table. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may comprise: determining, by a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus, a first dot, a second dot, and a third dot from an image buffer, wherein the second dot is between the first dot and the third dot; determining, by the controller, a first power level associated with the first dot, a second power level associated with the second dot, and a third power level associated with the third dot; and in response to receiving a smoothness setting input or a sharpness setting input, adjusting the second power level based at least in part on the first power level and the third power level. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a computer-implemented method is provided. The computer-implemented method may comprise: determining, by a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus, print data; determining, by the controller and based at least in part on the print data, a target print speed; and determining, by the controller and based at least in part on the target print speed, a target media temperature. 
     In some examples, the target print speed is determined based at least in part on a lookup table. 
     In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to determining, by the controller, that a current media temperature is within a predetermined range of the target media temperature, providing, by the controller, a control indication to cause at least one laser of the printing apparatus to perform power compensation operations. 
     In some examples, causing the at least one laser of the printing apparatus to perform power compensation operations comprises: determining, by the controller and via one or more sensors, that the current media temperature is below a low threshold temperature value; and providing, by the controller, a second control indication to cause the at least one laser to increase an amount of output power. 
     In some examples, causing the at least one laser of the printing apparatus to perform power compensation operations comprises: determining, by the controller, and via one or more sensors that the current media temperature is above a high threshold temperature value; and providing, by the controller, a second control indication to cause the at least one laser to decrease an amount of output power. 
     In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: determining, by the controller and via one or more sensors, that a current media temperature is below a second predetermined range of the target media temperature that exceeds a power compensation range; and providing, by the controller, a control indication to cause an increase to a preheating laser temperature of at least one preheating laser. 
     In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: determining, by the controller and via one or more sensors, that a current media temperature is above a second predetermined range of the target media temperature that exceeds a power compensation range; and providing, by the controller, a control indication to cause the printing apparatus to halt operations for a predetermined time period. 
     In some examples, the computer-implemented method further comprises: in response to determining, by a controller of a print head of a printing apparatus, that no further printing operations are required, providing, by the controller, a control indication to cause at least a portion of an unprinted media to retract within a feed roller. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the printing apparatus may comprise: a preheating chamber having at least one moveable heat spreader element disposed at a first position relative to a portion of a print media; and a printer control unit in electronic communication with the at least one moveable heat spreader element that is configured to: responsive to detecting that the portion of the print media has exited a laser writing location, provide a control indication to cause the at least one moveable heat spreader element to move from the first position to a second position relative to the print media. 
     In some examples, the at least one moveable heat spreader element is driven by an actuator control unit that is operatively coupled to the printer control unit. 
     In some examples, the at least one moveable heat spreader element is attached to/operatively coupled to a moveable arm or moveable component. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus may comprise: a laser print head; and at least a first laser source in electronic communication with the laser print head, wherein the laser print head is configured to generate at least one laser control signal in order to generate a pre-emphasis driving signal at the start of at least one print dot for a time period that is less than the overall dot time. 
     In some examples, the pre-emphasis driving signal is between 10% and 50% higher than a laser driving signal subsequent to the time period. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a method for automatically tuning a printing apparatus is provided. The method may comprise: providing, by at least one processing circuitry, a control indication to disable one or more lasers of the printing apparatus; driving, by the at least one processing circuitry, a digital-to-analog converter (DAC) output to full scale, wherein the DAC is configured to drive at least one laser of the printing apparatus; and compensating, by the at least one processing circuitry, a gain value as required to increase or decrease an output from a differential amplifier that is operatively coupled to the DAC. 
     In some examples, the at least one processing circuitry comprises a microcontroller unit. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises: providing, by the at least one processing circuitry, a control indication to start up the printing apparatus. 
     In some examples, the method further comprises: in an instance in which a threshold time period has elapsed since the printing apparatus has been power cycled, or in an instance in which an ambient temperature associated with the printing apparatus is outside a predetermined range, periodically performing, by the at least one processing circuitry, recompensating operations. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure, a printing apparatus is provided. In some examples, the printing apparatus may comprise: a housing; at least one integrated laser component at least partially disposed within the housing, wherein the integrated laser component comprises a plurality of lasers; and a controller component in electronic communication with the integrated laser component. 
     In some examples, the plurality of lasers comprises four multi-mode lasers arranged in a 2×2 array. 
     In some examples, the printing apparatus further comprises a polygon mirror configured to direct an input beam of the at least one integrated laser component; and a lens element configured to magnify an output beam of the polygon mirror in a cross-scan dimension onto a print media. 
     In some examples, the lens element comprises a magnifying cylinder lens. 
     In some examples, each of the plurality of lasers is concurrently aligned using a beam shaping and steering system comprising at least one of a collimating lens, a cylinder lens, a leveling prism, and a wedge prism. 
     In accordance with various examples of the present disclosure a method for for scaling a print speed of a printing apparatus is provided. The method may comprise: detecting, by at least one processing circuitry, a preheat status associated with a print media; and automatically scaling, by the at least one processing circuitry, the print speed based at least in part on the preheat status. 
     In the specification and figures, typical embodiments of the disclosure have been disclosed. The present disclosure is not limited to such exemplary embodiments. The use of the term “and/or” includes any and all combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. The figures are schematic representations and are not necessarily drawn to scale. Unless otherwise noted, specific terms have been used in a generic and descriptive sense and not for purposes of limitation. 
     The foregoing detailed description has set forth various embodiments of the devices and/or processes via the use of block diagrams, flow charts, schematics, exemplary, and examples. Insofar as such block diagrams, flow charts, schematics, and examples contain one or more functions and/or operations, each function and/or operation within such block diagrams, flowcharts, schematics, or examples can be implemented, individually and/or collectively, by a wide range of hardware thereof. 
     In one embodiment, examples of the present disclosure may be implemented via Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs). However, the embodiments disclosed herein, in whole or in part, can be equivalently implemented in standard integrated circuits, as one or more computer programs running on one or more computers (e.g., as one or more programs running on one or more computer systems), as one or more programs running on one or more processing circuitries (e.g., micro-processing circuitries), as one or more programs running on one or more processors (e.g., microprocessors), as firmware, or as virtually any combination thereof. 
     In addition, those skilled in the art will appreciate that example mechanisms disclosed herein may be capable of being distributed as a program product in a variety of tangible forms, and that an illustrative embodiment applies equally regardless of the particular type of tangible instruction bearing media used to actually carry out the distribution. Examples of tangible instruction bearing media include, but are not limited to, the following: recordable type media such as floppy disks, hard disk drives, CD ROMs, digital tape, flash drives, and computer memory. 
     The various embodiments described above can be combined with one another to provide further embodiments. For example, two or more of the example embodiments described above may be combined to, for example, improve the safety of the laser printing and reduce the risks associated with laser-related accidents and injuries. These and other changes may be made to the present systems and methods in light of the above detailed description. Accordingly, the disclosure is not limited by the disclosure, but instead its scope is to be determined by the following claims.